Home

User manual "Across Step by Step" v6.0

Contents

1. y Across Language Server v6 0 59795_en Sonja Wagner Projects E EA File View Tools Help O EE aePeOekar crossBoard Projects sux ia he GA Fy ProjectID Name Relation Progress Status Finish Description Projects All A m2 Display texts 0 of Oof1docum 4 25 2014 Q 5 Display texts is Fact sheet_Locali a 0 Oof Ooftdocum 5 1 2014 7 S crossWash_v4 dtxml Ra 4 Fact sheet_Acros Marketing 0 Oof 0of1 docum 5 1 2014 Description of Acro Fact sheet_Across features Across features_EN docx Cockpit English Vereinigte Staaten German Germany A French France E B Factsheet_Localization H 0 Software localization with Across_ Projects New Properties Delete Move to Archive Check Out Reports Update o Name Language Progress Status Deadline Description Tasks it Across features_E 0 0 of 1656 words Oof 2language 5 1 2014 Quality Management Styles Add Document Propertie Delete Jpdate fa Administration lt gt Ready CAP NUM SCRL 2 Click Reports under the top right project pane or click the icon in the Across toolbar in order to start the Report Wizard to generate reports 3 Once the wizard has started click Next gt User Manual Across Step by Step 56 3 Project Management with Across Creating Reports Report Wizard EA m Generate reports z Use the Report Wizard to generate reports e rn 0 a r Fe E
2. Select All Deselect All Invert Selection lt Back Cancel Help 6 Enable the corresponding checkbox to determine whether you would also like to transfer the respective crossTank and or crossTerm entries from your local hard drive to the Server y Deliver Task Wizard cross Tank cross Tem delivery The upload of crossTermm and crossTank entnes is optional for unfinished tasks Please specify whether crossTem and or crossTank entnes shouki be uploaded to the server v Upload crossTank Entries v Upload crossTerm Entries lt Back Cancel Help 7 The desired data are now created and uploaded to the Server or saved in the CRU file y Deliver Task Wizard Delivery progress Eras Action Remaining time Total time crossTerm import export Cancel pE Not available Not available 2 Create CRU Cancel Not available Not available Upload package Cancel Not available Not available Waiting for processed result Cancel Not available Not available 0 KB s Start creating synchronization package lt Back Finish Cancel Help 8 Once task has been transferred or saved click Finish User Manual Across Step by Step 249 T v Delivery certificates OA AA Adding missing fonts 7 crossWAN Working Offline via the Internet Adding Missing Fonts 9 All desired data have been transferred from your local hard drive to the Server or have
3. Show packages of all project managers Select Al Unselect all Invert Selection History lt back Cance Hep 4 The selected crossTank and or crossTerm entries are imported 3 Import crossTank Term Packages Wizard Background execution 4 5 Action Remaining time Total time crossTerm import export Cancel Not available Not available Import translations related with Project Fact sheet_Localization Document Software localization with Across_EN docx n ant Ha 5 Once the import procedure has been completed click Finish User Manual Across Step by Step 113 3 Project Management with Across Restoring Projects from Archive 3 Import crossTank Term Packages Wizard EA Background execution 4 5 Action Remaining time Total time 6 The desired crossTank and or crossTerm entries have now been successfully imported to crossTank and or crossTerm 3 12 Restoring Projects from Archive B The Archive module allows you to temporarily transfer projects to external storage and is aa particularly useful for storing interim revisions or completed projects If needed a project can be restored from the archive at any time The following step by step instructions will help you to restore projects from the archive 1 In the module bar on the left go to the Archive module by clicking gt gt Projects gt gt Archive and select the project you would like to rest
4. O O U Y K K O O U K Select Al Unselect all lt Back Cancel Help User Manual Across Step by Step 12 2 Administering Across Creating Users 11 Now choose the user s areas of specialization Select the corresponding sub subjects from the left pane and click Add gt User Wizard Ez Subjects Please select your subject fiekis om hay General Web sit a GUI Add Manual an Catalog Pad gt Quickstart guide Manual lt Remove Quickstart guide Newsletter Newsletter Add all Remove all lt back Cance Hep 12 Across then generates the combination of subjects and languages You can edit the settings by using the appropriate buttons If you chose to create a softkey for the new user at the beginning of the User Wizard click Next gt Otherwise click Finish to complete setting up the profile for the new user In this case continue with step 15 You can create a softkey for the user in the Softkeys module at any time Additional information on this topic is available in the Softkeys section starting on page 37 y User Wizard Ea Languages AA Source Language Target Language Subject Rating ES English French General 8 Mi German French General 8 E English French GUI 8 ES English French Manual 8 ES Eng sh French Quickstart guide 8 ES English French Newsletter 8 New Properties Delete lt back Cance Hep 13 The dialog box for creating the
5. alee Wane Hp Please note that the attributes selected in the dialog window will only be added to an entry or term if they were not already assigned in the course of the preceding mapping Example In the dialog window select the Finance subject and start the terminology import Among other things term A and term B will be imported During the preceding attribute mapping the Banking subject was assigned to term A Thus in the course of the import term A will be associated with the mapped Banking subject not with the Finance subject selected in this dialog window During the preceding attribute mapping no subject was assigned to term B Thus in the course of the import term B will be associated with the Finance subject selected in this dialog window If you activate the option Check for existing terms and show manual correction dialog in the case of duplicate entries you will be asked whether you would like to combine the information from the two entries After activating this option you can also determine that the manual correction is only to take place if both entries are associated with the same relation or the same subject Additionally you can determine that all imported terms are to be set to Released If this option is disabled the imported terms are set to Unreleased User Manual Across Step by Step 211 Import template 6 crosslerm Importing Terminology 13 14 Click Save im
6. crossTerm Export Wizard 6 crossTerm Exporting Terminology However the decision whether or not to export the terminology in the TBX format also depends on how you want to use the data as the TBX format though being a standardized format is not yet supported as import format by all TM systems CSV format The CSV format is suitable for exporting terminology data if you want to edit or process the data outside Across CSV files can easily be opened and edited in Excel or in a text editor Moreover they are more versatile than TBX files as CSV is a more widely distributed import format than TBX Since TBX is XML based the manual processing of TBX data is usually more difficult and less comfortable 6 2 1 TBX Format The TermBase eXchange format TBX format is an exchange format that standardizes the presentation of terminology databases and renders it exchangeable between different tools or translators with a minimum of information loss The crossTerm Export Wizard helps you to export your existing crossTerm data 1 Start the crossTerm Export Wizard In the crossTerm Manager you can start the wizard via the corresponding section on the crossTerm Manager start page via the E icon in the toolbar or via gt gt Tools gt gt Export in the menu bar crossTerm Export Wizard Export terminology 4 Use the crossTerm Export Wizard to export terminology database or parts of it in local file This wizard also a
7. J System Settings Sonar Word 2007 2013 ff Local kd New Delete Import Export Reporting A Document settings template Segmentation default Structure Attributes aa 2 Subjects Description 2 System Attributes Z User defined Dictionary GB Search Center Concordance Search E Fuzzy Saach Customize Word 2007 2013 Settings Terminology Concordance Search Add Edit Delete Load 2 Stopwords ka Tem Extraction EE e Document Settings P ACROSS_HIDDEN q Hide Peress NET resources q B 2 Display text ACROSS_LOCKED Lock E i hi ACROSS Placeable_C Read Only B Z Excel 2000 2003 ACROSS_Placeable_P Lock Excel 2007 2013 Image Ignore BA B IDML Object ER Ignore Ls MIF7 Document property 8 Ignore MIF 8 11 PowerPoint 2000 2003 E PowerPoint 2007 2013 QuickSiver bo B Tagged HTML 2 Tagged SGML AS B Tagged XML Tagged XML v2 Z Visual XML fan 2 Windows Resources Word 2000 2003 3 2 XLIFF Splitting settings Advanced Help 3 Click New enter the name of the new template and confirm with OK J New Template ok coen 4 The new template has been created You can enter additional information into the Description field 3 System Settings n Word 2007 2013 Reporting A Segmentation Structure Attributes Subjects System Attributes Document template for Word files by Across AUUE SOUND 000E 000E SHUTTLE User defined
8. When you work with the online client you have a permanent connection to the Across Server Please login with the usermame and password sent to you by the administrator 3 After Across has started the dialog box for entering the basic information regarding the Quick Translate translation appears automatically First select a project within which the translation should be done If Temporary project is selected a project is created that is then automatically deleted as soon as the translation is completed Select the relation the subject the source and target languages and define whether 100 matches should be automatically saved to the target text Then as a final step select the template that should be used to check in the document Then click OK fy Quick translate Document type Word 2007 2013 v Project lt TEMPORARY PROJECT gt v Source language English v Vereinigte Staaten v Target document language German v Germany y Document template default y Configure a E E E A a r Relations Marketing y x Subjects Flyer y 4 The document check in procedure begins 3 Background execution EA Action Remaining time Total time Z Software localization with Across_EN docx Cancel esc Not available Not available Document post processing Cancel All Close this window automatically after check in Minimize User Manual Across Step by Step 132 4 Translating and Correcti
9. g http localhost crossWeb Login aspx P by crossWeb across v6 0 5979 X RE File Edit View Favorites Tools Help English United States ix crossWeb Please enter your login name and password below to get access to crossWeb Login name Password Authentication type Copyright 2004 2014 Across Systems GmbH 2 First select the language in which the crossWeb interface should be displayed The interface is available in English German and French English United States mA French France 3 Log in with your Across user name and your password if needed 4 crossWeb opens up The My Tasks module displays the tasks already assigned to you Be O s Hp ocatnost crosswebrmainasoe O 6y crossweb across v io s079 x File Edit View Favorites Tools Help C Confimsect al tasis ConimyRejet Open Report Pre translation a Document translation Fact sheet_Across featu Across features_EN docx Ss 01 May 2014 EG SF a ee Document review Fact sheet_Localization Software localization with Across_E 100 gt o1 May 2014 Document correction Fact sheet_Localization Software localization with Across_E 100 gt o1 May 2014 Across features_EN docx E 17 Apr 2014 Englisch Vereinigte Staaten ine 01 May 2014 Deutsch Deutschland J 99 Document translation 5 Select the correction task you want to work on 6 Click Confirm Reject at the top
10. What is TMX crossTank Export Wizard T 5 crossTank Exporting Translation Memories E Across v6 0 59795_en crossTank Manager Across Systems GmbH B ES H ERR File Edit View Tools Help Search pane ax xX E g 3 H y ST gt J ui Source sentence Matching m The use of a special font e g your corporate font a valuable resource that is part of your corporate design represents another fet naear challenge as due to license related reasons it is usually not possible to issue these fonts to your translators A Q However the limited size of these displays makes the localization of display texts a challenge For example the translator needs to 100 observe text length or pixel count restrictions as well as the characteristics of the font Concordance search y 2 Today virtually all technical devices have displays that show information on operating functions instructions or error messages ona 100 small area Across delivers a Web based solution for the localization of display texts enabling you to master these requirements with ease 100 Real Time Length Check for Proportional Fonts 100 Moreover the preferred terms or terms not to be used can be tagged with attributes 100 _ Server context Different states define whether a term has already been released 100 Date Extract relevant terminology from existing texts
11. lt Back cancel ne User Manual Across Step by Step 46 3 Project Management with Across Creating Projects 12 Now you can adjust the due dates of the individual tasks In the line containing the task whose due date you want to adjust click the respective column and make the needed adjustment Subsequently click Finish to finish the project setup fy Project Wizard EJ Deadlines Peg In this step you can define a deadline for each task type Adjustments can be done any time in the Tasks Module Project finish date 5 1 2014 v 15 20 Workflow Task type Deadiine date Deadline time Translation and correction R Document translation 5 1 2014 15 20 Translation and correction Document correction 5 1 2014 v 15 20 4 May 2014 b Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat 277 2 2 3 EF 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 2 23 4 25 26 27 28 29 3 3 1 2 3 4 6 7 C Today 4 17 2014 lt tc cance Feo 13 The check in process begins the source document s is are analyzed and prepared for processing During check in an initial QM check is performed for the criteria activated in the properties of the respective tasks in the Workflow module Depending on the document the check in procedure can take several minutes J Background execution EA Acton Remaining time Total time Across features_EN docx Cancel SS Not available 03 sec Document post processing Cancel Al V Close this window aut
12. Administration Ready CAP NUM SCRL User Manual Across Step by Step 100 3 Project Management with Across crossGrid 3 Select the package you want to retrieve crossGrid Retrieve 4 Click Retrieve in order to start the crossGrid Retrieve Wizard for retrieving Wizard packages 5 Once the wizard has started click Next gt iy crossGrid Retrieve Wizard EA Retrieve a delegated project a a The crossGrid Retrieve Wizard supports you by retrieving a project that was delegated to your Across Server rd a Hep 6 Decide whether you want to download the package directly from the Master Server in this case select the package via the drop down list or import the package in the form of a GWU file Grid Working Unit that contains all data needed for processing the tasks and that is provided to you by the project manager on the Master Server side To import the package as GWU file select the corresponding option and click Browse Select the GWU file and click Open Then click Next gt fy crossGrid Retrieve Wizard Ea Please select the retrieval mode Please select the retneval mode Retneve package directly from server Translation Unit EMEA v Server Across Systems GmbH State Not downloaded C Import package from GWU grid working unit file _ Verify reports after retrieval lt Back Cane Hep 7 The information about the package is displayed If you wish change the name a
13. Entry properties summary New entry properties count 0 Selected entry properties count 1 Show Term shoelace New term properties count 0 Selected term properties count 2 Show lt lt Less options on sto cons 15 After the import you can store the log file on your local machine provided you activated the respective option at the beginning of the crossTerm import wizard see step 6 Click Finish to exit the wizard E crossTerm Import Wizard Ex Import progress q Import successful Remaining time 0 00 00 elapsed time 0 00 19 Save log file as 16 The terminology contained in the Star Martif file has now been imported to crossTerm and is available for your translation work 6 2 Exporting Terminology Use the following step by step instructions to quickly learn how to export crossTerm entries in TBX format for example when you are backing up your crossTerm database TBX or CSV When selecting the most suitable format for exporting terminology data you should especially take the following aspects into consideration e TBX format TBX is a standardized format for the exchange of terminology data Usually we recommend exporting terminology in this format especially if you intend to re import the data to Across later on or if you want to back up your terminology Unlike the CSV format the TBX format also allows the export of images User Manual Across Step by Step 213 p What is TBX
14. E Profile Wizard Administer default settings e 9 Use the Profile Wizard to create or modify profiles These are sets of default settings that are assigned to users or user groups via the User or Group Wizard _ Do not show this info again lt Bax 4 Enter aname and if you wish a description for the new profile Select a profile to use as the basis for the new profile Click Next gt to confirm these details User Manual Across Step by Step 2 Administering Across Creating Profiles y Profile Wizard Administer default settings 6 5 General Profile name Advanced Profile z ecccecoococeoososoccososoococossoooocsesoccooocsocosoossoooeeesesoseocoooosooeeosocecoesssooceososooesesosoooocoosoceoosoooecosesoososoosesoosssos lt Back Canca Hep 5 Carry out the desired settings in the various areas of the new profile fy Profile Wizard Administer default settings 4 5 Days displayed v Monday v Tuesday v Wednesday J Thursday V Friday J Saturday v Sunday i i crossSearch v Monday V Tuesday v Wednesday Languages v Thursday v Friday Saturday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Review Thursday Friday v Saturday Quality Management Source Context View Target Editor cmon Fein cma Heb
15. Use auto adjustment to ignore duplicate translations slower import Beck ma He In the import mode without user interaction all ambiguous translation units that would require interaction e g translation units with different numbers of segments are saved to a separate TMX file These translation units can later be imported separately This mode is especially recommended for extensive TMX imports To run the import without user interaction select this mode and click Browse Enter a name and a location for the TMX file with the ambiguous translation units and click Save Import template If you created an import template during a previous import of a TMX file see step 15 you can select it now To do this click Browse select the template with the file extension import and click Open Use an import template only for another import of the same data as during the creation of the import template or for an import of other data with the same attributes and attribute values Finally you can determine that Across is to perform auto adjustments during the import Across will try to adjust crossTank entries with respect to placeables formatting and tags in which e g only a placeable is different These entries will not be stored as two cross Tank entries but only as one crossTank entry We recommend performing the crossTank import with auto adjustments as this usually provides better import results Further informati
16. mtf v 6 Select the mode with which you want to import the terminology file You can run the import with or without user interaction User Manual Across Step by Step 207 6 crossTerm Importing Terminology E crossTerm Import Wizard Select file to impot q Select file to import C Terminology StarMartif_Sample mtf Browse Select import mode Import with user interaction Import without user interaction all questionable entnes will be stored to a TMX TBX file goceeccccceccccsccececsecsceecscseccecsose lt tack cma He Import mode In the mode without user interaction all ambiguous terminology entries that would require interaction e g when importing homographs are saved to a separate TBX file These terminology entries can later be imported en bloc This mode is especially recommended for extensive terminology imports To run the import without user interaction select this mode and click Browse Enter a name and a location for the separate TBX file and click Save Log file A new option enables you to determine that a log file with detailed information on the import is to be created during the import The log will will be stored locally in the log directory of the respective Windows user You can access the log directory e g via the link in the log directory of the Across installation folder The log file can also be saved locally by means of a button in the final step of the crossTerm Impor
17. 6 When opening your task the first paragraph to Translating with Across cross Tank Sig 3 concordance search amp w o B Ubersetzen mit Across 8 eee crossSearch 8 Relations Marketing A Translated CAP NUM SCRL be translated is automatically activated The active paragraph is highlighted in light blue in the Source View The active sentence appears in black and all other sentences in the paragraph are grayed out Now type in your translation in the Target Editor sentence by sentence Across automatically detects when a new sentence begins As soon as you have translated a sentence the next sentence to be translated will be activated automatically y Across Language Server v6 0 59795_en Sonja Wagner crossDesk Document translation Across features_EN docx Fact sheet_Across features Marketing 0 File View Tools Help OA EE NEE l 8OSG92 S8SG888000P AA BEEL RAZARA aoe wee seHE Qa Qe crossTerm ax I V 10 IP Q S terminology system E 5 Translating with Across The crossTerm A m 1 Terminologiesystem j m E B Terminology System Consistent Terminology for All g B Wrench or spanner Tennis shoes 8 E or sneakers Consistent terminology is a key B element of your corporate identity and shapes the B external perception of your enterprise Moreover B if you have documentation product information 2 and other documents translated in va
18. C Word files Word 2007 2013 Add file s Add folder lt Back Cancel Help 6 Click Next gt 7 f necessary add any additional project related information You can choose one or several project managers but you are pre selected as project managers In addition you can determine a project due date as well as insert a project description with comments etc As a project due date a date is already pre selected that is two weeks from the date of project creation Furthermore you can define a reporting template to be used for all reports generated within the scope of the project Reporting templates can be created under gt gt Tools gt gt System Settings gt gt General gt gt Reporting Further information on the report templates is available in the corresponding area of the system settings in chapter 3 11 2 of the user manual Across at a Glance Additionally you can also select a project settings template and set the project to released By using the project settings templates you can ensure that all involved in a project translators correctors etc work with the same settings e g those for the crossTank penalties The individuals involved in the project cannot change the defined project settings Further information on the project settings templates is available in the corresponding section of chapter 4 1 4 in the manual Across at a Glance Using the project state released you can deter
19. Cross User Manual Across Step by Step v6 0 Revision July 29 2014 Copyright 2004 2014 Across Systems GmbH The contents of this document may not be copied or made available to third parties in any other way without the written permission of Across Systems GmbH Though utmost care has been taken to ensure the correctness of the content neither Across Systems GmbH nor the author assume any responsibility for errors or missing content in this document or incorrect interpretation of the content All mentioned brands are property of the respective owners Table of Contents Table of Contents 1 2 3 4 About THIS DOCUMENTATION sssaaa anaana aivan aaa ana ieai 5 1 1 INTRODUCTION siheri E E 5 Wee CONG onea a a cas a aa arain 5 Moe GONWENTIONS coin a doy snaloubetueitaantovanhantoncdaicueetiaieakewtans 6 1 4 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION ccccsccccsssscecusescneuseuensoueuecsoususcucusuuensuueuenseueussuensuss 6 AO REED BACK stat vance ta ztwoateebcitadinei a aera 6 1 6 DOCUMENT VERSIONS ccccscccesceceseeceeeeeeneeceneeceeeeeueeteneeteneenseeteeetaneeteneeneeeeaes 7 MOMINISTCRING ACIOSS raio E EEA A 8 2 CREATING USERS omuia e a eee edema 8 2 2 CREATING USERS WITH WINDOWS AUTHENTICATION 0 ccccceseeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeaeeees 15 2 3 CREATING GROUPS AND USER CROWDS cccccssssccceceeeeeceeeeeeeeeceeesaeeeeeesseanees 20 231 GhEAUINO GlOUDS oies aenn Oe AE T E T T O A OE 21 Zoe Creating User
20. Doing a correction task in the Edit Mode Make all the corrections to the sentences in the first paragraph in the Target Editor To go to the next or previous sentence of a paragraph use the S or icons in the Source View toolbar to activate the sentence If you have finished the corrections for a paragraph set the state to checked D To do this click the corresponding icon in the crossDesk toolbar or use the Alt C shortcut key You can delegate a paragraph back to the translator for revision by setting it to the editing state touched S Switch to the next paragraph To do this click the desired paragraph or click the icon in the navigation toolbar If you prefer you can also use the shortcut key Alt Down Arrow To switch to the next paragraph that has been assigned the translated state use the amp icon in the navigation toolbar or the Ctrl Alt Right Arrow shortcut key User Manual Across Step by Step 127 Correcting translations in the Correction Mode 4 Translating and Correcting Documents in Across Correcting Translations y Across Language Server v6 0 59795_en Sonja Wagner crossDesk Document correction Software localization with Across_EN docx Fact sheet_Localization M E File View Tools Help HA EEE ES l mt OSE 6868808880800 RAB mE EaA ERANG H erossview i saomaese a Q crossTerm ax w 1 10 IF Q m z 3 Software localization with Across EN doc LOCalizing Soft
21. Instance a y Select instance for export mij Default Across Server v Export language pairs Source language English v pocccescoseccocscococossscosecooseccossosecessescssecoosesosooe o A caoat ma He Defining filters 6 You can use various filters that can be combined to narrow down or restrict the cross Term entries you would like to export The following quick filters are available server local users date status and homographs e The filters are structured hierarchically After activating the corresponding filters Mi especially of the filter Server the desired filter functions can be defined over several levels Using the drop down list you can also select user defined filters and filter sets to narrow down the search Once you have made all the settings click Next gt a crossTerm Export Wizard EJ Adjust filters r Select filters for export wocescsssacuccsscesccssccesuccneccsesescuscvesssssssoccccssssccascsssscscccsccccess lt Back cancel He Select languages 7 Enable the corresponding checkbox to select the languages for which you would like to export the crossTerm entries User Manual Across Step by Step 216 6 crossTerm Exporting Terminology al crossTerm Export Wizard Select languages r Select languages to export Language Export ee ne German French Dutch Italan Spanish lt 000D Se
22. PD EEE sat tea biat laan can a we Subsequently the crossTank Maintenance Wizard will automatically be started with the action Remove sentence duplicates The source sentence of the selected translation unit is already inserted in the input field and the removal can be performed 5 4 4 3 Removing Translation Duplicates The action Remove translation duplicates deletes translation duplicates from the cross Tank database Translation duplicates usually originate from program or database errors The action Remove translation duplicates deletes the superfluous entries so that only one cross Tank entry is left after the deletion From the technical perspective a crossTank entry is a connection between two segments a source segment and a target segments that are stored separately in the cross Tank database Translation duplicates are duplicate or multiple identical crossTank entries i e multiple connections between the same source and target segments Thus translation duplicates are redundant and are not needed The action Remove translation duplicates is always performed for all entries in cross Tank Therefore the selection of a language pair the definition of filters and the preview function are not available for this action User Manual Across Step by Step 169 Deletion 5 cross lank cross lank Maintenance The deletion of translation duplicates is subject to the following rules e All existing values
23. Properties 2 The view will jump to the respective bibliographic entry which is the destination of the index cross reference eect Default Across Server Default Layout Entry Editenty t Addterm E Merge entry Duplicate entry X Delete entry ID 30394 Properties Title Duden Die deutsche Rechtschreibung Year of publication 2013 Indexes ff Bibliography Duden 1 aininistrative inh ti Created by Sonja Wagner Creation date 4 29 2014 9 17 26 AM Modified by Sonja Wagner Modification date 4 29 2014 9 17 26 AM Subsequently you can return to the previous terminology entry e g using the icon in the toolbar of the crossTerm Manager User Manual Across Step by Step 242 Retrieve Task Wizard T v 7 cross WAN Working Offline via the Internet Retrieving crossWAN Tasks 7 crossWAN Working Offline via the Internet In this chapter Retrieving crossWAN tasks see below Delivering crossWAN tasks page 246 Adding missing fonts page 250 General information on working offline in Across via the Internet is available in chapter 8 of the user manual Across at a Glance 7 1 Retrieving crossWAN Tasks The following step by step instructions will help you to learn how to retrieve tasks along with all relevant data in the crossWAN load or crossWAN classic mode You can either download the data from the central Across Server to your local hard drive crossWAN l
24. Release project v Profile Add Attributes M Languages Delete attributes iv Fonts Assign Unassign tasks Vv Relations Assign Unassign tasks e _ crossTank Add Edit Delete Notes v crossTerm Manage All L User Profile General y 1 Allows users of this group to use all layouts of Default Across Server i Offine users cannot be assigned to this group lt Back cana Hep 6 Click Finish to adopt the settings and complete the setup of the new group 7 The new group now appears in the list of groups You can now assign users to the new group e g in the course of creating a new user Existing users can be assigned to the new group in the User module by firstly selecting the respective user by clicking Properties and then in the Membership tab selecting the new group in the left window area Then click gt The user is now a member of the newly created group Now click OK to accept the changes Continue with the assignment until all of the desired users have been assigned to the new group User Manual Across Step by Step 22 Integrating new groups in workflows T User Crowds A aA Groups module 2 Administering Across Creating Groups and User Crowds y Across Language Server v6 0 59795_en Sonja Wagner Groups gt E ES File View Tools Help El amp ok HE ie E E 4 gi crossBoard Groupe as amp Across Language Portal Solutions Acr Name Description A Pr
25. To ensure a smooth import of Multi Term terminology to Across the corresponding termbase definition file can be selected during the import Before you importing the terminology to Across we urgently recommend exporting the termbase definition file in addition to the actual terminology and selecting this file during the import to Across Follow the instructions below to export a termbase definition file from Trados MultiTerm 1 Start MultiTerm In the example MultiTerm Version 7 5 was used 2 Inthe menu bar use the menu item gt gt Termbase gt gt Open Close Termbases to select the terminology database for which you want to export the termbase definition file 3 Goto gt gt Termbase gt gt Save Termbase Definition as SDL Multiterm Project Untitled xdp 9 Ggate te Ofen Close Termbases Ctrl 0 Loatyexternal Termbase F Termbase Catalogue Alt Enter sil Import Entries Ctrl Shift 1 8 Export Entries Ctrl Shift 4 Enter the name and storage location of the termbase definition file to be exported and click Save 5 The termbase definition file can now be selected and used for the terminology import to Across Follow the step by step instructions starting on page 195 10 5 Terminology from Star TermStar Follow the instructions below to export terminology bases from Star TermStar in the MARTIF format For additional information on exporting terminology bases from Star TermStar please
26. Use Edit Profile to view and edit the profile settings of a user To delete a user select the corresponding user from the list click Delete and then Yes in the next dialog box User Manual Across Step by Step 14 Pe i 2 Administering Across Creating Users with Windows Authentication y Across Language Server v6 0 59795_en Sonja Wagner Users B ES File View Tools Help O B amp G Faas a gt crossBoard LE as amp amp v Name PM Lastlogin Loginstate E mail i amp Christian Ziegler amp Sonja Wagner b 4 17 1201 Online sonja wagner example com Administration ow Claire Dutreil wo Matt Jefferson lt nla gt Offline matt jefferson example com w Default Supervisor amp Helen Parker lt a gt Offline helen parker example com wo Denis Girardin wo Denis Girardin lt nla gt Offline denis girardin example com amp Helen Parker amp Default Supervisor fe 411720141 Offine RA d Matt Jefferson y Claire Dutred lt n a gt Offline Claire dutred example com wo Sonja Wagner wo Christian Ziegler lt nla gt Offline christian ziegler example com Users Groups New Properties Delete Calenda Message EEN amp Source Lan TargetLanguage Subject Rating Profiles Relations Languages Eonts lt gt Ready CAP NUM SCRL 2 2 Creating Users with Windows Authentication Instead of logging in to Across in the normal way with a user name and password an Across user can also log in to Across using
27. al crossTerm Import Wizard Map picklist values q Please specify the mapping of Star Martif pickiist values to Across pickist values Note All information of Star Martif data category values that are not mapped to Across data category values gets lost Pickiist Value Across pickist Across value 2 Z Term TS_Status Nicht validiert Status Not released v B Tem TS_Gender Grammatical gender other gender Y B Tem TS_Gender m Grammatical gender masculine y Bl Tem TS_Gender n Grammatical gender neuter Y S Term TS_Gender f Grammatical gender feminine v B Tem TS_Updateld grueneberg_d Modified by None y B Entry TS_Updateld grueneberg_d Modified by None v E Tem TS_Createld grueneberg_d Created by None y B Entry TS_Createld grueneberg_d Created by None y lt Back Cancel Heip 12 Now add other attributes to the termbase you would like to import al crossTerm Import Wizard Ea Specify general import parameters q Default values for data categories wil be overridden by mapped values Type Data category Value Term e ev Term Relations None v Entry Subjects General v Entry Relations Sales v Entry Projects None v Tem Subjects None v Entry Term Created by Sonja Wagner Entry Term Creation date 4 24 2014 v _ Check for already existing terms and show manual correction dialog Only for the same relation Only for the same subject Set released state for terms Save import template
28. localization J M z O search main i ee fuzzy GY Editterm X Delete term L m main entry term m P 7 k EJ English All countries FJ German All countries noun group PS Fuzzy Suche Nit ie m target language p m terminology system Q transtator R S T M m w X Y lt gt Entry Sonja Wagner 4 24 2014 10 17 01 AM Sonja Wagner 4 24 2014 10 17 01 AM Term Sonja Wagner 4 24 2014 10 17 01 AM Sonja Wagner 4 24 2014 10 17 01 AM Select All Invert Selection 8 terms found CAP NUM SCRL 6 1 3 MultiTerm Formats MultiTerm terminology can be imported either in the TXT or in the XML format MultiTerm iX The following step by step instructions will help you learn how to import existing termbases that were exported from Trados MultiTerm in TXT or XML format Information on exporting termbases from MultiTerm is available in the step by step instructions starting on page 278 The export file of the terminology exported from MultiTerm does not contain any information that distinguishes picklist entries from term list entries This information is only contained in termbase definition files XDT files which also contain other structural information of the particular MultiTerm termbase To ensure a smooth import of Multi Term terminology to Across the corresponding termbase definition file can be selected during the import Before you importing the terminology to Across we urgently recommend exporting the termbase definition file
29. match making dialog skip paragraphs with different amount of sentences Genes 9 The Check Out Wizard will then begin automatically returning the document to its original format After the wizard starts click Next gt Further information on checking documents out is available in the step by step gt instructions starting on page 82 y Check Out Wizard Ea Select check out options E Use the Check Out Wizard to restore your translation to its original format and save the target document outside Across The data stored within Across are retained This means that a check out can be carried out several times and at various stages during the translation of the document gescecccencessnsensescssnesacssenssacneceseacescasencosenseacees Neevcnsencencnsncensessnceacsssncensnscnsensensncsnecectaeneeaces Cancel Heip 10 Click Next gt y Check Out Wizard Please select documents E MISS Please select the source and target documents you would like to export Document Language Progress Software localization with M German Germany Finished Select All Deselect All lt back cance Hep User Manual Across Step by Step 134 4 Translating and Correcting Documents in Across Quick Translate 11 Then select the location to which the document should be saved Now define whether a folder should created in which to save the document Click Check Out to start the check
30. 104 crossGrid Retrieve Wizard 99 cross Tank 136 backup 156 export 156 maintenance 161 support action 171 cross Tank backup 156 cross Tank Export Wizard 156 cross Tank Import Wizard 145 cross Tank Maintenance Wizard 161 changing attributes 164 counting sentence duplicates 171 deleting crossTank entries 166 removing redundant translations 167 removing sentence duplicates 168 removing sentence duplicates by text 168 removing translation duplicates 169 171 crossTerm 172 backup 213 bibliographic entries 237 bibliographic sources 237 creating filter sets 229 creating layouts 231 creating user defined filters 225 export 213 importing terminology CSV file format 181 MultiTerm 195 index entries 237 indexes User Manual Across Step by Step bibliographic sources 237 cross Term backup 213 crossTerm Export Wizard 213 crossTerm Filter Set Wizard 229 crossTerm Filter Wizard 225 crossTerm Import Wizard 172 cross Term Layout Wizard 231 crossWAN delivery certificates 250 crossWeb check out documents 258 creating projects 253 CRU file create 246 export 246 CSV export 219 import 181 CWU file import 243 Deliver Task Wizard 247 delivery certificates 250 document check in 40 documents document settings templates 60 create 60 customize 61 embedded objects 47 export CSV format 219 TBX format 214 terminology 213 TMX format 156 translation memories 156 Export Proj
31. As the date of modification of the entry in crossTerm is after the date of modification of the entry in the CSV file the properties of the crossTerm entry will be used when the entry is imported User Manual Across Step by Step 191 6 crossTerm Importing Terminology Following the import the entry will have the editing date 7 31 2013 Click Next gt Exclusion 25 Now you can determine whether entries or terms that cannot be imported for various file reasons are to be written to an exclusion file Click Browse to define the storage location and file name Further information on exclusion files is available in chapter 7 13 3 of the user manual gt Across at a Glance Then click Next gt crossTerm Import Wizard Specify additional import parameters q Select exclusion file Browse lt back Cance Hep 26 Now add other attributes to the termbase you would like to import a crossTerm Import Wizard Specify general import parameters p Default values for data categories will be overridden by mapped values Type Data category Value Tem Projects None v Tem Relations None Y Entry Relations Technical Documentation v Entry Projects None v Tem Subjects None v Entry Term Created by Sonja Wagner v Entry Term Creation date 4 24 2014 v Check for already existing terms and show manual correction dialog Only for the same relation Only for the same subject Set released state
32. Creating User Defined Layouts iy crossTerm Layout Wizard Ea Define order of tem properties ial _ ccecsccececcsscccecccseccecessg _ User defined order Properties order Tem type A Part of speech Grammatical gender Grammatical number Degree of synonymy Stockkeeping unit Part number Collocation Set phrase Usane note lt back Cance Hep 10 Now specify the display formatting of the data categories at entry level To do this select a data category and click Define formatting y crossTerm Layout Wizard ER Entry property formatting ro Property Subjects Note Definition Relations Projects Title preview Value preview Sample Sample Define formatting lt back Canel Hep 11 For every data category you can specify an individual formatting The formatting settings dialog window consists of the following three areas 1 Title formatting In this section you can determine the formatting of the name of the respective data category e g how the text of the data category Subject is to be displayed in the new layout 2 Value formatting In this section you can determine the formatting of the values of the respective data category In the case of the data category Subject for example you can determine how the respective values e g Technology are to be displayed 3 Spacing and indentation In this section you can determine the line spacing and the indentation of the
33. Delete Move to Archive Check Out Reports Update o O Name Language Progress Status Deadline Description Tasks M Software localizatio 100 394 of 394 wor Finished 5 1 2014 si a Quality Styles Add Document Properties ee lt gt Ex 2 Click Check out below the project pane on the upper right to run the Check Out Check Out Wizard Wizard to finish a project e You can also start the Check Out Wizard without being in the Projects module To do this use gt gt File gt gt Check out project or click the icon in the wizard toolbar User Manual Across Step by Step 82 3 Project Management with Across Finishing Projects Please note that if you use this method in a first step after the Check Out Wizard starts you will need to determine a project for which documents are to be checked out 3 Once the wizard has started click Next gt fy Check Out Wizard Select check out options 7 MS x Use the Check Out Wizard to restore your translation to its original format and save the target document outside Across The data stored within Across are retained This means that a check out can be carried out several times and at various stages during the translation of the document a E 4 Enable the corresponding checkbox to select the translations to be exported If you wish to export all documents in all target languages you can use the Activate all button Click the icons that appear when moving
34. Keep comments and bookmarks at update Comment FileCreatedS v Add lt Back Next gt Cancel Heip 5 Now you can determine whether the comments and bookmarks that may be contained in the original versions of the documents are to be retained in the updated versions Under Comment Properties you can insert comments that will be written to the properties of the respective document version In addition to this when localizing Windows resources you can enter information in the comment area via the drop down list You can add the following details Field Description FileCreated Date and time of creation FileDate File date FileName Filename FileOwner File owner FilePath File path at check in FileSize File size FileTime Time of check in User Manual Across Step by Step 269 9 Special Workflows and Tasks Updating Documents 6 Click Next gt to start analyzing the new document s y Update Wizard 0 Ea Update translations gt C The path and filename s have not changed C Word files Across features_EN docx The filename and or path have changed C Word files Across features_EN_update docx Browse V Keep comments and bookmarks at update Comment FieSizeS lt Back Next gt Cancel Help 7 The updated document s is are now analyzed compared to the old versions and prepared for editing in Across y Update Wizard 2 EN Update translations j Checking C Word files
35. Map TMX attribute values to Across values aE Please specify the mapping of TMX attribute values to Across attribute values If you cannot find an appropriate Across value e g user Subject relation project you should create a new value in Across and return to this wizard Note All information of TMX attribute values that are not mapped to Across values get lost TMX attribute TMX value Across attribute Across value B lastuser Sonja Wagner Across user last us Sonja Wagner y 3 lastuser unknown Across user lastus None v Relations Marketing Relations 5 storing mode 1 Smarty inserted Status B changeid attr Sonja Wagner Across user modifie Project for all entries Projects F aoe i Subjects Technical Documentation creationid attr Sonja Wagner Across user create Sona wage aT mA lt Back Next gt Cancel Help 14 Continue until all TMX attribute values are mapped to the respective Across attribute values Then click Next gt Information contained in TMX attribute values that are not mapped to any Across attributes will be lost during the import process Import template 15 During the import of a TMX file click Save import template to create a template with the settings you selected for the import and a file extension import If you want to import the same data or other data with the same attributes and attribute values later on you can use the template for
36. been saved in the CRU file If you have created a CRU file you only need to send the task you have worked on to the project manager The project manager will import it thereby gaining access to all relevant data 10 You receive a corresponding message as soon as the transferred files have been processed by the Across Server J Transmission Type Client Response Unit CRU Sender Helen Parker Sent date 27 05 2014 11 19 Processed date 27 05 2014 11 19 Involved tasks T Project Document Lang Imported R Fact sheet_Localization Software localization with Acro gt BS yes Processed result CRU was successfully processed Report 3 Incoming Message From First name Helen Date 27 05 2014 Time 11 19 Last name Parker Project E mail helen parker example cc Relation Message History Server has processed CRU from user Helen Parker with A Task Document translation State Finished Owner Helen Parker Project Fact sheet_Localization Document Software localization with Across_EN docx Source language Englisch Vereinigte Staaten Target language Deutsch Deutschland Y Delivery certificates provide evidence of the successful delivery of tasks You can create such a certificate under gt gt Tools gt gt Delivery Certificates Subsequently select the respective task and click OK in order to generate the certificate 7 3 Adding Missing Fonts The following step by step instructions show how
37. crossGrid online or import them in the form of a GWU Grid Working Unit file crossGrid classic In this case the project manager on Master Server side should provide this file to you on a suitable data medium e g a CD or a USB stick by e mail or as an FTP download User Manual Across Step by Step 99 yr crossGrid module Selective list update 3 Project Management with Across crossGrid The crossGrid Retrieve Wizard assists you in retrieving packages delegated to your Across Server The connection and communication between the Across Servers that are linked by crossGrid are secured by Server Certificate Package files SCP files Please note that these files need to be exchanged outside Across for example by e mail and imported to Across via gt gt Tools gt gt System Settings gt gt General gt gt crossGrid prior to connecting the Servers Further information on importing SCP files is available in the part on the crossGrid settings in chapter 3 11 2 of the user manual Across at a Glance Please consult the Administrator Manual for information on generating SCP files Please note that you need to have the appropriate rights in order to download delegated packages to your Across Server By default the project manager is responsible for retrieving delegated tasks 1 Click the module bar on the left to switch to the crossGrid module via gt gt Projects gt gt crossGrid Retrieving packag
38. usually a segment should occur only once in cross Tank Usually the support action only needs to be executed at the request of the Across support desk and merely serves support and analysis purposes Please note that the determined number of sentence duplicates is usually an approximate value that requires further examination 5 4 6 Support Action Count Translation Duplicates The action Count translation duplicates determines the number of translation duplicates existing in crossTank Usually the support action only needs to be executed at the request of the Across support desk and merely serves support and analysis purposes From the technical perspective a crossTank entry is a connection between two segments a source segment and a target segments that are stored separately in the cross Tank database Translation duplicates are duplicate or multiple identical crossTank entries i e multiple connections between the same source and target segments Thus translation duplicates are redundant and are not needed Please note that the determined number of translation duplicates is usually an approximate value that requires further examination User Manual Across Step by Step 171 What is TBX TBX Basic G crossTerm Import Wizard 6 cross Term Importing Terminology 6 crosslTerm In this chapter Importing terminology see below Exporting terminology page 213 Creating user defined crossTerm filters
39. zu finden Doch gerade die kompakte Form macht die Lokalisierung der Displaytexte zur gro en Herausforderung Sie m ssen schlie lich begrenzte Textl ngen oder die Pixelanzahl beim v bersetzen genauso beachten wie die However the limited size of these displays makes the localization of display texts a challenge For example the translator needs to observe text length or pixel count restrictions as sunll ae than chen ctavicticn nf tha Enni Edit match Remove match Remove all Join all Save matches Cancel Help 18 While importing the translation units Across checks the numbers they contain on the basis of predefined rules If the source segment and the target segment contain different amounts of numbers a dialog window indicating this will be displayed Click Store translation to import the translation unit to crossTank or click Edit translation to edit the translation unit before importing it User Manual Across Step by Step 154 5 cross Tank Importing Translation Memories fy Suspicious translation The source text en US and the target text de DE contain a different amount of numbers 4 and 3 respectively When stored to crossTank numbers in this translation wil not be auto changed during pre transiation Source text Across Systems GmbH A Info Hotline 49 7248 925 425 international across net Target text Across Systems Gmb
40. 230 T Your own layouts gt D 6 cross Term Creating User Defined Layouts By default a newly created public filter set is available to all user groups The use of each public filter set is controlled by means of a respective right in the user group rights In this way the filter set will be available to the users of the assigned groups for search queries The rights can be assigned or revoked in the Public filters filter sets subsection of the crossTerm section of the user group rights Go to the Groups module via gt gt Administration gt gt Groups and select the group to which you want to assign or from which you want to revoke the new filter set Then click Properties select the User rights tab and click gt gt crossTerm gt gt Public filters filter sets to access the section of the filter rights Activate or deactivate the checkboxes to assign the filter set to the corresponding user groups or revoke it Filter sets can be defined as public even if the user defined filters they contain are non public filters To adapt a filter set select it in the dialog window for the management of user defined filters and filter sets and click Edit 6 5 Creating User Defined Layouts The following step by step instructions will help you to create crossTerm user defined layouts by means of the crossTerm Layout Wizard A crossTerm layout defines the data categories to be displayed in crossTerm as well as the order
41. 6 Click Finish to adopt the settings and complete the setup of the new profile 7 The new profile appears in the list of profiles To edit the settings of a profile at any time select the corresponding profile click Properties and then modify the settings as required User Manual Across Step by Step 29 2 Administering Across Creating Relations 3 Across Language Server v6 0 59571_en Default Supervisor Profiles See EE File View Tools Help Personal tools O EGF nAg gt crossBoard aita 2 Advanced Profile Name Description Projects EE Default Profle Sp T Administration 5 Default Profile Users Groups New Properties Delete Profiles Relations i Ready CAP NUM SCRL 2 5 Creating Relations The following step by step instructions will help you to set up a new relation in Across In Across a relation is usually a customer but may also be a partner a country subsidiary or a product or product group The Relation Wizard will assist you in creating a new relation Please note that you need to have the appropriate rights in order to create a new relation The default setting assumes that the supervisor is responsible for creating relations General information on relations in Across is available in chapter 3 5 of the user manual Across at a Glance 1 Click the module bar on the left to switch to the Relations module via gt gt Administration gt gt Relations Relatio
42. Across value column Select a value from the drop down list Continue until all data category values you want to import are mapped Data category values that are not mapped to any Across data category value will not be imported Click crossTerm Settings to open the crossTerm settings and if necessary add a value of a data category in Across Then click Next gt a crossTerm Import Wizard Map picklist values q Please specify the mapping of TBX pickiist values to Across pickiist values Note All information of TBX data categories that are not mapped to Across data categories gets lost Pickiist Value Across pickist Across value B Term partOfSpee Noun Part of speech noun v E Tem partOfSpee Verb Part of speech verb Y E Temm partOfSpee Proper Noun Part of speech None y E Term partOfSpee Other Part of speech other v Term partOfSpee Not Selected Part of speech None v 3 Term partOfSpee Adjective Part of speech adjective v B Term partOfSpee Adverb Part of speech adverb v crossTem settings cea neas conei Hep 10 Now define how you would like to proceed if entries and or terms that should be imported already exist in crossTerm a crossTerm Import Wizard Ea How to proceed with existing entries and terms q During TBX import unique identifiers of the TBX file and the crossTerm database are used to identify already existing entries and terms Please specify how to proceed w
43. Back Cancel Hide already retneved tasks Help 5 Enable the corresponding checkbox to determine whether in addition to the assigned task you would like to transfer crossTank and or crossTerm entries from the Server or from the CWU file to your local hard drive 3 Retrieve Task Wizard cross Tank cross Tem Retrieval The project manager has provided you crossTermm and or crossTank entries for download Please select if these entries shouki be downloaded or not Y Download crossTank entries v Download crossTermm entries lt Back Cancel Help 6 Click Next gt to start downloading or importing the desired data 7 The desired data are now downloaded or are imported and processed User Manual Across Step by Step 245 Commenting on rejection 7 crossWAN Working Offline via the Internet Delivering crossWAN Tasks gy Retrieve Task Wizard EN Retrieval progress EA Acton Remaining time Total time Download package Cancel I Not available Not available CWU import Cancel E Not available Not available 2 crossTank import export Cance E Not available Not available crossTem import export Cancel Not available Not available 0 KB s Server is creating CWU GWU Connection category Connected to Finish Cancel Help 8 Once the download or import has been completed click Finish 9 All desired data have been transferred from the Server or the CWU file to your local hard drive
44. CD or a USB stick by e mail or as an FTP download The crossGrid Deliver Wizard assists you in transmitting finished packages to the Master Server Please note that you need to have the appropriate rights in order to be able to transmit packages that have been delegated to your Across Server to the Master Server By default the project manager is responsible for this task 1 Click the module bar on the left to switch to the crossGrid module via gt gt Projects gt gt crossGrid 2 Inthe bottom right pane select the package you want to transmit to the Master Server and click Deliver in order to start the crossGrid Deliver Wizard for the transmission of finished packages to the Master Server User Manual Across Step by Step 104 3 Project Management with Across crossGrid iy crossGrid Deliver Wizard Ea PN Tilt rl Deliver a delegated project ralt En NE The crossGrid Deliver Wizard helps you to deliver a project to the server from where the project was delegated to your Across environment S wil a 9 3 Once the wizard has started click Next gt 4 Decide whether you want to upload the package directly to the Across Server or export it in the form of a GRU file Grid Response Unit that contains all data created while processing the tasks and that you must send to the project manager on the Master Server side e g on a suitable data medium e g a CD or a USB stick by e mail or as an
45. FTP download To export the tasks as GRU file select the corresponding option and click Browse Select a location and enter a name for the GRU file Click Save to r A Next gt Cancel Heip confirm Then click Next gt y crossGrid Deliver Wizard EJ PN LITI pd Please select the delivery mode Cyralt om a Package version of Master Server 17 Current Force export before delivery lt back Cance Hep 5 Ifyou want to transmit crossTank and or crossTerm entries to the Master Server along with the document enable the corresponding checkboxes You can also determine whether user information e g the names of the authors of crossTank and or crossTerm entries is to be transmitted When a task is sent back to a Master Server the system will not only transmit the crossTank and crossTerm entries that were modified or newly created while processing the respective task to the Across Server Rather all crossTank and crossTerm entries that were modified or newly created while processing all tasks assigned to the Trusted Server by the respective Master Server will be transmitted However this only applies to the crossTank and crossTerm entries in the language combinations that concern the task to be transmitted For example if the task to be transmitted to the Master Server consists of the translation of a source text in the language combination German English User Manual Across Step by Ste
46. Fact sheet_Across features Marketing 0 0 of 1 document s finis 01 May 2014 Description of Across fe 2 Click New in order to start the Project Wizard for creating projects 3 First enter a project name after the Wizard has started User Manual Across Step by Step 253 8 crossWeb for Browser Based Work with Across Creating Projects with crossWeb Project Wizard General properties x Project Name About Across x Select documents File name Path Document type Add file Delete ud Previous M Next 4 Now select the document or the documents to be edited within the project To do this click Add document select the desired document and then click Open Continue until all desired documents are selected Project Wizard General properties x Project Name About Across Select documents File name Path Document type About Across_EN docx About Across_EN docx Word 2007 2013 Add file Delete 5 Click Next 6 If necessary add any additional project related information User Manual Across Step by Step 254 8 crossWeb for Browser Based Work with Across Creating Projects with crossWeb Project Wizard Advanced properties x Project Settings Default nd Project manager Sonja Wagner Di Finish date 5 7 2014 E 12 00am Y Description Project attributes Name Values Relations Marketing Subjects Web sites ly Add Remove v Released I Previous pl Next First select
47. French France Translation Unit EMEA a4 iceman Germany French France Matt Jefferson i 8 Unknown E Eng sh Vereinigte French France Claire Dutred oF 8 Unknown ESengiish Vereinigte French France Christian Ziegler i 3 Unknown MiGeman Germany DlFrench France Claire Dutrel i 8 Unknown German Germany DllFrench France OOOOUUSE General information on assigning tasks in Across is available in chapter 4 8 of the user gt manual Across at a Glance Te If a Trusted Server e g of a language service provider is only assigned tasks in Mi certain languages it is annoying to get packages of this language service provider Allocating offered when assigning tasks in other languages You can avoid this by allocating languages languages to a Trusted Server To do this select the corresponding Trusted Server via gt gt Tools gt gt System Settings gt gt General gt gt crossGrid gt gt Trusted Servers and click Edit Then go to the Languages tab and click New You can now define the needed language pair e g English as source language and French as target language as well as a subject and the language competence rating Thus when assigning tasks the packages of the respective Trusted Server will only be offered for selection for the allocated languages e g English French but not for tasks with other languages e g German French A o 8 After assigning the tasks return
48. Import Wizard i Select file to import Ooo File info Select import mode Import with user interaction Import without user interaction all questionable entnes will be stored to a TMX file Use import template Use auto adjustment to ignore duplicate translations Slower import ceee wens canes Hep 5 Select the file you want to import and click Open E Open T d gt Computer gt Local Disk C TMX v G Search TMX Organize v New folder J v inn J Demo Data Name j Date modified Type m inetpub k _ across_EN DE tmx 4 22 2014 4 59 PM TMX File J Install MSOCache di PerfLogs di Program Files d Program Files x86 ProgramData di Projects J sources a temp di Terminology TMX d Users d Windows U Word files a File name across_EN DE tmx v Translation Memory eXchange v 6 Subsequently select the mode with which you want to import the file You can run the import with or without user interaction User Manual Across Step by Step 147 5 cross Tank Importing Translation Memories ff crossTank Import Wizard Select file to import at Select file to import C TMX across_EN DE tmx Browse File info Valid TMX file Version 1 3 Creation tool Across Select import mode Import with user interaction O Import without user interaction all questionable entries wil be stored to a TMX file Use import template Browse
49. Languages eh Fonts Ready User Manual Across Step by Step gt CAP NUM SCRL 19 Pe Groups User crowds First come 2 Administering Across Creating Groups and User Crowds 12 If you have not already done so install the Across Client on the new user s local workstation and save his softkey in the desired directory on the local workstation 13 Then start Across and use the button to import the softkey of the user in the logging dialog 14 The field already contains the user name A password does not need to be entered in order to log in to Across as the user is authenticated via the Windows user administration Thus the input field for the password is grayed out Click Login to log in across Online Client When you work with the online client you have a permanent connection to the Across Server Please login with the usemame and password sent to you by the administrator Cancel Thereafter the login to Across will take place automatically whenever Across is started and the login dialog will no longer be displayed provided that only the user with Windows authentication is registered and no other Across user is registered in the login dialog 2 3 Creating Groups and User Crowds The following step by step instructions will help you to easily understand how to create new groups see below and user crowds see page 23 in Across In Across user pools serve the assignment of unifo
50. Manual Across Step by Step 166 Deletion 5 cross lank cross lank Maintenance 5 4 3 Cleaning crossTank Entries with Multiple Translations Two actions are available for processing crossTank entries with multiple translations i e source segments for which multiple target segments translations in one target language exist e Automatic cleaning of crossTank entries with multiple translations e Export and manual cleaning of crossTank entries with multiple translations E crossTank Maintenance Wizard Ea Clean crossTank entries with multiple translations p gt The following crossTank entnes with multiple translations were found Source sentence Matching Real Time Length Check for Proportional Fonts 100 Translated sentence Status Information Langenprufung bei Proportional Schriftarten in T Echtzeit z L ngenpr fung bei Proportionalschriftarten in A v Cancel Heip A crossTank entry with several translations in one target language is also on hand if the attributes assigned to the translations are different Thus the action will also clean a crossTank entry with a translation A with the relation Customer A and a translation B with the relation Customer B Automatic cleaning of crossTank entries with multiple translations The respective crossTank entries are purged by automatically deleting all translations except for the last one edited To delete the multiple translations click Next gt and in th
51. Manual Across Step by Step 278 XDT file Exporting terminology 10 Incorporating Data from Third Party Systems Terminology from Trados MultiTerm The export file of the terminology exported from MultiTerm does not contain any information that distinguishes picklist entries from term list entries This information is only contained in termbase definition files XDT files which also contain other structural information of the particular MultiTerm termbase To ensure a smooth import of MultiTerm terminology to Across the corresponding termbase definition file can be selected during the import Before you importing the terminology to Across we urgently recommend exporting the termbase definition file in addition to the actual terminology and selecting this file during the import to Across Follow the instructions on page 282 to export the respective termbase definition file For additional information on exporting terminology lists from Trados MultiTerm please consult the relevant Trados documentation 10 4 1 Exporting as TXT File Format Follow the instructions below to export terminology lists from Trados MultiTerm in the TXT file format 1 Start MultiTerm In the example MultiTerm Version 5 5 was used 2 Goto gt gt File gt gt Open termbase to open the terminology base you would like to export 3 Goto gt gt File gt gt Define Export to switch to the export definition dialog gt TRADOS MultiTerm sample
52. Once you have finished translating the paragraph you can now mark it with the translated editing state To do this click the icon in the crossDesk toolbar The editing state then changes from untouched to translated The editing of the paragraph is now completed The change of the editing state to translated implies that the segments contained in the translated paragraph have been saved to crossTank The Ez icon of the status bar at the bottom of the screen indicates that the segments have been stored to crossTank If you have started working on a paragraph but have not yet finished it you can set it to the editing state touched Te If you are assigned a translation task with the EN 15038 Standard workflow you have the additional editing state checked 5 This is the final editing state all paragraphs must be set to 8 Now move on to the next segment you wish to translate To do this click into the corresponding segment in the Source View or click the icon in the document navigation toolbar above the Source View If you prefer you can also use the shortcut key Alt Down Arrow When changing to the next paragraph the previously edited paragraph automatically receives the editing state touched S In the Profile Settings under gt gt Tools gt gt Profile Settings gt gt crossDesk gt gt Target Editor you can also change the configuration in such a way that the edited paragraph is automat
53. P Organize v New folder v fil be Pictures Name Date modified Type E Videos es Soe Fact sheet_Localization ara 4 22 2014 11 05 AM ARA File B Sales User jE Computer es Floppy Disk Drive A Local Disk C di Congree di Demo Data d inetpub MSOCache d PerfLogs di Program Files d Program Files x86 ProgramData di Projects 4 Export v lt gt File name Fact sheet_Localization ara v Across archive ara me 5 Select one or several projects that you want to import You can also activate or deactivate individual checkboxes to select documents and target languages if you merely want to import parts of projects Then click Next gt y Import Projects Wizard Choose the projects and their documents G 5 Export Date 4 14 2022 11 05 Server Across Systems GmbH Export by Sonja Wagner Archive path C Projects Export Fact sheet_Localization ara Browse Select projects Projects Progress al V Fact sheet_Localization 100 vale Software localization with Across_EN docx 100 BV German Germany 100 cee meas caca 6 Ifyou wish you can now adjust the project name and assign a project manager You can also activate the option for keeping the task assignments that existed in the exported projects at the time of the export Then click Next gt fy Import Projects Wizard Choose properties of target projects 6 5 Project Name Manager Keep assignments ma Fact sheet_Locali
54. Software passages in the user manuals and menu formulations and dialogs correspond Oberfl che in unterschiedlichen produktbezogenen Informationen wieder with the related online help One text is translated internally during development while the other is translated in the documentation department or on the premises of outside language service provider So korrespondieren beispielsweise die Fehlermeldungen der Software mit den entsprechenden Passagen in Nutzerhandb chern Formulierungen aus den Men s und Dialogen mit den dazu geh rigen Online Hilfen Das eine wird intern Heading 1 Alt Heading 1 Alt Al 16 pt Localizing Software with Across Match sentences Lokalisierung von Software Oberflachen mit Across Paragraphs considered to belong together when the two documents are compared are marked with two green dots connected by a blue line 1 lf a paragraph in the source text cannot be aligned with any paragraph in the target text or vice versa the respective paragraph will not be connected to another paragraph with a line Moreover the missing alignment will be indicated with a red dot in a red box E Now the source and target document paragraph matching that has been determined by Across must be reviewed and possibly corrected Splitting paragraph You can remove an existing connection between a pair of paragraphs e g by right pairs clicking one of the two green dots on either end o
55. Step 220 6 crossTerm Exporting Terminology crossTerm Export Wizard Instance l y Select instance for export mij Default Across Server v Export language pairs Source language English v pocccescoseccocscococossscosecooseccossosecessescssecoosesosooe o A caoat ma He Defining filters 6 You can use various filters that can be combined to narrow down or restrict the cross Term entries you would like to export The following quick filters are available server local users date status and homographs e The filters are structured hierarchically After activating the corresponding filters Mi especially of the filter Server the desired filter functions can be defined over several levels Using the drop down list you can also select user defined filters and filter sets to narrow down the search Once you have made all the settings click Next gt E crossTerm Export Wizard Ea Adjust filters r Select filters for export wocscvsnsccccccccesuccccccsuscecccccsescusccccsesscsoccccessscscsccccssssccssseresy OOO g M lt tack cma He Select languages 7 Enable the corresponding checkbox to select the languages for which you would like to export the crossTerm entries Use the and icons to sort the languages in the order in which they are to be exported User Manual Across Step by Step 221 6 crossTerm Exporting Terminology a crossTerm E
56. TBX export 214 terminology 172 export from Start TermStar 282 export from Trados MultiTerm 278 TXT format 279 XDT file 282 XML format 280 terminology export CSV format 219 TBX format 214 terminology import CSV file format 181 MultiTerm 195 TXT format 195 XML format 195 Star Martif 206 TBX file format 172 TMX 145 export 156 import 145 TMX export 156 translating 116 translation memory 136 export from Passolo 277 export from Star Transit 276 export from Trados Workbench 275 import 145 TTX files import 145 Update Wizard 267 user creation single sign on 15 Windows authentication 15 user crowds create 23 User Wizard 8 User Manual Across Step by Step Windows authentication 15 wizards Alignment Wizard 136 Check Out Wizard 82 crossGrid Delegation Wizard 93 crossGrid Deliver Wizard 104 crossGrid Retrieve Wizard 99 crossTank Export Wizard 156 crossTank Import Wizard 145 crossTank Maintenance Wizard 161 crossTerm Export Wizard 213 crossTerm Filter Set Wizard 229 crossTerm Filter Wizard 225 crossTerm Import Wizard 172 crossTerm Layout Wizard 231 Deliver Task Wizard 247 Export Projects Wizard 87 Font Download Wizard 250 Group Wizard 20 Import crossTank Term Packages Wizard 112 Import Projects Wizard 89 Import Export WAN classic Tasks Wizard 107 Multi Assignment Wizard 51 Multi Document Workflow Change Wizard 54 Partition Wizard 264 Profile
57. Tank Importing Translation Memories Translation units with different numbers of source and target sentences Click Join all to save all sentences of the paragraph pair in a single segment To correct the translation unit s manually select the sentence s in the source and target segments that belong to one translation unit and click Add match in order to join the sentences to one translation unit Continue this process until all sentences have been y Sentence Alignment Available sentences Source sentence Target sentence Today virtually all technical devices have A Displays vermitteln uns auf kleinem Raum A displays that show information on operating Informationen zu Bedienungsfunktionen functions instructions or error messages on Anweisungen oder Fehlermeldungen und sind a small area heute auf fast jedem technischen Gerat zu However the limited size of these displays finden makes the localization of display texts a Doch gerade die kompakte Form macht die challenge Lokalisierung der Displaytexte zur gro en g g p g For example the translator needs to observe Herausforderung Sie m ssen schlie lich text length or pixel count restrictions as well begrenzte Textl ngen oder die Pixelanzahl as the characteristics of the font beim bersetzen genauso beachten wie die Eigenschaften der
58. Tasks module and use gt gt crossBoard gt gt My Tasks to open the updated translation task Select the desired task in the list of tasks that have been assigned to you and in the lower pane of the My Tasks module click Open If parts of the old document have already been translated they are incorporated into the new updated target document This means that you can continue the translation without any complications or data loss 3 Across Language Server v6 0 59795_en Sonja Wagner My tasks E ES File View Tools Help 8 6 amp 6 FF nag 2 gt crossBoard IE 8 A i T H Document correction Fact sheet_Locali Software localiza 0 394 394 5 1 2014 a Document translation Fact sheet_Acros Across features 69 831 252 4 29 2014 Dashboard i Document translation Display texts crossWash_v4 dtxm E 0 63 63 4 25 2014 Document translation Fact sheet_Localiz Software localizati 0 394 394 5 1 2014 My tasks Document review Fact sheet_Localiz Software localizati 0 394 394 5 1 2014 Fact sheet_Localization English Vereinigte Staaten 3 E German Germany Software localization with Across_EN docx 5 1 2014 2 08 31 PM Document correction 5 1 2014 2 08 31 PM Projects nyer Open Confirm reject 394 words Sonja Wagner Administration Ready CAP NUM SCRL User Manual Across Step by Step 273 9 Special Workflows and Tasks Updating Documents 2 crossDesk opens displaying your translation task The updat
59. Te Once all of the tasks in a project have been completed by the assigned users you will be notified fy Incoming Message ES From First name Default Date 23 04 2014 Time 14 37 Last name Supervisor Project Fact sheet_Localization E mail Relation Marketing panes Task is finished Task name Document review Owner Sonja Wagner Project Fact sheet_Localization Document Software localization with Across_EN docx Source language English Vereinigte Staaten Target language German Germany Reply Next Close e Click the blinking ESJ icon in the status bar to read the message 3 1 Checking Out Documents 4 1 In the module bar on the left go to the Projects module by clicking gt gt Projects gt gt Projects and select the project you would like to finish Pr oj e ct s mo dul e a a Across Language Server v6 0 59795 _ en Sonja Wagner Projects B EN EG BAAO crossBoard pojes es fs he nk Fy Project ID Name Relation Progress Status Finish Description Projects All A m2 Display texts 0 Oof Oof1 docum 4 25 2014 m i Display texts PE Fact sheet_Locali Marketing 100 39 Finished 5 1 2014 O O fe Fact sheet Across features in 4 Fact sheet_Acros Marketing 0 Oof Oof1docum 5 1 2014 Description of Acro Q sizer po w Software localization with Across_ Cockpit English Vereinigte Staaten German Germany Projects New Properties
60. Terminology 6 1 4 Star Martif Format The following step by step instructions will help you learn how to import existing termbases that are available in Star Martif format Information on exporting Star termbases is available in the step by step instructions starting on page 282 The crossTerm Import Wizard helps you to import your existing termbases in Star Martif format and to map the corresponding languages or subjects in crossTerm crossTerm 1 Start the crossTerm Import Wizard In the crossTerm Manager you can start the wizard Import Wizard via the corresponding section on the crossTerm Manager start page via the i the toolbar or via gt gt Tools gt gt Import in the menu bar a crossTerm Import Wizard Import terms p Use the crossTerm Import Wizard to import previously compiled terminology databases or lists and assign the corresponding languages and subjects in crossTerm goceesecocecsscocooscssesccosesocecesesssseesssosoosessesecesssesg ak Gana He 2 Once the wizard has started click Next gt 3 First select Star Martif as import format Import template If you created an import template during a previous import See step 12 you can select it now To do this click Browse select the template with the file extension import and click Open Use an import template only for another import of the same data as during the creation of T the import template or for an import of other
61. The following step by step instructions will show you in a simple way how you would typically produce a translation with Across Further information on translating documents in Across is available in the interactive tutorial Translating a Document in crossDesk in the video library on the Across website at http www across net en knowledge base video library Please note that the following example has been condensed and simplified in order to provide an initial impression of how translating works in Across 1 Use the module bar on the left to switch to the My Tasks module via gt gt crossBoard gt gt My Tasks y Across Language Server v6 0 59795_en Sonja Wagner My tasks E EA File View Tools Help E E ol iE ie EP E S D crossBoard L V Document translation Display texts crossWash_v4 dt 2 0 63 63 4 25 2014 ME an a JV l Document translation Fact sheet_Acros Across features_ 0 828 828 5 1 2014 Dashboard DO o My tasks Display texts E German Germany 2 English Vereinigte Staaten crossWash_v4 dtxml 4 16 2014 11 16 12 AM Document translation 4 25 2014 3 41 48 PM Projects Gene Open Confirm reject 63 words Sonja Wagner Administration Ready CAP NUM SCRL 2 Select the translation task that was assigned to you and that you would like to work on If you have not yet confirmed the task click Confirm reject in the lower pane of the My Tasks module If you have already conf
62. To begin working on the task go to the My Tasks module in crossBoard and from the list of tasks that have been assigned to you select the task that has just been transferred In the lower pane of the My Tasks module click Confirm Reject You can also confirm and then open or reject the task via gt gt File gt gt Open task To do this select the desired task from the list of tasks that have been assigned to you and click OK Click Confirm in the following dialog box to accept the task When assigned packages are rejected the rejection can be commented in a dialog window g Across EF Do you really want to reject processing the task Fact sheet_Localization Software localization with Across_EN docx German Deutschland 1 Document translation Comment Sorry but I ve got a full schedule at the moment Best Regards Helen Further information on confirming and opening tasks is available in chapter 2 4 1 and 2 4 2 of the user manual Across at a Glance Details on editing tasks in crossDesk are available in chapter 5 3 of the user manual Across at a Glance 7 2 Delivering crossWAN Tasks The following step by step instructions will help you to upload crossWAN load fully or partially completed tasks from your local hard drive to the Across Server along with all relevant data or export them as a CRU file crossWAN classic Further information on delivering crossWAN tasks is available in the interactive tutor
63. Wagner Creation date 4 29 2014 9 17 26 AM Modified by Sonja Wagner Modification date 4 29 2014 9 17 26 AM Duplicate entry X Delete entry Continue with the next section which describes the use of the bibliographic entry Creating cross references to bibliographic entries Now the bibliographic source is to be added for an existing terminology entry This is to be done by means of a cross reference to the bibliographic source that has already been stored as a bibliographic entry See preceding section In this example the cross reference is User Manual Across Step by Step 6 crossTerm Administration of Bibliographic Sources with the Help of Indexes added to a definition as a matter of principle however index cross references can be inserted in any text field 1 Edit an existing definition or add a new definition to an existing entry 2 Subsequently select one or several words from which you would like to reference the bibliographic entry and select the item Create index cross reference from the context menu Instance FSH uo Gene ag Properties Definition Add definition Language Sublanguage Text Gesamtheit der in einem Fachgebiet tblichen Fachwaorter und ausdr cke p Dudan Poj Copy a Paste m Create hyperlink Create a language independent cross reference e Create a language dependent cross reference Create index cross reference 3 First determine which inde
64. a project settings template By using the project settings templates you can ensure that all involved in a project translators correctors etc work with the same settings e g those for the crossTank penalties The individuals involved in the project cannot change the defined project settings In additions you can choose one or several project managers but you are pre selected as project managers In addition you can determine a project due date as well as insert a project description with comments etc As a project due date a date is already pre selected that is two weeks from the date of project creation Then you can select attributes via corresponding buttons and define the desired attribute values For example you can use default attributes like Relation and Subject or user defined attributes In Across a relation is usually a customer but may also be a partner a country subsidiary or a product or product group Using the project state released you can finally determine whether tasks may be assigned for a project If for example a project is merely created for the purpose of preparing a quotation you can avoid the premature commencement of the translation work by preventing the accidental assignment of tasks Now click Next 7 Now define the source language for the project Then select one or more target languages User Manual Across Step by Step 255 8 crossWeb for Browser Based Work with Across Crea
65. a unique mapping of the terminology data during re import is only possible with both GUIDs entry GUID and term GUID Then click Next gt E crossTerm Export Wizard Select tem data categories to export r t A Select term data categories to export 4 Term data categories Export CETS Creation date Last modified by Last modification date Sublanguage GUID Status Tem type Part of speech Grammatical gender Grammatical number Degree of synonymy lt JI K 6 A 6 4 6 R 6 K lt Deselect all lt back Cance Hep 10 Next you can set the character used as a delimiter for the separate information to be exported You can choose semicolons spaces commas tabulators or other user defined characters Then click Next gt User Manual Across Step by Step 223 6 crossTerm Exporting Terminology crossTerm Export Wizard Eg Specify additional export options r Separator Semicolon J Space Comma _ Tabstop lt Back Gana Hep 11 In the next step specify whether the crossTerm entries are to be exported as a whole Please note that if the option is activated the crossTerm entries will be exported with all ae terms existing for the respective entries in the languages to be exported Synonyms for example will also be exported Thus any export limitations that you made in the preceding steps of the crossTerm Export Wizard may
66. affected This allows you to make changes quickly and accurately goceesscoceescscooeeesosceceesoseecesosssoessssssoossssoseosessssg 4 Updating a document If you only want to replace the old version of the document with the new version in the case that the name and location of the document have not changed select the first option If the name and or location of the document have changed select the second option and click Browse Then select the new version and click Open User Manual Across Step by Step 268 9 Special Workflows and Tasks Updating Documents y Update Wizard Update translations wi x greeeescocecceesosoeeesssooeessoseceeesoscceesessoseesossseeesesseceeessoseeeesssscesssesseesssoseseessesey n i E a a C Word fles Across features_EN docx _ The filename and or path have changed v Keep comments and bookmarks at update Comment FileCreatedS v Add lt Back Next gt Cancel Help Updating several documents or a project If the name and location of the new versions have remained identical to those of the old versions that is the name and location of the documents have not changed select the first option If the location of the documents has changed select the second option and click Browse Then select the new location and click OK 3 Update Wizard ES Update translations 3 C Word files C The filenames have not changed but the main path V
67. an English term and its TRADOS MultiTerm sample mtw lt iew gt File Edit View Search Help Create New Termbase Open Termbase Ctrl 0 Change Termbase Definition Properties Alt Enter Release Locked Entries Import Define Export Ctrl E Export This Entry Ctrl R Export All Entries Create Fuzzy Index Ctrl Z Exit Alt F4 zj Append all filtered entries to the export file according to the active export definition 7 Enter the name and location of the terminology base you would like to export and select TXT format under File type Speichern in a MultiT erm e ea i Verlauf Desktop Arbeitsplatz Netzwerkumg Dateiname trados_export_for_across Dateityp Windows ANSI Text txt x Abbrechen 8 You can now use the crossTerm Import Wizard to import the termbase into Across via the TXT file you have created as a MultiTerm import Follow the step by step instructions starting on page 172 10 4 2 Exporting as XML File Format with MultiTerm iX Follow the instructions below to export terminology lists from Trados MultiTerm iX in the XML file format 1 Start MultiTerm iX 2 Click gt gt File gt gt Export all entries in the menu toolbar Alternatively click the command Termbase catalog and then the tab Export in the following dialog box TRADOS MultiTerm Project Untitled xdp Termbase Project Entry
68. and Correcting Documents in Across English Vereinigte Staaten Project Fact sheet_Localization Relation Marketing Document Software localization with Across_EN docx German Germany Project Manager Sonja Wagner Date 4 22 2014 Localizing Software with Across s Iil Seamlessly integrated localization of software and corresponding documentation Lokalisierung von Software Oberflachen mit Across Nahtlos integrierte Lokalisierung von Software und korrespondierenden Dokumenten Mil Software needs to be localized not only for the application as such but also for machine controls diagnostic devices etc In all cases the contents of the user interface are found in various informational literature regarding the product Software Oberflachen m ssen nicht nur fur Anwendungs Software als solches lokalisiert werden sondern auch fir Maschinensteuerungen Diagnose Gerate etc In allen Fallen finden sich die Inhalte der Software Oberflache in unterschiedlichen produktbezogenen Informationen wieder 1l For example the user interface s error messages correspond with the respective passages in the user manuals and menu formulations and dialogs correspond with the related online help One text is translated So korrespondieren beispielsweise die Fehlermeldungen der Software mit den entsprechenden Passagen in Nutzerhandb chern Formulierungen aus den Men s und Dialogen mit
69. and target segments these dialog boxes are shown during the storage process Click Join all to save all sentences of the paragraph pair in a single segment To correct the translation unit s manually select the sentence s in the source and target segments that belong to one translation unit and click Add match in order to join the sentences to one translation unit Continue this process until all sentences have been matched Use Edit match to carry out corrections on either source or target segments Click Remove Match to rematch the source and target segments When you are finished click Save Matches User Manual Across Step by Step 122 4 Translating and Correcting Documents in Across Correcting Translations 3 Sentence Alignment Available sentences Source sentence Target sentence Add match Complete matches Software Oberfl chen m ssen nicht P Software needs to be localized not only NUr fr Anwendungs Software als for the application as such but also for solches lokalisiert werden sondern machine controls diagnostic devices etc auch fur Maschinensteuerungen In all cases the contents of the user Diagnose Ger te etc In allen Fallen interface are found in various finden sich die Inhalte der Software informational literature regarding the Oberfl che in unterschiedlichen product produktbezogenen Informationen Vv Edit matc
70. attributes Select the action Remove and determine the attribute and the attribute value you want to delete from the crossTank entries E crossTank Maintenance Wizard Choose the attributes to be changed e Changing attributes You can change existing attributes attribute values by combining the Add and Remove actions Determine the attribute value you want to remove and then the attribute value you want to add to the crossTank entries E crossTank Maintenance Wizard Choose the attributes to be changed e Modifying the status of crossTank entries Activate the option Set new status value and select a status from the drop down list eeu U ee erres 7 Set new status value e Aligned Newy inserted Released Smarty inserted e Resetting the usage count of crossTank entries to zero Activate the corresponding option at the lower edge of the wizard window Aligned Reset usage count to zero Applying changes Click Next gt to apply the changes A dialog will display the number of crossTank entries that will be affected by the changes Click Execute to apply the changes Apart from individual changes you can also perform several changes simultaneously by adding several attribute values or by combining the various actions with each other Multiple changes User Manual Across Step by Step 165 Executing action Deletion 5 cross l
71. available in chapter 3 of the user manual Across at a Glance y User Wizard Ea Type of user and group memberships e amp Online User Online users can use the entire spectrum of Across they are only restricted by their a group s user nights Offline User Offfine users have imited possibiites They can only use the crossWAN load or crossWAN mail mode to access Across Offline users cannot perform project management or administrative tasks Group memberships No member i Members MS Across Language Portal So KA Correctors S crossAnalytics amp crossAP M crossConnect Profile lt Back 6 Assign the user groups that the new user is to be a member of Select the desired groups in the left pane and click gt You can also assign the user groups by double clicking the respective entries Under Profile you can also assign a profile The standard profile appears by default User Manual Across Step by Step 10 2 Administering Across Creating Users y User Wizard EJ Type of user and group memberships 2 Online User Online users can use the entire spectrum of Across they are only restricted by their group s user nights Offline User Offfine users have limited possibiites They can only use the crossWAN load or crossWAN mail mode to access Across Offline users cannot perform project management or administrative tasks Group memberships Nomember A
72. course of the import term A will be associated with the mapped Banking subject not with the Finance subject selected in this dialog window During the preceding attribute mapping no subject was assigned to term B Thus in the course of the import term B will be associated with the Finance subject selected in this dialog window If you activate the option Check for existing terms and show manual correction dialog in the case of duplicate entries you will be asked whether you would like to combine the information from the two entries After activating this option you can also determine that the manual correction is only to take place if both entries are associated with the same relation or the same subject Additionally you can determine that all imported terms are to be set to Released If this option is disabled the imported terms are set to Unreleased User Manual Across Step by Step 203 Import template 6 crosslerm Importing Terminology 16 17 Click Save import template to create a template with the settings you selected for the import and a file extension import If you want to import the same data or other data with the same entry structures and data categories later on you can use the template for this purpose see step 3 In this way the respective settings will be pre configured in the Import Wizard reducing or eliminating the need for manual adjustments Click Import to start the impo
73. crossTank database before performing any actions Cleaning procedures can be time consuming and should be performed directly on the Across Server goecesscococcsoocooscscseccosssscececesecceccesssoesesssseeosssssg lt Baci Next gt Cancel Heip 3 Select the desired mass operation E crossTank Maintenance Wizard En Specify the action you want to perform Pp y Action Change attributes v Change attributes Clean crossTank entnes with multiple translations Delete crossTank entnes Remove sentence duplicates Remove sentence duplicates by text Remove transiation duplicates Spit multi value attributes in crossTank entries Support action Count sentence duplicates Support action Count translation duplicates lt Back Cance Hep You can select one of the following actions Change attributes Delete change or add attributes of crossTank entries modify the status of crossTank entries and reset the usage count see page 164 Delete cross Tank entries Delete crossTank entries related to a specific subject or a specific user see page 166 Clean crossTank entries with multiple translations Automatically clean crossTank entries with multiple translations in one target language or export respective source segments for post processing as an XML file see page 167 User Manual Across Step by Step 162 5 cross lank cross lank Maintenance Splitting multi value attributes in crossTank entries Split
74. crossTank entries with an attribute with several values into crossTank entries with one attribute value each see page 166 Remove sentence duplicates Remove sentence duplicates from crossTank see page 168 Remove sentence duplicates by text Remove sentence duplicates of a translation unit see page 168 Remove translation duplicates Remove translation duplicates identical cross Tank entries with the same source and target segments from crossTank see page 169 Support action Count sentence duplicates Detect number of existing sentence duplicates for support purposes see page 171 Support action Count translation duplicates Detect number of existing translation duplicates for support purposes see page 171 4 Using the option Consider crossTank entries with different status as translation duplicates you can also decide whether only crossTank entries with translations that have the same status are to be considered as duplicates or whether those with different statuses are also to be taken into consideration e g a translation with the Released status and a translation with the Smartly inserted status If the option is enabled also crossTank entries with different statuses will be considered as duplicates While deleting the duplicates the status of the most recently added translation unit will be preserved e The option is available for the following actions only l Removing redundant translations Removing tran
75. document Select second document New Document New Document From Across database From Across database lt Back Cancel Help 4 Click Browse to find each of the two documents select the respective documents and click Open Click Next gt y Alignment Wizard 0 EA Text pair alignment fies Select first document Select second document New Document New Document From Across database From Across database C Word files Software localization with Across_E C Word files Software localization with Across_C lt Back 5 Assign a project to the text pair User Manual Across Step by Step 137 5 crossTank Aligning Translations To perform the alignment within the scope of a new project click New to set up a new project Due to the allocation of an alignment to a project the translation units that are imported to crossTank upon completion of the alignment will automatically get the attributes e g subject and relation that the project also has been assigned provided that the options for storing the attributes are activated in the storing settings of the project settings templates under gt gt Tools gt gt System Settings gt gt General gt gt Project Settings Templates gt gt crossTank or in the pre translation settings of the profile settings under gt gt Tools gt gt Profile Settings gt gt crossTank gt gt Pre translation After the alignment you can e g also co
76. exported Exporting Translation Lists Target Folder and File Name s Export to this folder Jo export si Browse Translation lists and file names Translation List File Name v CSVimportPlugin Englisch Irland gt Englisch USA CSVimportPlugl v CSVImportPlugin Englisch Irland gt Deutsch CSVimportPlugl Iv GLOImportPlugin Englisch Irland gt Englisch USA GLOImportPlugi v GLO ImportPlugin Englisch Irland gt Deutsch GLOImportPlugi v MTImportPlugin Englisch Irland gt Englisch USA MTImportPlugin vV MTimportPlugin Englisch Irland gt Deutsch MTImportPlugin v TMXImportPlugin Englisch Irland gt Englisch USA TMXImportPlugi v TMXImportPlugin Englisch lrland gt Deutsch TMXImportPlugi v Change File Name coed ie 7 Click Finish to start the export 8 You can now use the crossTank Import Wizard to import the GLO file you have exported to Across Follow the step by step instructions starting on page 145 10 4 Terminology from Trados Multi Term You can export terminology from Trados MultiTerm either in the TXT or in the XML file format MultiTerm iX and import it into Across afterwards Note the following instructions to export terminology from Trados MultiTerm in TXT file format Follow the instructions starting on page 280 to export terminology from Trados MultiTerm iX in XML file format User
77. for terms Save import template lt back Cance Hep Please note that the attributes selected in the dialog window will only be added to an entry or term if they were not already assigned in the course of the preceding mapping Example In the dialog window select the Finance subject and start the terminology import Among other things term A and term B will be imported During the preceding attribute mapping the Banking subject was assigned to term A Thus in the course of the import term A will be associated with the mapped Banking subject not with the Finance subject selected in this dialog window User Manual Across Step by Step 192 6 crossTerm Importing Terminology During the preceding attribute mapping no subject was assigned to term B Thus in the course of the import term B will be associated with the Finance subject selected in this dialog window If you activate the option Check for existing terms and show manual correction dialog Q in the case of duplicate entries you will be asked whether you would like to combine the information from the two entries After activating this option you can also determine that the manual correction is only to take place if both entries are associated with the same relation or the same subject Finally you can determine that all imported terms are to be set to Released If this option is disabled the imported terms are set to Unreleased I
78. in addition to the actual terminology and selecting this file during the import to Across The crossTerm Import Wizard helps you to import your existing termbases in TXT or XML format from MultiTerm and to map the corresponding crossTerm fields such as languages or subjects 1 Start the crossTerm Import Wizard In the crossTerm Manager you can start the wizard via the corresponding section on the crossTerm Manager start page via the EF icon in the toolbar or via gt gt Tools gt gt Import in the menu bar User Manual Across Step by Step 195 6 crossTerm Importing Terminology al crossTerm Import Wizard Import tems q Use the crossTerm Import Wizard to import previously compiled terminology databases or lists and assign the corresponding languages and subjects in crossTerm gocsececessseoeessoseocescssseceossssesessesoososossessessssesess lt Back Cancel Help 2 Once the wizard has started click Next gt 3 First select MultiTerm as import format Import template If you created an import template during a previous import See step 15 you can select it now To do this click Browse select the template with the file extension import and click Open Use an import template only for another import of the same data as during the creation of the import template or for an import of other data with the same entry structures and data categories lf the import template contains data categories t
79. in order to finalize the change of the workflow y Multi Document Workflow Change Wizard Select documents Selected documents Documents Projects m Software localization with Fact sheet_Localization None vY Workflow New workflow lt select new workflow gt lt select new workflow gt Advanced EN 15038 Standard External Editing None Terminology work and transiation Terminology work translation and correction Transiation Translation and correction Translation review correction ih ance He User Manual Across Step by Step 55 Remain up to date Projects module Report Wizard 3 Project Management with Across Creating Reports 3 4 Creating Reports Follow the step by step instructions below to create a report on a project The Report Wizard helps you to create the desired report To create reports with Across refer to the interactive tutorial Generating Reports in Across in the video library on the Across website at www across net en knowledge base video library Please note that you need to have the appropriate rights in order to create reports The default setting assumes that the project manager is responsible for creating reports 1 In the module bar on the left go to the Projects module by clicking gt gt Projects gt gt Projects and select the project for which you would like to create a report
80. index values cane 3 Atthe entry level create the data categories that you need for entering the bibliographic sources e g text fields for bibliographic details such as the author title year and city of publication publisher etc 3 Settings Ez Instance p Default Across Server v Manage crossTerm Settings Name Addition Entries Note C ndexes z E Text fields Title Pickists gt noa System attributes sal Attachments gt Groups City of publication Tems 4 The next step is the creation of a new entry template as the basis for the creation of the bibliographic entries To do this go to the Entry template section of the crossTerm settings and click New Enter a name for the new template e g Bibliography and confirm with OK 4 Settings Instance P Default Across Server 4 Manage crossTem Settings Template administration Entnes Template Indexes GE Default T Text fields Pickists New Edit System attnbutes fais Casa Attachments Groups Name Mandatory Tamm Definition J Text fields Image E cae 3 Define Template Name Ea Attachment Groups Template name rr Entry tempi Tomer o cann Tooltip administ 5 Add the data categories to be used for entering the bibliographic sources to this template First make sure than the newly created template is selected Then select a first data category from the
81. list will appear from which you can select a data category Continue until all data categories which should be imported are mapped Data categories that are not mapped to any Across data category will not be imported Then click Next gt al crossTerm Import Wizard EJ cross Term Import Wizard r The Star Marti file contains unassigned data categories Please specify to which Across data categories the Star Martf data categories should be mapped If a corresponding data category does not exist in Across you can create it using the crossTerm settings button Note All information of Star Martif data categories that are not mapped to Across data categories gets lost Star Martif data cat Type Across data category A TS_Status Pickiist Status termType Pickiist None TS_Subject Entry pickiist None TS_Gender Pickist Grammatical gender TS_User1 Entry pickist None TS_Updateld Pickiist Modified by TS_Updateld Entry pickiist Modified by TS_Createld Pickist Created by TS_Createld Entry pickiist Created by Y Zz z lt back Cance Hep 11 Now the data categories values of the import file must be mapped to the Across values To do this click the row with the value you want to map in the Across value column Select a value from the drop down list Continue until you have mapped all data category values you want to import and click Next gt User Manual Across Step by Step 210 6 crossTerm Importing Terminology
82. mapping of data categories takes place The data categories such as subject part of soeech or gender contained in the import file are displayed and mapped to the corresponding Across data categories In the Across data category column click the row of the data category you would like to assign A drop down list will appear from which you can select a data category Continue until all data categories which should be imported are mapped Data categories that are not mapped to any Across data category will not be imported Te Click crossTerm Settings to open the crossTerm settings and if necessary create a new data category Then click Next gt User Manual Across Step by Step 175 6 crossTerm Importing Terminology a crossTerm Import Wizard cross Term Import Wizard p There are unassigned data categories in your TBX export file Please specify to which Across data categones the TBX data categones should be mapped If there is no appropriate data category you have to create a new one in the settings menu and return to this Wizard Note All information of TBX attributes that are not mapped to Across data categories get lost TBX data category Type Across data category partOfSpeech Term pickist Part of speech partOfSpeech Term text None lt Back Cancel Help 9 Now the data categories values of the import file must be mapped to the Across values To do this click the row with the value you want to map in the
83. name Managed by Assigned user Status Last login 2 i z r Projects Claire Dutreil f S Sonja Wagner Sonja Wagner Sonja Wagner logged in 4 17 2014 1 Administration ry Supervisor Fv Matt Jefferson Matt Jefferson Matt Jefferson logged out never Denis Girardin FA Helen Parker Helen Parker logged out never Profiles aa Helen Parker Denis Girardin Denis Girardin Denis Girardin logged out never Matt Jefferson na a amp Default Supervisor Default Supervisor disabled 4 11 2014 1 aa Sonja Wagner r E E a Claire Dutred Claire Dutred Claire Dutred logged out never FY Christian Ziegler Christian Ziegler Christian Ziegler logged out never Relations New Delete Disable Summary Across Language Server Number of computer licenses 6 Maximum 10 Expiry date unrestricted a Languages Fonts y Softkeys i Workflows Ready CAP NUM SCRL After changing the user assignment within a softkey this softkey should be created anew This also applies in case the network configuration settings of the Across Server have been changed in crossAdmin e g the IP address or the URL of the Across Server have changed User Manual Across Step by Step 39 3 Project Management with Across Creating Projects 3 Project Management with Across In this chapter Creating projects see below Multiple task assignment page 51 Changing the workflow of multiple documents page 54 Creating
84. not been met As a rule you can finish a task even if the QM criteria have not been met Some of the criteria are mandatory These are displayed in the Required column If at least one of these criteria is not fulfilled you must first correct all fields in question Subsequently you can finish the task J Finish task All paragraphs of the following task have reached a final state Project Fact sheet_Localization Document Software localization with Across _EN docx Source language English Vereinigte Staaten Target language German Germany Task Document correction QM check summary Mandatory Criterion 7 Errors Ignored Spel check 57 0 Identical punctuation check 5 0 Bounding spaces check 0 Consistent capitalization 0 First capitalization 10 0 Format style sequence check 1 0 Format style usage check 1 0 What would you like to do Store Finished Translations to crossTank Continue the task Remind again after 1 minute Lo If you would like to finish the task now select the option Finish task You can also determine whether the translation should be saved in crossTank Generally it is recommended to enable the storing of translations to crossTank This ensures that all translations with corresponding attributes will be again transferred to cross Tank User Manual Across Step by Step 129 4 Translating and Correcting Documents in Across Correcting Translations If you prefer to finish the
85. of single value system attributes must be identical If one or several single value attributes of two translation units differ the duplicates will not be removed Single value attributes are attributes for which only one attribute value can be determined e The values of multi value system attributes are merged Multi value attributes are attributes for which several attribute values can be determined To delete the translation duplicates click Next gt A dialog will display the number of translation duplicates that will be affected by the deletion Click Execute to delete the translation duplicates 5 4 4 4 Duplicate Definitions Across distinguishes between the following types of duplicates Translation duplicates From the technical perspective a crossTank entry is a connection between two segments a source segment and a target segments that are stored separately in the cross Tank database Translation duplicates are duplicate or multiple identical crossTank entries i e multiple connections between the same source and target segments Thus they are redundant and are not needed Sentence duplicates Sentence duplicates are duplicate or multiple identical segments Normally and usually a segment should occur only once in cross Tank Sentence duplicates with redundant elements By default Across stores segments in which only certain elements differ as one segment These elements may be date time or number formats or plac
86. on the Master Server side see chapter 3 9 2 of the manual Across at a Glance you may have to specify the user groups that are to be responsible for processing the tasks on the Trusted Server side If this is the case you will see a message to this effect To assign the groups in the Workflow module mark the delegated workflow in the top right workflow window Then click the Task List tab and select the task that has been delegated to your Trusted Server Click Properties and go to the Assignable Groups tab In the left pane you can select the user group s that is are to be responsible for processing the respective task Then click gt in order to move the respective user group to the right pane In this way the group Is selected for processing the respective task In the Tasks module you can now assign the task as usual to a member of this group Further information on this topic is available in the following step by step instructions 3 9 3 Delivering Finished Packages The following step by step instructions demonstrate how you can transmit finished packages from your Across Server the Trusted Server to the Master Server in the crossGrid module You can either upload the packages to the Master Server crossGrid online or export them in the form of a GRU Grid Response Unit file crossGrid classic Subsequently you should provide this GRU file to the project manager on Master Server side on a suitable data medium e g a
87. or administrative tasks Group memberships No member iy Members Ss Project Managers kr Translators amp Reviewers amp Supervisors S Terminologists y Profle Default Profile v lt Back f Next gt Cancel Heip eecessoseceosssseecocsssoecososod 8 Click Next gt to confirm the selection Next create the new user Proceed in the same way as when creating a user with a normal Across login Information on this topic is available in the steps 9 to 12 of the step by step instructions on pages 9 The dialog box for creating the softkey will now open The necessary settings such as user assignment have already been completed If you now wish to save the softkey or send it by e mail to the new user click the corresponding button Then click Next gt User Manual Across Step by Step 18 2 Administering Across Creating Users with Windows Authentication License name WIN CGSAAPELLRD_Ciaire Dutred 3 User Wizard License main properties Description Status logged out Last login never Mode Online License Offline License Assign license to Claire Dutred y Default login WIN CGSAAP6LLRD Claire Dutred Auto login Save Softkey E mail Softkey lt Back Cancel Help 10 Now you can enter additional information regarding the user of the softkey All information entered with the User Wizard has already been entered Now click Finish to complete the creation of the new user profile fy Use
88. possible for you as a reviewer you cannot edit the content of the document However you can insert bookmarks and comments for the corrector who is going to work on the document after you For this purpose you can use the d and 4 icons in the crossWeb toolbar or the respective commands in the context menu of the Context View As soon as you have completed the review of the document you can finish your task To do this click the 21 icon in the crossWeb toolbar You can quit processing a task at all times by clicking the Xl icon in the crossWeb toolbar or Close Task in the top right area of the window The crossDesk is closed and the My Tasks module appears again Now that the task has been finished it will no longer appear in list of assigned tasks User Manual Across Step by Step 263 4 F Oon Projects module Partition Wizard 9 Special Workflows and Tasks Partitioning Documents 9 Special Workflows and Tasks In this chapter Partitioning documents see below Updating documents page 267 General information on special workflows in Across is available in chapter 10 of the user manual Across at a Glance 9 1 Partitioning Documents The following step by step instructions will help you to learn how to partition documents General information on partitioning documents in Across is available in chapter 10 1 of the user manual Across at a Glance Please note that you need to have the appropriate ri
89. properties summary New entry properties count 0 Selected entry properties count 1 Show Term shoelace New term properties count 0 Selected term properties count 2 Show lt lt Less options _0K sp cance Log file 29 After the import you can store the log file on your local machine provided you activated the respective option at the beginning of the crossTerm import wizard see step 7 Click Finish to exit the wizard crossTerm Import Wizard Ea Import progress r Import successful Remaining time 0 00 00 elapsed time 0 00 01 Save log file as Cancel Heip 30 The terminology contained in the CSV file has now been imported to crossTerm and is available for your translation work User Manual Across Step by Step 194 XDT file ing crossTerm Import Wizard 6 crosslerm Importing Terminology Cc File Edit View Tools Help RP GRA RR Rie Search Bar Across v6 0 59795_en crossTerm Manager Across Systems GmbH gt E E Standard browse mode ax A Show entry report L Edit entry Sia Merge entry Duplicate entry XX Delete entry Al pom ou 123 Text to search for Instance Default Across Server A ID 29998 Tem search y G Properties Subjects Relations D K Quick fiter M Quickstart guides Manuals Technical Documentation E Entnes with and without related terms in target lai F 4 Search result Search opti gt G i H i L l
90. respective data category The settings made in this section refer to the display of the respective entry or term in the plain browse mode User Manual Across Step by Step 235 6 crossTerm Creating User Defined Layouts fy Image Data Category Formatting Data category name User defined formatting Q Font name Font size Arial Unicode MS v 10 _ Bold Color Citak Underline Strikethrough Data category value User defined formatting 2 Font name Font size Arial Unicode MS v 10 _ Bold Color Zrak a Underline _ Strikethrough Spacing and indentation plain mode 9 Indentation pt 3 0 x cae Click OK after you have set the formatting of the selected data categories If necessary continue with the definition of the formatting for other data categories and then click Next gt 12 Now specify the display formatting of the data categories at term level You can proceed in the same way as with the formatting of the data categories at entry level see previous steps 10 11 y crossTerm Layout Wizard Tem property formatting fm ro Property Part of speech Grammatical gender Grammatical number Degree of synonymy Stockkeeping unit Part number bal Title preview Value preview Sample Sample lt Back Cancel Help 13 Now click Finish to complete the creation of the new layout From now on the layout is available for use in crossTerm Manager crossTerm Web in
91. right of the My Tasks module User Manual Across Step by Step 261 8 crossWeb for Browser Based Work with Across Reviewing Translations with crossWeb 7 Adialog window will open It displays all relevant data for each task at a glance In order to decide whether to confirm or reject a task you can look at a preview of the source document using the Show content button Click Confirm to accept the task 8 Now you can open this task To do this click Open at the top right of the My Tasks module 9 crossDesk opens displaying your review task In the central window area the source text and the target text are displayed next to each other in the Correction Mode z You can also use the Target text Mode E or the Combi Mode 25 for reviewing translations The crossView is located on the left side of the window Using the individual tabs you can select different views and functions of the current document The bottom pane combines two search modes in one the fuzzy search for searching for entire sentences in the crossTank and the concordance search for searching for individual words in the crossTank The matching entries from the crossTerm terminology system are displayed in the right pane EF Gy http localhost crossWeb crossDesk aspx Pra 5g crossWeb across v6 0 5979 File Edit View Favorites Tools Help y Fact sheet_Localization Software localization with Across_EN docx Sonja Wagner 1446194262 w Help al
92. select Sort termbase content by entry number Export file C export xml f Log file C export log Save As V Sort termbase content by entry number Sort termbase content by index field 5 Then click Next gt to start exporting the terminology 6 Click Next gt as soon as the export has completed 2x Processing the Export MultiT erm is exporting content from the termbase to the export file Click Next when the export is complete Exporting terms 7 Nowclick Finish to complete the export Wizard Complete The Export Wizard is complete Click Help to find out how to use the export definition to export content from your termbase if you have not already done so Click Finish to close the Export Wizard lt Back Fish He 8 Now you can import the XML file you created into Across User Manual Across Step by Step 281 Exporting XDT file Exporting terminology 10 Incorporating Data from Third Party Systems Terminology from Star TermStar Follow the step by step instructions starting on page 172 10 4 3 Exporting Termbase Definition File The export file of the terminology exported from MultiTerm does not contain any information that distinguishes picklist entries from term list entries This information is only contained in termbase definition files XDT files which also contain other structural information of the particular MultiTerm termbase
93. settings In addition the option Always ask the project manager is selected in the Workflow template drop down list This section can be found under gt gt Tools gt gt Profile Settings gt gt General gt gt Project Wizard settings User Manual Across Step by Step 40 3 Project Management with Across Creating Projects J Profile Settings Sonja Wagner General Define source language settings Alignment Calendar Define document settings template Default project settings template crossSearch Dialog Settings Default y Always ask the project manager V Offer task assignment E Workflow template V Offer deadline adjustment V Store 100 matches MT results directly to paragraphs V Switch to tasks module when Project Wizard is finished If you selected different settings you may need to skip the corresponding steps in the following example respective chapter on profile settings in the user manual Across at a Glance 1 Click the module bar on the left to switch to the Projects module via gt gt Projects gt gt Projects fy Across Language Server v6 0 59795_en Sonja Wagner Projects 2 File View Tools Help 6 EGF ag ae a s gt Further information on the settings in the Project Wizard Settings section is available in the Projects module crossBoard meee ie e i gt i amp Project ID Name Relation Pr
94. several Across user groups In this way it will be available to the users of the assigned groups for search queries The filter set rights can be assigned in the Public filters subsection of the crossTerm section of the user group rights Click Next gt iy crossTerm Filter Wizard Specify name and description Sal Name Advanced Fiter Set Description Fiter set for cascading searches Beck cma Hep 5 Subsequently select the user defined filters to be included in the filter set To do this select the desired filters successively on the left hand side of the dialog window and click gt Alternatively you can select a filter by double clicking it Using the and icons you can change the sequence of the selected filters Search queries on the basis of this filter set will be conducted in the order specified here p crossTerm Filter Wizard x Select and add user defined filters in descending order Sal You need to setup a fiter set by combining existing user defined filters and defining a search sequence Add the necessary user defined fiters to the Est on the right and sort them by sequence of search Name Public Priority Corporate Language Entnes containing images lt lt Back Finish Cancel Help 6 Click Finish to create the filter set It is now available in the respective drop down list and can be used for performing searches in crossTerm User Manual Across Step by Step
95. sowie im a Die Z der Dokumenter tu igat innerhalb des Dokumer Term search egal T o 7 xX E Quick fiter 3 lt gt Search Center a x Search for similar sentences in crossTank ang j TEER XTA uz 6 E Besides the source and target texts the translator sees the translation memory and terminology system search results that correspond to the text segment at hand 8 100 ES Neben dem Quell und Zieltext sieht der bersetzer die zum jeweiligen Textsegment korrespondierenden Fundstellen im Translation Memory sowie im Terminologiesystem 2 Subjects Flyer General Web site Projects Display texts Fact sheet_Across features Fact sheet_Localization Relations Marketing 8 8 Ready Translated CAP NUM SCRL To work through the updated or new parara systematically and quickly switch to the Paragraph state view in crossView r All updated paragraphs are listed together under Updated or New crossView ax 2 710 Tae m Across features _EN_update docx H E Untouched 4 E Touched 2 i H E Translated 24 Corrected 0 E Pre translated 0 Qn Machine translated 0 3 e transiated with auto changes 0 Context match 0 Structure match 0 Context and structure match 0 pon i In from bilingual document 0 Further information on the ordered by state view in crossView Is available in chapter gt 5 4 2 of the user manual Across at a G
96. task later in order to carry out corrections according to the QM criteria for example select the option Continue task Enable the checkbox Remind again after to determine a period of time after which would you like to be reminded again Confirm by clicking OK To finish a completed task in crossDesk at any time use gt gt File gt gt Finish Task or click the icon from the crossDesk toolbar or use the Ctrl Shift F shortcut key Please note that a finished task can only be opened in read only mode meaning that it is write protected and thus you cannot edit the task any further 8 If you have selected the option Store finished translations to cross Tank in the previous dialog box a dialog box for storing the translations to crossTank appears For each translation unit to be saved a window will appear for checking and if necessary correcting the units you can determine that this dialog should only be shown if there is a different number of source and target sentences or that this dialog should never be shown Select the desired option and click Store y Store Finished Translations to crossTank Software localizati EJ _ Show match making dialog for each paragraph C Never show match making dialog skip paragraphs with different amount of sentences se 9 Ifin the previous dialog box you have selected the option to show a dialog box for each paragraph that has an unequal number of source an
97. the Windows authentication on the basis of his Windows user account in the Active Directory Thus manual login is no longer necessary as the user is authenticated via the Windows user administration The login via Windows authentication is only possible if this is supported by the Across Language Server license The following step by step instructions will assist you in creating a new user with Windows authentication in Across You can find more information on creating users with the regular Across login in the step by step instructions starting on page 8 Please note that you need to have the appropriate rights in order to create a new user The default setting assumes that the supervisor is responsible for creating users You should only use the Windows authentication option if you have experience with the Windows user administration in domains Please contact your system administrator if you should have questions Please note that the Windows authentication option can only be used when creating online users Further information on this topic is available in chapter 3 2 of the user manual Across at a Glance To create a new user with Windows authentication the respective Windows user must already exist in the Windows user administration User Manual Across Step by Step 15 2 Administering Across Creating Users with Windows Authentication Use the module bar on the left to switch to the Users module via gt gt Administrat
98. the mouse pointer over the column headers to select the desired documents by means of filters 3 Check Out Wizard Please select documents l MS x Please select the source and target documents you wouki Eke to export Document Language Progress v Software localization with Mi Geman Germany Finished Select All Deselect Al lt Back cancel nep In addition to the target documents the corresponding source documents can also be checked out for example as a back up in case they are deleted by mistake To do this click the icon in the third column select the source language in addition to the target languages and confirm with OK C Al Source Language Target Language Cancel 5 Thenclick Next gt User Manual Across Step by Step 83 3 Project Management with Across Finishing Projects Next select the location the document is to be saved to The default location is the Desktop To save the document to different location enter the desired location manually or select a location via Browse and click OK If you are checking out several documents some of which have been translated into several languages it is easy to lose track of them In order to prevent this from happening when several documents are being checked out folders are set up for saving the documents You have four different sorting options here Keep structure of directories f the documents you want to check o
99. the respective drop down list F Showentry report Z Editentry E Mergeentry Unrelease all EE Duplicate entry XX Delete entry User Manual Across Step by Step 236 6 crossTerm Administration of Bibliographic Sources with the Help of Indexes Te To adapt a user defined layout select it in the dialog window for the management of user defined layouts and click Edit Using the different tabs you can make the desired changes 14 By default a new public layout is not available to any user group Therefore a newly created layout should first be assigned to respective user groups You can do this by means of a right in the Layouts subsection of the crossTerm section of the user group rights Proceed as follows to assign a new layout to a user group Go to the Groups module via gt gt Administration gt gt Groups and select the group to which you want to assign the new layout Then click Properties select the User rights tab and click gt gt crossTerm gt gt Layouts to access the section of the layouts Activate the checkboxes to assign the layout to the corresponding user groups 3 Group properties EJ General Rights Membership crossTank Layouts r crossTerm 0 EE Instances v Default Layout m Workflows User Profile General 6 6 Administration of Bibliographic Sources with the Help of Indexes The following step by step instructions explain the use of indexes using the ma
100. the user manuals and menu formulations and dialogs correspond with the related online help One text is translated internally during development while the other is translated in the documentation department or on the premises of outside language service provider S So korrespondieren beispielsweise die Fehlermeldungen der Software mit den entsprechenden Passagen in Nutzerhandb chern Formulierungen aus den Men s und Dialogen mit den dazu geh rigen Online Hilfen Das eine wird intern in der Entwicklung bersetzt das andere in der Dokumentationsabteilung oder bei einem externen Sprachdienstleister To minimize expenses and maximize quality it is therefore important that the same language resources be used for both the user interface and the descriptive documents 100 S Lokalisierung von Software Oberfl chen mit Across Zur Minimierung der Aufw nde und Maximierung der Qualit t ist es deshalb wichtig dass sowohl fiir die Software Oberflache als auch f r die sie beschreibenden Dokumente die aleichen Sprach Ressourcen ag 2 Tec XxX T E gu Ls SE z o A a s Localizing Software with Across 8 8 Ready Translated CAP NUM SCRL 7 As soon as all paragraphs in the document have been assigned the corrected state the correction task is completed The dialog box for finishing the task automatically appears A list of the QM criteria that have been checked shows which criteria have
101. this purpose see step 6 In this way the respective settings will be pre configured in the Import Wizard reducing or eliminating the need for manual adjustments Then click Start import ia crossTank Import Wizard ES Import settings F You can save the settings you specified for the current import to an XML file This template can be used for importing the same file or another file with the same settings later on lt Back Start import Cancel Help 16 The import of the translation units begins User Manual Across Step by Step 152 5 cross lank Importing Translation Memories E crossTank Import Wizard Importing translation units F Processing 22 item s of 80 Remaining time 0 00 03 elapsed time 0 00 01 Show summary lt Back Start import 17 If you selected the setting Show manual correction dialog in step 9 dialog windows for manual corrections will appear during the import If you selected the mode without user interaction or the import without segmentation in step 9 or if you did not select display dialog for manual correction continue with step 19 Translation units with the same number of source and target sentences If the mapping of source and target sentences is correct in the window below click Save matches to transfer the translation units to crossTank and continue the import If the mapping has not been done correctly mark the respective sentence pair s and
102. to be used as a basis for the new group Click Next gt to confirm these details User Manual Across Step by Step below the pane on the upper right to start 21 2 Administering Across Creating Groups and User Crowds iy Group Wizard Ea General Infomation and Default Profile 5 Group name PM Group Description Across users Base group Project Managers w C User crowd v May contain offline users Packaging template None Do not offer for assignment _ crossTerm Web read write users cross Term Web read only users zme neas cance he 5 Enable the appropriate checkbox to carry out the corresponding settings in the various areas of the new group You can customize several rights in crossTank and crossTerm via the icon You can decide whether a particular right should be available for all languages without limitation whether it should only be available for certain languages that you can define yourself or whether it should be activated for those languages that are enabled in the settings of the respective user iy Group Wizard Ez Rights G 5 Right categories A Name Restrictions Z Create a project v Documents I f e n we Edit properties of existing v Target Languages r Delete project vi Paragraphs I Change state of the project V Users F a i ni j Calendar Archive kama delete p V Groups
103. to single value attributes the action needs to be run twice The action is always performed for all entries in crossTank Therefore the selection of a language pair the definition of filters and the preview function are not available for this action Only the crossTank entries of the local server context are take into consideration When using crossGrid the action must therefore be performed on the Master Server side and cannot be performed on a Trusted Server for the crossTank data of the Master Server The usage history of the split crossTank entries is reset within the scope of the performance of the action Thus the split crossTank entries do not contain any information on the usage count the last user and the time of last use 5 4 2 Deleting crossTank Entries With the action Delete crossTank entries you can remove translation units from cross Tank on the basis of the selected language and filter settings We recommend backing up the crossTank database before deleting the crossTank entries Moreover you should only execute the deletion after a careful review of the selected language and filter settings Use the preview function to ascertain how many and which crossTank entries are affected by the selected language and filter settings To delete the crossTank entries click Next gt A dialog will display the number of cross Tank entries that will be affected by the deletion Click Execute to delete the crossTank entries User
104. to the crossGrid module Ka 9 The next step is the composition of the information to be transmitted to the Trusted crossGrid module Server for processing the tasks To do this click Build package The crossGrid Package Wizard for compiling the information will start crossGrid Package 10 Once the wizard has started click Next gt Wizard User Manual Across Step by Step 95 3 Project Management with Across crossGrid y crossGrid Package Wizard can crossGrid Package Wizard te E p g When you click Finish you will have successfully created a crossGrid package la lt Bac Help 11 The tasks contained in the package are listed Click Next gt y crossGrid Package Wizard Involved Tasks 4 5 Task type Project Document Total Fact sheet_Across features Across featur H 831 words C Closed for assignments ARA coca new 12 First the basic settings are specified y crossGrid Package Wizard Additional Settings 6 5 Package version of Trusted Server 17 Current v Expiration date for crossTemnm cross Tank 12 31 2099 E _ Allow editing of project settings at Trusted Server ceee wens canes Hep Package version You must first select the package version of the Trusted Server You must get this information from the project manager on the Trusted Server side The package version of your own Across version is indicated in the information windo
105. uncorrected English of software developers into correct English The sublanguage simplified is employed for documents that are written in a language with simplified syntax and specialized trade terminology e g in the aerospace industry Then click Next gt 9 Now you can specify a document settings template Select the document for which you would like to assign the template and use the drop down list below the list of documents to select the desired template Click Configure to view and if necessary to edit the selected template or to create a new template With the help of document settings templates you can customize the processing of the respective format or document for the check in in Across and the display in crossDesk Further information on document settings templates is available in chapter Document settings templates in the section on system settings of the user manual Across at a Glance yg Project Wizard Ea Select document settings templates a Assigned Document Settings Templates Document Type Template Across features_EN docx Word 2007 2 default Documents Across features_EN docx Document settings template default w Configure default No document settings template lt back cancel Het 10 Now you can specify the workflow on which the project is to be based Select the document for which you want to determine the workflow and select it from the drop down list u
106. will be retained The properties of the entries or terms from the TBX file will be discarded Example In crossTerm there is again an entry that contains a definition and that has been assigned the General subject The TBX file again contains an entry with the same GUID that does not contain any definition and that has been assigned the Automotive technology subject After the import the crossTerm entry will still contain the definition and will still be assigned to the General subject e Use most recent data categories according to the modification date The properties of the last modified entries and terms will be used User Manual Across Step by Step 177 6 crossTerm Importing Terminology Example In crossTerm there is an entry that was last modified on February 7 2013 The TBX file contains an entry with the same GUID that was last modified on February 15 2013 As the date of modification of the entry in crossTerm is after the date of modification of the entry in the TBX file the properties of the crossTerm entry will be used when the entry is imported Following the import the entry will have the editing date 7 31 2013 Click Next gt 11 Now add other attributes to the termbase you would like to import E crossTerm Import Wizard Ea Specify general import parameters r Default values for data categories wil be overridden by mapped values Type Data category Value Tem Projects None v a ee ea Entry Subject
107. you as a crossWAN load or cross WAN classic user can easily download and install fonts from the Across Server that are contained in a document to be processed but are not installed in the Across database This will ensure that all characters of the respective document will be correctly displayed in crossDesk The Font Download Wizard assists you in downloading the missing fonts and adding them to the Across database 1 When you attempt to open a task assigned to you Across notices that one or several fonts contained in the documents to be processed are not contained in the Across database In this case the Font Download Wizard is started automatically 2 Once the wizard has started click Next gt User Manual Across Step by Step 250 7 crossWAN Working Offline via the Internet Adding Missing Fonts y Font Download Wizard Ea Add fonts ora The Font Download Wizard supports offline users in adding missing fonts to the Across database _ Do not show this info again 3 The missing fonts are displayed Select the fonts you want to download by activating the respective checkboxes Then click Start Download in order to download the selected fonts from the Across Server y Font Download Wizard Add fonts r 2 Font name Download Status T HelvetcaNeue LT 67 MdCn Not downloaded T HelveticaNeue LT 47 LtCn Not downloaded T HelveticaNeueLT Std Med Ext Not downloaded Status Start download Fin
108. you can customize the processing of the respective format or document for the check in in Across and the display in crossDesk Further information on document settings templates is available in chapter Document settings templates in the section on system settings of the user manual Across at a Glance User Manual Across Step by Step 256 8 crossWeb for Browser Based Work with Across Creating Projects with crossWeb Project Wizard Select document settings template About Across Word 2007 2013 Click Next Template default Across I Previous pj Next Now you can specify the workflow on which the project is to be based Select the document for which you want to determine the workflow and select it from the drop down list under the list of documents In Across a workflow describes the sequence of work steps or procedures that are processed successively in the form of tasks The simplest workflow the Translation workflow merely consists of a translation task Other workflows may contain the downstream correction of the translation term extraction and term translation Project Wizard Select workflow templates Document or the upstream terminology work in the form of Workflow Translation Advanced EN 15038 Standard External Editing None Source document editing and translation Terminology work and translation Terminology work translation and correction Transla
109. 100 Subject Existing word lists from other systems can easily be imported i 100 7 Relation Optional terminology instances and cascading searches facilitate the handling of even large amounts of data 100 Entry structures filter criteria display forms as well as complete terminology workflows can be configured according to your needs 100 Deselect All Across offers numerous functions for the expansion and structuring of your terminology database 100 None In this way the terminology system can be accessed not only by editors and translators but also by the individual departments and 100 F Marketing 2 secretariats l we M sales Since tarminalaay ic imnortant hath ta marbatina and ta nraduct mananamant_eraceTarm can he danlavad thrauahait tha camnany ann aes ax ES Technical Documentation Translated sentence Status Information Bei der Verwendung einer speziellen Schriftart z B Ihrer Hausschrift die als Teil Ihres Corporate Designs eine wertvolle Ressource darstellt kommt eine weitere Schwierigkeit hinzu denn solche Schriftarten d rfen aus lizenzrechtlichen Gr nden meist nicht ohne rE L Weiteres an Ihre bersetzer herausgegeben werden User defined system attributes Display texts Marketing Web site Flyer General Created by Modified by Project Status Usage history lt gt CAP NUM SCRL Further information on editing crossTank entries is available in chapter 6 4 of the user manual Across at a Glance Further inf
110. 9 fy Across Language Server v6 0 59795_en Sonja Wagner Tasks 0 File View Tools Help O EG aeeFeOk ar crossBoard Tasks ZEX CEE e 3 Ba he zA FY Project Document Assigned to Status Progress Words Deadline Project ID Projects All A i Factsheet Acro Se Sonja Wagner Assigned 5 1 2014 4 a oe AI RR Factsheet_Acro Across features ES p Ml Ge Christian Ziegler Unconfim 0 828 5 1 2014 4 OOo an Display texts Factsheet_Acro Across features ES p II S9 ciaire Dutrea nm 0 828 5 1 2014 4 3 crossWash_v4 dixmi J Factsheet_Acro Across features ES p EB Y Christian Ziegler Unconfirm 0 828 5 1 2014 4 en ia Fact sheet_Across features BA Fact sheet_Acro Across features S oO Unassigned 0 828 5 1 2014 4 Cockpit Across features_EN docx ie Fact sheet_Localization W Software localization with Acrc in p fey Multi Assignment eer Assignment Workflow Available users for selected task Name Rating Source language Target language Relay lang MES ol Quality Management Styles Assign Tas Unassign Task More gt gt Administration Ready lt gt CAP NUM SCRL 15 From the project list on the left select the project for which you would like to assign tasks In the pane on the upper right the tasks are listed that need to be worked on according to the project setup and selected workflow in the project es cn fh Fi Fac
111. AP NUM SCRL L 2 Click Styles below the pane on the upper right to run the Style Wizard for creating Style Wizard or editing styles You can also run the Style Wizard outside the Styles module To do this click the z icon in the wizard toolbar Please note that in this case in the first step of the wizard you need to determine a project for which a new style should be created 3 Once the wizard has started click Next gt Ti v User Manual Across Step by Step 75 3 Project Management with Across Creating and Editing Styles y Style Wizard Administer templates Te The Style Wizard lets you create or change the templates used to format target documents e g if different standards in the target language require a formatting different from that used in the source document gocsececessseoeessoseocescssseceossssesessesoososossessessssesess 4 Select the target language s for which you would like to create a new style Then click Next gt ty Style Wizard Select document languages Fp Documents Document type Target Language Select B Across features_EN docx Word 2007 2013 German Germany Across features_EN docx Word 2007 2013 French France Select All Unselect All 5 Select Create a new style for your target document and then Next gt y Style Wizard Select Style Wizard mode Te goeeeecccceceeccccceccsssoocesescocosscocscecsssoseecosecsoeeccsssoesescssecesscsseesesososeessscssosscs
112. Across Translating Documents y Across Language Server v6 0 59795_en Sonja Wagner crossDesk Document translation Software localization with Across_EN docx Fact sheet_Localization Ma EA File View Tools Help i EL ESE l t os 666688000P AA REEL BAZARAAAB S BET CEN ta 2 A e p No results found Oberfl chen mit Across A B Seamlessly integrated localiza 2 Seamlessly integrated localization of Nahtlos integrierte Lokalisierung von iB For example the userintet Software and corresponding Software und korrespondierenden To minimize expenses and i 3 The Across Language Serv documentation Dokumenten Z ee en software Oberflachen miissen nicht nur fur D 7 Faa pce A Anwendungs Software als solches a lokalisiert werden sondern auch f r E Microsoft NET resources i the contents of the use terface ound h a and other formats that can n various informational literature regarding can S ee B This means that translators ee etc In allen Fallen finden sich die Inhalte use the same multi forma and use a single translatic B This process thoroughly tak B allocation of consistent ke B adaptation of user interfac A 2 m 36 Sie TT P XX a nm B special quality assurance O A F id F E BC T B7 U z er ios In addition the high admini Normal Calibri 11 pt integrated update function integration and automatio Software Obe
113. Across features_EN_update docx Opening document C Word fles Across features_EN_update docx Analyzing paragraph 31 of 31 Document structure extracted Document post processing Linked objects If the updated documents contain linked objects such as images you can choose during the check in process whether the linked objects should be kept as linked objects or whether they should be embedded gy Document Conversion The document Across doc contains linked objects If you want to see the objects e g images in crossDesk during translation please select Embed linked objects Please note that during check out the embedded objects wil NOT be reverted to linked Please select one of the following check in methods Keep Linked Objects L_ Apply to al If the linked objects are embedded they become part of the document These objects remain embedded also after the translated document has been checked out User Manual Across Step by Step 270 9 Special Workflows and Tasks Updating Documents If the links are retained the objects continue to be linked to the external storage location The links are retained also after the translated document has been checked out 8 Once the analysis has been completed click Next gt y Update Wizard 100 Update translations 83 Checking C Word files Across features_EN_update docx Opening document C Word fles Across features_EN_update docx Analyzin
114. Action Count Sentence Duplicates ccccceccccssssseeeeeseenneenees 171 5 4 6 Support Action Count Translation Duplicates 0 cccccccceseeeeeeeeeaneneeees 171 6 SCROSS VOT IN aroa oc teuucccasipacan aaa sxcudensusenucuniaodeausucscuntuaustacuanuadveiienoaels 172 6 1 IMPORTING TERMINOLOGY cccccsscecceesececeeneeseeeeseeeceeseceteeaeceeseeseeensuegeeseeegeees 172 6 1 1 TEX FOMA lonan R E cgsiens aude beenecegsdy 172 Ost SCO V FROMM cera A T A 181 613 MUtTEMFONMAlS aaan T nav aeucsieeaes 195 O14 Sla Mait Foma ece eri a ERO OE A EAE 206 62 EXPORTING TERMINOLOG wiicsctecncsiensicescitvsiadadiuicasasseieusebiabdaeatiacalebnadhonoutaass 213 6 2 1 TOR FOA eee Re RE ee Ee ee near EE EEA nr 214 622 COV Formalki a a cet ea deo Sete beetle yeti d 219 6 3 CREATING USER DEFINED FILTERS ccccssccccceeseeeceeseeeeceaseeeceeseeeseaseeeseaeeees 225 6 4 GREATING PILTER SET O nene a a a a anon 229 6 5 CREATING USER DEFINED LAYOUTS cccccesccccesscceeseescceeceeeceeceeeeeesseeeeessaaeees 231 6 6 ADMINISTRATION OF BIBLIOGRAPHIC SOURCES WITH THE HELP OF INDEXES 237 7 crossWAN Working Offline via the Internet ccscccssssssseeeeeeeesseeeeeeeeees 243 7 1 RETRIEVING CROSSWAN TASKS ccccsceceseecseeeceeeeteneeteeeesaeeteneeteneetaneenseeeens 243 7 2 DELIVERING CROSSWAN TASKS cirina aa A a 246 To ADDING MISSING FONTS cuarain a a A nneharatanese 250 8 crossWeb for Browser Based Work with ACro
115. COW OS oenina a ar 23 24 SREATING PROFILES nnani a an 27 25 CREATING RELATIONG iaria a a a a oes aioe core 30 26 CREATINGOM WISTS eisean a sees caedeauaraecadelanadee 34 Cif HOREATING SORTK ENS a A 37 Project Management WIth ACIOSS cccccsesseesseeseeeseesseeeeenseeeeenseeeeenseeeeenseeeens 40 Sul CREATING PROJECT Gersi a dn al ne tenbeueeeteadsanntoutedeiteu lear 40 S32 MULTIPLE TASK ASSIGNMEN Wesivatatcetearssonniondentcrcntidntmesevcnndeeinnsvererundatimadinen 51 3 3 CHANGING THE WORKFLOW OF MULTIPLE DOCUMENTS 0 ccceseeceeseeeeeneeseeners 54 OA GREATINGHEPOR TS Anr O E aude aus esa eee Gee 56 3 5 CREATING AND CUSTOMIZING DOCUMENT SETTINGS TEMPLATES cccs0eeeeee 60 3 5 1 Creating Document Settings Templates ccccccccsssseeeceeeesesseeeeeseaneeeees 60 3 5 2 Customizing Document Settings TEMpPlAat S cccccccccseeeeeceeeeneeeeeeees 61 3 5 2 1 Application Example Word Document eeeeceeceeeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeaeeeeeeeaaes 62 3 5 2 2 Application Example XML DOCUMENL cccceecceeeeeeceeeeceeesaeeesseeeeseeeeeaes 66 3 5 2 3 Conditional XML Example s nacn eA 69 30 YOREATINGAND EDITING STYLES wc chactsaredannteharatccaniadinasncsdncabustantolecaasaubanoniars 75 3 6 1 Creating a New Template cccsccccccssssessecccnnanseeccssaneeeecessaaeseecessanansees 75 3602 Eding EXS OVES ausan a e Sneed ities acca tia 78 Sof FINISHING PROJECTS aamiais 81 37 1 CHECKI
116. Click the module bar on the left to switch to the crossGrid module via gt gt Projects lt n gt gt crossGrid crossGrid module 2 Click Create under the top right pane in order to start the crossGrid Delegation Wizard for delegating packages crossGrid 3 Once the wizard has started click Next gt Delegation Wizard y crossGrid Delegation Wizard EA Delegate a task legate ata roy T This wizard helps you to create an empty crossGrid package After you have created a crossGrid package continue with the tasks module where this package will be offered for assignments Return to the crossGrid module when all assignments to the crossGrid package are finished and select Build package to add information to the package and send it to the Trusted Server rid 4 First select the Trusted Server the package is to be delegated to Then enter a name for the package Subsequently click Finish y crossGrid Delegation Wizard Ez _ Do not show this info again g oo re Specify the delegation 6 5 Specify the server you would like to delegate the package to You can only choose a server that was previously added in the system settings to the Est of Trusted Servers Trusted Server Global Translation Services GmbH v 2 Name Translation Unit EMEA 2 Description lt Back Cancel Heip 5 The created package appears in the crossGrid module Delegated packages Package ID Name Trusted Server Download date
117. Content Mode MN te fe ne ie Ge te fe te i Ge ne Ge if i fur DTD stands for document type definition It defines the structure the elements and the attributes of XML documents Customize Tagged XML Settings at Eni E g ee ee O O i eo S Alternatively you can manually add a new element to the template To do this click New and enter the name of the element Please note that the name must precisely correspond to the name of the element in the XML document 3 Select the element you want to edit in our example an external element calories and click Edit User Manual Across Step by Step 67 3 Project Management with Across Creating and Customizing Document Settings Templates Customize Tagged XML Settings External elements are located outside the body text never within a text line Usually E gt they cause a line break In contrast inline elements are located within the body text for External vs inline example they may cause a certain word within a string to be displayed in bold type Usually elements always consist of a start tag e g lt i gt and an end tag e g lt i gt The following example shows a string with an external element lt p gt p for paragraph and an inline lt b gt element embracing the word boldface b for bold lt p gt This is lt o gt boldface lt b gt lt p gt The lt p gt and lt p gt tags are located outside t
118. Creating User Defined Filters 3 Manage user defined filters filter sets User defined fiters Fitter sets Instance Description OK 3 The crossTerm Filter Wizard is started which will guide you through the process of a new filter creation Click Next gt iy crossTerm Filter Wizard Create a user defined filter val This Wizard helps you to create a user defined filter Afterwards you can use the user defined filters to create a more complex filter set goceecsceceesssocoeessoseeceessscecesessssessososoosssseseosessssg a 4 Now enter a name for the new filter and select a crossTerm instance for which the new filter should be available Information on crossTerm instances is available in chapter 7 3 1 of the user manual Across at a Glance If necessary enter a description of the filter Additionally the filter can be defined as public filter In this way the filter will be available in the entire system i e it can be used by all users of the respective user groups of an Across installation In contrast non public filters will only be available in your personal Across environment and are invisible for other users You can for example define a new filter as a non public filter in order to check its functionality first After checking the new filter you can define it as public filter The rights for a created public filter must be assigned to one or several Across user groups In this way it w
119. Dictionary Z Search Center Concordance Search e Ii 5 To customize the newly created template please follow the following step by step instructions for a Word document or the step by step instructions on page 66 for an XML document 3 5 2 Customizing Document Settings Templates The following step by step instructions will show how you can easily customize document settings templates User Manual Across Step by Step 61 3 Project Management with Across Creating and Customizing Document Settings Templates e Application example Word document see below e Application example XML document see page 66 e Application example Conditional XML see page 69 3 5 2 1 Application Example Word Document The following step by step instructions assume that a Word document is to be translated This Word document contains sections that are not to be translated In this example the paragraphs with the paragraph style Addresses are not to be translated as they merely contain instructions for the further processing of the Word document Translating with Across The crossDesk multiformat editor is designed to meet translators requirements in the best way possible lt AcrossFeatures1 htm gt Normal The translator s main work environment is crossDesk the Across multiformat editor All information relevant for the translation is displayed in this editor outside the document format Thus translators can concentrate on the
120. Exists Missing Before After Starts with Does not start with Ends with Does not end with For further information and examples concerning the use of the individual conditions see chapter 7 5 3 of the manual Across at a Glance 3 Setting values Now define the values for the condition If you defined a picklist as field you can select one or several picklist values Multiple selection is not possible for all conditions If you selected a text field as field you can enter the desired text y crossTerm Filter Wizard EA Specify the user defined filter settings yal Logical Fiekd Condition Value lt Back Finish Cancel Help 6 Thus the first criterion of the new filter has been set up You can now add more criteria as described above Logical operators and and or You can link several criteria by using the logical operators and and or User Manual Across Step by Step 227 6 crossTerm Creating User Defined Filters Operator and The operator and links the currently selected criterion with the preceding criterion Both criteria must be fulfilled Operator or The operator or also links the currently selected criterion with the preceding criterion However only one of the two criteria needs to be fulfilled e If you do not explicitly select any logical operator the operator and will automatically be li used If several criteria are linked with the operators and and or the operator and always
121. H Info Hotline 49 7248 925425 international across net Please select Edit translation to edit the paragraph in the Target Editor or select Store translation if the translation is correct and can be stored as itis Store translation Edit translation Help Further information on the number detection in Across is available in chapter 5 5 4 of the user manual Across at a Glance 19 Upon completion of the import click Show report to display an overview of the most important data of the import such as a Summary of the performed mapping operations and the number of imported translations Click the icon to print the report Use the icon to copy the report to the clipboard From here you can use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl V to paste it into another application e g Microsoft Word for further processing Click the icon to save the report as an HTML document Click Finish to complete the import E crossTank Import Wizard EJ Importing translation units aE Import finished Show summary Cancel Help 20 The translation units contained in the TMX file are now fully imported in crossTank and can be used in Across the imported translation units have the status Smartly inserted 5 21 If you wish you can now edit or check the new translation units in the cross Tank T Manager and change their status from Smartly inserted 3 to Released P User Manual Across Step by Step 155
122. ID The GUIDs are automatically generated What is GUID and consist of a random character sequence of 32 hexadecimal characters e g F191323D 346D 49D0 A28A 1913901A76C7 Each GUID always occurs only once in the entire Across system The entries and terms are clearly identified by the associated GUIDs User Manual Across Step by Step 222 Selecting term properties T Defining separators 6 cross Term Exporting Terminology Then click Next gt al crossTerm Export Wizard Select entry data categories to export r Select entry data categories to export tf Entry data categones Export CeT Creation date Last modified by Last modification date GUID Definition EN Definition DE Subjects Relations Projects Note lt 4 lt A Y lt A 8 s K K Select all Deselect all lt back Cance Hep 9 Now you can select the term related details to be exported such as the part of speech and the gender of the terms Use the and icons to sort these term related details in the order in which they are to be exported If you intend to re import the exported terminology data to Across later on we recommend including the term GUIDs in the export as these will greatly facilitate the subsequent re import If you activate the export of the term GUIDs the export of the entry GUIDs will automatically be activated in the preceding wizard step as
123. Language Server Number of computer licenses 6 Maximum 10 Expiry date unrestricted Languages Fonts Softkeys i Workflows 2 Click New below the pane on the upper right 3 Enter the name of the Across user or the computer that will be working with the softkey in the dialog box User Manual Across Step by Step 37 2 Administering Across Creating Softkeys gy User license EJ General Managed by License name Description Save Softkey E mail Softkey mr Cancel 4 Click Mode to select the type of license you require For crossLAN and crossWAN online workstations online licenses must be created Offline licenses are created for crossWAN load and crossWAN classic workstations The softkey must then be assigned to the respective online or offline user To do this activate Assign license to and in the drop down list below select a user 3 User license Ea General Managed by License name Claire Dutred Description Status logged out Last login never Mode Online License Offfine License v Assign license to Christian Ziegler Default login Default Supervisor Denis Girardin Matt Jefferson Sonja Wagner Save Softkey E mail Softkey Cancel Before a user can be assigned this user has to be created in the user administration in gt gt Administration gt gt User A softkey can also be assigned
124. Last upload fa Translation Unit EMEA Global Translation Services GmbH 6 You can now select the tasks to be included in the package This is one by assigning the tasks to the created package in the Tasks module instead of assigning them to users as usual To do this enter the Tasks module via gt gt Projects gt gt Tasks The package B appears in the list of users that can be assigned tasks Tasks module User Manual Across Step by Step 94 3 Project Management with Across crossGrid Available users for selected task Name Rating Source language Target language E Translation Unit EMEA mm SE English Vereinigte E French France C Translation Unt EMEA E BB Geman Germany 9 WFrench France Matt Jefferson i 8 Unknown E Jenglish Vereinigte French France Claire Dutred i 8 Unknown ESjengish Vereinigte llFrench France Christian Ziegler Fd 8 Unknown HiiGeman Gemany LiFrench France Claire Dutrei i 3 Unknown German Germany DLllFrench France 7 Assign the desired tasks to the package To assign an entire project to a package select the project and assign all tasks it contains You can mark the tasks via multiple selection e g by keeping the Ctrl key T Delegating whole pressed and selecting the tasks one by one and then you can assign them projects Avalable users for selected task Name Rating Source language Target Translation Unt EMEA a4 ES Eng sh Vereinigte Xl
125. Manager Across Systems GmbH a Es File Edit View Tools Help F Cee GRDE A Standard browse mode Search Bar a x Al Epa iu 123 Text to search for B Showentry repot Z Editentry E Merge entry EE Duplicate entry X Delete entry Instance Default Across Server L Term search Me FE Quick fiter v Entries with and without related terms in target lai V 4 Q Search result Search opti gt l A input locale J JavaScript Lan 3 lt x Ec cdurprezEr x zralalmooe gt O BB microsoft SQL Server HJ Microsoft SQL Server middieware N nars National Association for Road Safety Q query R record registered LEE Add synonym Add synon EE Addtransiation_ Add translation a Administrative information 7 Concordance search IIIs role Phas Created by Creation date Last modified by Last modification date a script v Sonja Wagner 7 24 2001 9 39 51 AM Sonja Wagner 4 24 2014 10 31 54 AM A y Sonja Wagner 0 3 2005 12 29 35 PM Sonja Wagner 4 24 2014 10 31 34 AM Select All Invert Selection 52 terms found CAP NUM SCRL User Manual Across Step by Step 18 After the import you can store the log file on your local machine provided you activated the respective option at the beginning of the crossTerm import wizard see step 6 19 The terminology contained in the imported file has now been imported to crossTerm and 205 6 crossTerm Importing
126. Members s Project Managers amp Translators amp Reviewers amp Supervisors a Terminologists y Profile Default Profile 4 SS po ET mem Help Necccscscececssscecccscscsscssceed Information on the individual user groups is available in chapter 1 8 of the user manual Across at a Glance information on the rights of the individual user groups is available in chapter 12 5 of the user manual Across at a Glance Further information on the profiles in Across is available in chapter 3 of the user manual Across at a Glance 7 Click Next gt to confirm the selection Creating an online user Continue with step 9 Creating an offline user Continue with the next step 8 When creating a new offline user you can first assign him a so called crossWAN packaging template Subsequently whenever the particular offline user is assigned tasks the selected template is automatically used for packaging and the data package for processing the task is created automatically in accordance with the template specifications The crossTank and crossTerm entries that are sent to the offline users for the processing of their tasks are available to the offline users until the last task assigned to the offline user is finished and sent back to the Master Server Only after the last tasks have been sent to the Across Server the entries will be deleted on the side of the respective offline user By activating the option Store as permanent entries yo
127. N and crossWAN online workstations you need to create online licenses For crossWAN load and crossWAN classic workstations offline licenses are created Please note that you need to have the appropriate rights in order to create softkeys The default setting assumes that the supervisor is responsible for creating softkeys General information on softkeys is available in chapter 3 8 of the user manual Across at a Glance Follow the instructions below to create a softkey 1 Use the module bar on the left to switch to the Softkeys module via gt gt Administration gt gt Softkeys y Across Language Server v6 0 59795_en Sonja Wagner Softkeys a Ex File View Tools Help O 6G FF aae crossBoard Sofikeys x aa Christian Ziegler Mode Licence name Managed by Assigned user Status Last login i f Ena ee v Sonja Wagner___ Sonja Wagner SonjaWagner____loggedin__ 4 17 2014 1 _ logged in B 2 aa Default Supervisor Matt Jefferson Matt Jefferson Matt Jefferson logged out never Helen Parker Helen Parker logged out never Denis Girardin Denis Girardin Denis Girardin logged out never Default Supervisor Default Supervisor disabled 4 11 2014 1 Administration amp Denis Girardin m Helen Parker amp Matt Jefferson Profiles amp Sonja Wagner Claire Dutred logged out never Christian Ziegler Christian Ziegler Christian Ziegler logged out never Relations New Properties Delete a Summary Across
128. NG Qut DocUMEN Sveis aae a A 82 Sie AVCNIVING FTO OC S eea a a a a eels is 86 3 8 EXPORTING AND IMPORTING PROJECTS ssccccesecccsseeceseeeceageessageecsuseessuseesaaees 87 3 8 1 Exporting Projects to Project Files ccccccccsssseccnssvececsncnsescnsesssensenssensens 87 3 8 2 Importing Projects from Project Files ccccssssscsccnsssssssecnssssssenssnsessenes 89 B95 ICROSSGRID ean aa a aN 93 3 9 1 Creating and Delegating Packages ccccccssssessseeeeseneneneaessseseeseensaaaees 93 3 9 2 Retrieving Delegated PACKaQe sssssscccceseeesececesseeesecsssseeseeesssaneenees 99 3 9 3 Delivering Finished PACKAQeOS ssccccssessecccsnsneseecessasesccssaaeseseessaansees 104 3 10 EXPORTING AND IMPORTING CROSSWAN TASKS cccescceceseeeeeseeteeeeeeenes 107 3 10 1 Exporting CrOSSWAN Tasks 1cccccsssecccsseeeecceaneeecsaeeessaeeeestanenssssaenenes 107 3 10 2 Importing CrOSSWAN Taskin a a i EE 110 3 11 CROSSGRID CROSSWAN arenai ea AA AA 112 3 11 1 Importing cross Tank cross Term PACKaAQes ccccccsseeeeeeessnseseesecsaeeees 112 3 12 RESTORING PROJECTS FROM ARCHIVE cccccessceeceeseeeceeseeeteeseeseeeseeeeeees 114 Translating and Correcting Documents in ACIOSS cccccccsseeseeeeseeeenneeenees 116 User Manual Across Step by Step Table of Contents Al TRANSLATING DOCUMENTS arasina aolas aa aa araa T Aia aiii 116 4 2 CORRECTING TRANSLATIONS sssssesssrsneesuruurensurunerennnnun
129. OSS c csscccceseeceeseeeenneeeeees 253 8 1 CREATING PROJECTS WITH CROSSWEDB cccccesseccceeseceteesseeseceseeeteeseeeeeeaeess 253 8 2 CHECKING OUT DOCUMENTS WITH CROSSWEB ccccssscccceeseeeeceeeceeeseeeesaaeeees 258 8 3 REVIEWING TRANSLATIONS WITH CROSSWEB cccssececeseeeeeseeeeeseeceeeeetsneeenens 260 9 Special Workflows and TaSKS c cccsssscsseeeeesseceeseseeeeeeseeeeeessseeeeseeeeooeesneeeeees 264 9 1 PARTITIONING DOCUMENTS ss ccaseceecsuanesenainnanen tebtinidsinmapheuiaateramnatessubnledianndeades 264 Oe UPDATING DOCUMENT euni a a 267 9 2 1 Updating Documents or Projects ccccccccccentteeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaeseneeeeeneas 267 9 2 2 Translating Updated Documents csseecccccseneeeeeeessaeeeeeessaaneseesssanees 273 10 Incorporating Data from Third Party SySteMS cccseeeeesseeeessseeeeeeeenes 275 10 1 TRANSLATION MEMORIES FROM TRADOS WORKBENCH ssscereeeeeeeeens 275 10 2 TRANSLATION MEMORIES FROM STAR TRANSIT 00ecceeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeees 276 10 3 TRANSLATION MEMORIES FROM PASSOLO 0 ccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeens 277 10 4 TERMINOLOGY FROM TRADOS MULTI ERM 0 ccccsssececeeseeeeeeesseeeseeseeeees 278 User Manual Across Step by Step Table of Contents 10 4 1 Exporting aS TXT File FOrmMat cccccsseccccsseeeeceseeeesseeeeessaneseessaneseessaes 279 10 4 2 Exporting as XML File Format with Multi Term 1X ccccseeeeeeeeesseeeee
130. Report Wizard VE Project selection Choose project Project Ea Display texts Ea Fact sheet_Localization Ba Fact sheet_Across features Ea About Across ie Test lt Back Cancel Help 7 Select the reporting template you want to use for generating the report In the reporting templates you can define details such as the number of characters of a standard line and the crossTank match ranges to be presented in the reports e g 70 89 90 99 etc Click Configure to view and if necessary to edit the selected template or to create a new template Further information on the reporting templates is available in the section on the system settings in the Reporting section in chapter 3 11 2 of the user manual Across at a Glance In addition by activating the new option Only project section in the Report Wizard you can determine that Master Data Reports and Dynamic Data Reports to be generated are to contain only project related information In this way reporting information on the individual documents which is normally also contained in the reports is not displayed For example this option is useful if only the project related part of a report is to be printed Finally by activating the option Update pre translation report the source document is compared anew with crossTank If paragraphs have already been translated after checking in the source texts the values will be updated on the basis of the results of the new a
131. SB stick by e mail or as an FTP download In the list the status of the delegated packages is indicated under Status For example after the package is downloaded by the Trusted Server the state changes from built to built and downloaded User Manual Across Step by Step 98 T v Status closed 3 Project Management with Across crossGrid 17 18 Delegated packages Package ID Name Trusted Server Download date Last upload Status 2 Translation Unit EMEA Global Translation Services GmbH Buit Further information about a delegated package can be viewed by clicking Properties After the processing of the delegated package is finished on the Trusted Server side and the data are uploaded to your Across Server or imported in the form of a Grid Response Unit GRU file you will be notified about the completion of the data transfer 3 Message History Details EA To First name Date 29 04 2014 Time 10 51 Lastname Wagner Project E mail sonja wagner examp Relation Server has processed package Transiation Unit EMEA Package contains next task s Task name Document translation owner crossgnd package translation unit emea Project Fact sheet_Across features Document Across features _EN_update docx Source language Englisch Vereinigte Staaten Target language Franz sisch Frankreich Success Thus the processing of the package is finished All tasks have been processed
132. Schriftart The use of a special font e g your ps corporate font a valuable resource that is Bei der Verwendung einer speziellen Schriftart part of your corporate design represents z B Ihrer Hausschrift die als Teil Ihres another challenge as due to license related Corporate Designs eine wertvolle Ressource reasons it is usually not possible to issue darstellt kommt eine weitere Schwierigkeit these fonts to your translators v hinzu denn solche Schriftarten d rfen aus v r llizen7zrarhtlirhen Griinden maist nirht nhne Add match Complete matches Edit match Remove match Remove all Join all Save matches Cancel Heip Click Edit match to edit the content of the translation unit Click Save matches to transfer the translation unit s to crossTank and continue with the import To skip the manual correction and discard the translation segments click Cancel fy Sentence Alignment EJ Available sentences Source sentence Target sentence A v Add match Complete matches Today virtually all technical devices have Displays vermitteln uns auf kleinem Raum A displays that show information on operating Informationen zu Bedienungsfunktionen functions instructions or error messages on a Anweisungen oder Fehlermeldungen und sind small area heute auf fast jedem technischen Ger t
133. Search View Help 9 Create Termbase 3 Open Close Termbases ctrl O Load External Termbase Package Detach Termbase Modify Termbase Definition Save Termbase Definition As Af TIermbase Catalogue Alt Enter d Import Entries Ctrl Shift I L o gt Export Entries Ctrl Shift E Reorganise Termbase Settings Login Exit Alt F4 Eingabegebietsschema mimaste seas tg ime Malte AL a wells ths Se tite intl alin tit User Manual Across Step by Step 280 10 Incorporating Data from Third Party Systems Terminology from Trados MultiTerm 3 Select the Default Export Definition and click Start xi General Layout Input Model Fiter Export Import Create Edit Delete MultiTerm 5 export de System HTML export definition System Word Dictionary expo System Tab delimited export System Load Save As Process Exports all entries to a MultiT erm XML format file sorting them by entry number 4 The export wizard opens to guide you through the export process Specify where to save the export file by clicking Save as If you do not indicate another folder the log file will be saved to the same folder 2x Export Settings Select the export file and choose to sort termbase content by entry number of by index If you wish to apply a filter duting export select one from the drop down list For a complete backup of your termbase
134. Terminology AcrossTerms csv Browse Use export template Browse lt tack conc He 5 Now select the crossTerm instance which you want to export data from Information on crossTerm instances is available in chapter 7 3 1 of the user manual Across at a Glance Export language In addition you can determine that only terminology available in the form of language pairs pairs is to be exported If the option is disabled upon selection of English and German for example all entries containing terms in English and or German will be exported With the option enabled only entries containing at least one source language and one target language term are exported After activating the option you should select a language as source language of the language pair s to be exported Standalone entries Finally you can determine that standalone entries are to be exported as well Standalone entries are special terminology entries that do not contain any terms but only indexes with their index values If you activate the corresponding option standalone entries will be exported in addition to normal entries i e entries containing terms If you only want to export standalone entries it is sufficient not to select any language in Mi the selection of the languages to be exported see step 7 You can set filters in the following step to export particular standalone entries Click Next gt User Manual Across Step by
135. To delete the duplicates click Next gt Click Execute to delete the duplicates 5 4 4 2 Remove Sentence Duplicates by Text The action Remove sentence duplicates by text enables you to quickly and easily remove duplicates of a source language segment If for example you encounter a sentence with a lot of identical or seemingly identical translation units in the fuzzy search of crossDesk or in the concordance search of the cross Tank Manager you can easily remove these duplicates To do this you can enter a source language sentence for which sentence duplicates may exist in the input field If necessary select the source and target languages in which the duplicates are to be removed The action Remove sentence duplicates by text makes distinction between upper and lower case spelling Thus the two sentences segments Danach Hohe neu einstellen and danach Hohe neu einstellen would not be treated as sentence duplicates To delete the sentence duplicates click Next gt Click Execute to delete the sentence duplicates User Manual Across Step by Step 168 5 cross lank cross lank Maintenance Following the removal of duplicates the number of deleted sentence duplicates is displayed The translation units that may also have been deleted in the course of the duplicates removal are not listed separately The following types of duplicates are taken into consideration and deleted by the action Remove sentence duplic
136. Wizard 27 Project Wizard 40 QM Criteria List Wizard 34 Relation Wizard 30 Report Wizard 56 Retrieve Task Wizard 243 Style Wizard 75 Update Wizard 267 User Wizard 8 workflows integrating new groups 23 28
137. _en Sonja Wagner My tasks 0 File View Tools Help oe GF S z V Document translation Display texts crossWash_v4 dt 2 0 63 63 4 25 2014 V Document correction Fact sheet_Locali Software localiza E gt EA 0 394 394 5 1 2014 JV l Document translation Fact sheet_Across Across features_E m 0 828 825 5 1 2014 My tasks Display texts E German Germany 2 E English Vereinigte Staaten crossWash_v4 dtxml 4 16 2014 11 16 12 AM Document translation 4 25 2014 3 41 48 PM Projects elise Open Confirm reject 63 words Sonja Wagner Administration Ready CAP NUM SCRL 2 Select the correction task that was assigned to you and that you would like to edit If you have not yet confirmed the task click Confirm reject in the lower pane of the My Tasks module If you have already confirmed the task continue with step 4 y Across Language Server v6 0 59795_en Sonja Wagner My tasks gt E En File View Tools Help 8 E e E ie EP oF S q crossBoard V Document translation Display texts crossWash_v4 dt 2 0 63 63 4 25 2014 V Document correction Fact sheet_Locali Software localiza E gt m 0 394 394 5 1 2014 V Document translation Fact sheet_Across Across features ES gt A 0 828 825 5 1 2014 Fact sheet_Localization E English Vereinigte Staaten 3 E German Germany Software localization with Across_EN docx 5 1 2014 2 08 31 PM Document correction 5 1 2014 2 08 31 PM Proj
138. a to be transmitted to the Trusted Server and thus made available for processing tasks yg crossGrid Package Wizard Ea l frin pe nin je Specify provided information yralt E To reduce the amount of data to be transmitted or to hide information you can define which information shouki be delivered to the user General Exclude binary data images and objects Note If this option is activated the source and target document previews wil be disabled _ Provide change history information crossTank Provided cross Tank entries Provide all entries v gt 70 v lt Provide only crossTank entnes with matching greater _ Force storage of finished translations Upload mode Allow upload of data v crossTerm Provided crossTermm entries Provide all entries v Y Provide only terms that appear in source document _ Use stemming _ Transfer also terms only available in source language e g for offline translation Exciude images Upload mode Allow upload of data v Deletions filter Provide deletions matching above selected criteria v lt Back As a matter of principle only the crossTank and or crossTerm entries that exist in the source language and the target language of the translation will be transmitted For example for a translation from English to German only translation units and or terms in User Manual Across Step by Step 97 crossGrid
139. activated continue with step 8 to determine the workflow Otherwise continue with step 9 3 Alignment Wizard 0 Ea Text pair alignment ies Assigned Document Settings Templates i Document Type Template Software localization with Across_DE docx Word 2007 2 default Software localization with Across_EN docx Word 2007 2 default Documents Software localization with Across_DE docx Software localization with Across_EN docx Document settings template default Configure default No document settings template lt back cance He 8 The next step is the selection of the workflow e g to translate unaligned parts of the source documents or to correct the translation after the alignment To do this select the document for which you want to determine a workflow and select the required workflow from the drop down list under the list of documents If you do not want to determine any workflow select None Then click Next gt User Manual Across Step by Step 139 5 crossTank Aligning Translations y Alignment Wizard Text pair alignment tien Assigned workflow templates Workflow Document Software localization with Across_EN docx None Documents Software localization with Across_EN docx Workflow template None Yv Description 9 The two documents are successively analyzed and prepared for alignment Upon completion o
140. age Atikaans 7 Select output file Output fie Browse Export format Select one of the three available export formats Export options Select the information to be exported in addition to the terminology data IF you want to create a new and empty dictionary select Only structure no data The new dictionary will then inherit the structure of the existing dictionary Output file Specify the name of the export target file Abbrechen 4 Select the dictionary to be exported and set the file type to MARTIF User Manual Across Step by Step 283 10 Incorporating Data from Third Party Systems Terminology from Star TermStar LI am Speichern in 0B 4 c EJ x Verlauf E Desktop Arbeitsplatz Netzwerkumg Dateiname Tutorial mtf Dateityp MARTIF Files mtf Abbrechen Li 5 Click OK to confirm the selection 6 Click Start to start the export Please note that when you export a dictionary as a MARTIF file all languages are amp automatically exported It is not possible to restrict the export to certain languages at this point However in the subsequent import into crossTerm you can easily restrict the import to the desired languages Database Administration Expert Tutorial TermStar Import Database Export Export options I Values Lists Tl Modified Field Names Select the export format C TemStar 2 6 2 7 MARTIF c Ter
141. alid in the target language diner_menu xml lt xml version 1 0 encoding IS0 8859 1 gt Gi lt l Edited with XML Spy v3 5 GRiig 3 Ei lt diner menta 4 G lt food gt Gali Smee lt name gt Spaghetti alla Carbonara lt name gt Gaima lt price gt 8 50 lt price gt Gait lt description gt Italian pasta dish based on eggs pecorino romano guanciale and black pepper lt description gt Gaim lt food gt Galt lt food gt Gaia lt name gt Penne all arrabbiata lt name gt aig lt price gt 8 00 lt price gt Gail lt description gt Italian pasta dish based on garlic tomatoes basil and red chilli lt description gt amg lt food gt WA lt diner_menu gt In this case the contents are to be visible to the translator but not editable In Across this function is implemented by means of the format type locked In this way the translation volume is reduced and errors e g due to the incorrect transfer of numbers to the translation are avoided XML documents can be processed either with Tagged XML Visual XML and Tagged XML v2 Information on the two processing modes is available in chapter 11 2 1 and 11 2 2 of the manual Across at a Glance Before going through the following example you should have created a new document settings template for Tagged XML Information on this topic is available on page 60 1 Goto gt gt Tools gt gt System Settings gt gt Document settings and select the
142. ally in the log directory of the respective Windows user You can access the log directory e g via the link in the log directory of the Across installation folder The log file can also be saved locally by means of a button in the final step of the crossTerm Import Wizard Apart from the selected import settings the log file contains detailed information on the imported terminology data and on their processing e g information on the successful import of entries and terms and if not imported information on why the import did not take place Further information on log files is available in chapter 7 12 4 of the user manual Across at a Glance Then click Next gt Importing MultiTerm data in the XML file format Continue with step 8 7 First you need to select a codepage for the data to be imported This is necessary for the correct representation of characters in particular special characters such as the German umlauts a 6 or other diacritical signs such as and in French The selection of the right codepage is even more important for Asian characters In the lower part of the dialog window the content of the file to be imported is displayed in accordance with the selected codepage After selecting a codepage click Next gt A codepage is a character encoding table that provides text characters for a certain language or language group in the computer User Manual Across Step by Step 198 v 6 cro
143. and are back on your Server Please note that the crossTank and crossTerm entries transmitted to your Server should only be imported Instructions on this topic are available on page 112 By default all crossGrid packages created on the Master Server side are offered for selection within the scope of the task assignment This is not always desired particularly for crossGrid packages that can already be finished Moreover if there are many crossGrid packages it may be difficult to keep track For these reasons crossGrid packages can be marked as closed To close a crossGrid package select it in the crossGrid module and click Properties Then go to the Involved tasks tab and activate the option for closing the package for further task assignments From now on the closed crossGrid package will only appear in connection with tasks assigned to the task but will no longer be offered for selection for the assignment of other tasks 3 9 2 Retrieving Delegated Packages The following step by step instructions will help you to understand how you can download packages that have been delegated to your Across Server from a remote Across Server in the crossGrid module In this case your Across Server takes on the role of the Trusted Server The Across Server that delegated the projects to your Across Server takes on the role of the Master Server To retrieve the packages you can either download the data to your Trusted Server from the Master Server
144. and formatting of the display of these data categories Please note that you need to have the appropriate rights in order to create user defined layouts in crossTerm By default the supervisor is responsible for creating crossTerm layouts Further information on crossTerm layouts is available in chapter 7 4 1 3 of the user manual Across at a Glance 1 Open the crossTerm Manager and select the menu item gt gt Tools gt gt Manage layouts You can also use the corresponding area on the start page of the cross Term Manager or the EN icon in the toolbar of the crossTerm Manager 2 First select the crossTerm instance for which the new crossTerm layout should be available Click Add y Manage User Defined Layouts Ei User defined layouts Instance J Default Across Server x Name Description a e k s a B a e a a a a A ofl 3 The crossTerm Layout Wizard is started which will guide you through the process of a new crossTerm layout creation Click Next gt User Manual Across Step by Step 231 6 crossTerm Creating User Defined Layouts iy crossTerm Layout Wizard EA Create a user defined layout T DA This wizard helps you to create a user defined layout r A cance ep 4 Now specify a name of the new layout and enter a short description of the layout if necessary Now you can also define the layout as a public layout In this way the la
145. ange the standard profile according to group membership here if needed goosecessessoeeesosoceeeessoceceessosecsesseseseesoseceesssscesseg r a T Help 4 The Basic information dialog box opens Enter the name and if desired the e mail address of the new user Now enter the desired user name and if required a password Use the More gt gt button to specify that you would like to create a softkey for the new user after you have finished setting up the user profile Then click Next gt User Manual Across Step by Step 9 2 Administering Across Creating Users iy User Wizard Ez Basic information AA First and last name Claire Dutre 5 E mail Claire dutred exampie com Login Windows login Bro Username Claire dutred Password eeccceccecees Confirm password eecccesceeees More gt gt lt Back Cancel Help 5 Select whether the new user should be an online or offline user Please note that these settings can not be modified at a later date Online users have direct access to the Across Server via the local network LAN or a dedicated line outside the LAN crossWAN online access Offline users work outside the LAN and have indirect access to the Across Server While online users may belong to all user groups offline users may only be team members in the roles of terminologists translators correctors or as users of crossTerm Web Further information on the users in Across is
146. ank cross lank Maintenance 5 4 1 2 Splitting Multi Value Attributes in crossTank Entries The action Split multi value attributes in crossTank entries splits a crossTank entry that contains multiple attribute values of a particular attributes into several crossTank entries with one attribute value of the attribute each A typical application scenario for the new action is the transformation of a multi value attribute to a single value attribute in the system settings see below Following the change only one attribute value can be selected for a particular attribute for cross Tank entries However existing crossTank entries may still contain several attribute values To adapt these existing crossTank entries to the new setting the new action Split multi value attributes in crossTank entries should be applied Multi value attributes are attributes for which several attribute values can be determined Single value attributes are attributes for which only one attribute value can be selected To execute the action start by selecting a multi value attribute Only the attributes that are defined as multi value attributes under System Attributes in the system settings are listed Click Next gt and then Execute The action Split multi value attributes in crossTank is always performed for one attribute only Other attributes and attribute values remain unaffected by the action For example if two attributes have been changed from multi value
147. applying the changes e g by making the changes on a test system first Depending on the size of the cross Tank database mass operations may take up to several hours Therefore mass operations should if possible take place at times when Across is not subject to a high workload and should be performed directly on the computer on which the Across Server is installed User Manual Across Step by Step 161 5 cross lank cross lank Maintenance Please note that you need to have the appropriate rights in order to be able to perform mass operations in crossTank By default the supervisor is responsible for performing cross Tank mass operations Further information on using crossTank Maintenance Wizard and on individual mass operations and filter possibilities is available in chapter 6 12 of the Across at a Glance user manual a 1 Start the crossTank Maintenance Wizard In the crossTank Manager you can start the crossTank wizard via the corresponding section on the crossTank Manager start page via the x maintenance icon in the toolbar or via gt gt Tools gt gt Maintenance in the menu bar wizara 2 Once the wizard has started click Next gt E crossTank Maintenance Wizard Ea Maintenance operations in cross Tank p gt Use the crossTank Maintenance Wizard to perform mass operations in crossTank in order to maintain crossTank entries e g delete entries change attributes It is strongly recommended to backup your
148. ard Packages Wizard y Import crossTank Term Packages Wizard Import translations done by remote users crossWAN users and crossGrid users at Trusted Servers can create task dependent crossTank Term entries and upload them back to the Across Server via synchronization packages Use this wizard to import uploaded crossTank Term entries to the central crossTank and crossTerm databases at your server _ Do not show this info again 2 Once the wizard has started click Next gt User Manual Across Step by Step 112 3 Project Management with Across crossGrid crossWAN 3 Select which projects or documents you would like to import cross Tank and or crossTerm entries for Click the History button for a list of crossTerm and crossTank packages you imported in the past Optionally you can expand the list to include packages imported by other project managers Old already imported packages can be deleted to free the memory space which they occupy in the database and thus to reduce the server workload However you should delete them only if Yes is entered in the Imported column Click Next gt ty Import crossTank crossTerm Packages Wizard EA Select sync packages to import 5 Type Project Document Creation date Create v E crossTank Fact sheet_ Software localiza gt MS 4 29 2014 amp Helen P J crossTerm Fact sheet_ Software localiza gt MBS 4 29 2014 amp BHelen P
149. arker cwu lt Back Next gt Cancel Heip 4 Select the task s you would like to export Also choose whether crossTank and or crossTerm entries should be exported Determine the package version of the offline user which the offline user must have informed you of Among other things the package version depends on the version of the Across database The package version of your own Across installation is indicated in the information window that you can display with gt gt Help gt gt About Across Click Next gt User Manual Across Step by Step 108 3 Project Management with Across Exporting and Importing crossWAN Tasks 3 Import Export WAN classic Tasks Wizard Select task s 4 5 Creation 4 25 2014 Client package version 17 Current v Offine user Helen Parker Select task s for export Name Description Status Deadline 3 Documenttra Fact sheet_Localization Softwa ES p MBM Unconfirmed 5 1 2014 Select All Deselect All Invert Selection V crossTank Export V crossTerm Export lt ack _Ned gt cancer Hep 5 The desired data are now collected from the Across Server and saved in the CWU file iy Import Export WAN classic Tasks Wizard Arii Remaining time Total time Create CWU Cancel Not available Not available ck canes Ha 6 Once the procedure has been completed click Finish fy Import Export WAN classic Tasks Wizard Ea Progress 4 5 Acii Remaining
150. artitions 1 3 and 2 3 Four partitions equal S Rich Text Format RTF files a g S Text files TXT files O Two partitions 2 3 and 1 3 Five partitions equal B TeX TEX fies Other partition H A The erossTerm Terminolnay Svstem Y m lt gt lt Back Finish Cancel Help 6 The partition you have inserted appears in the Projects module in the document window on the lower right fy Across Language Server v6 0 59795_en Sonja Wagner Projects E File View Tools Help BSG HRefSaeskas crossBoard Dorn thas fie GA FY Name Language Progress Status Deadline Description Projects All Q Mi Across features_E ES 0 0 of 1656 words Oof 2language 5 1 2014 e jie About Across H Display texts CHi Fact sheet_Across features s 4 Across features_EN docx Cockpit Fact sheet_Localization Add Document Properties Delete Update Check Out Language Attachments Language Assigned users Progress Deadline e A 6 Partition 1 0 100 5 1 2014 oO 100 5 1 2014 Quality Partition 2 28 Management 0 0 of 238 words 5 1 2014 O 0 0 of 238 words 5 1 2014 6 Partition 3 55 0 0 of 461 words 5 1 2014 fi 0 0 of 461 words 5 1 2014 Partition A 15 v Styles New Delete Properties Preview Pre Transiation Ax ACN aN Administration Ready CAP NUM SCRL You can now continue assigning tas
151. ask to the crowd The option Do not offer for assignment can be used to determine that a user crowd is not to be listed for the task assignment Click Next gt to confirm these details User Manual Across Step by Step 24 2 Administering Across Creating Groups and User Crowds iy Group Wizard ES General Infomation and Default Profile 6 5 Group name Translator Crowd a Description EN gt DE Across users Base group May contain offline users Packaging template None Y Do not offer for assignment C crossTerm Web read write users crossTerm Web read only users lt tack cance ne 5 Now determine the languages and if necessary the rating with which the crowd is to work When assigning tasks the crowd will only be offered for the assignment if the source and target languages of the task match those of the crowd In this example a translator crowd with the language combination English German is created Then click Next gt y Group Wizard Ez Languages G 5 Name Source Language Target Language a l German C 7 French Dutch Olitatan E Spanish Select All Unselect all cma noas conce He 6 The selected languages are displayed in an overview Click Next gt User Manual Across Step by Step 25 2 Administering Across Creating Groups and User Crowds y Group Wizard Ea La
152. ates by text e Sentence duplicates e Sentence duplicates with redundant elements e Translation duplicates Definitions of the various duplicate types are available on page 170 Further information on removing sentence duplicates is available in the explanation of the respective action in the user manual Across at a Glance In the crossTank Manager the removal of duplicates can also be started by means of a respective command in the context menu of a translation unit E Across v6 0 59795_en crossTank Manager Across Systems GmbH File Edit View Tools Help I EERTE SIE gt ui Source sentence E The crossDesk multiformat editor is designed to meet translators requiref Text to search for The terminology system of Across tells authors and translators which terms they should prefer amp IA company communication oy E Real Time Length Check for Propos e gt sl tante Concordance sear Y R E Across delivers a Web based solution for the n to maste The use of a special font g your corporate Add additional translation our corp challenge as due to license related reasons Delete ts to yo FS However the limited size of these displays m aie ier cas lenge Fd Today virtually all technical AESi M ee FS Today virtually all technical devices hav ee eee Ce nctions _ Date small area Subject ES Moreover the preferred terms or terms not to be used can be tagged with attributes
153. atically during the subsequent import Alternatively you can use the button Auto create missing to auto create all attributes and attribute values that do not yet exist in crossTerm The auto created attributes and attribute values are created as data categories in the respective sections of the crossTerm settings are not automatically added to the crossTerm templates at entry and or term level Thus these data categories cannot be edited when creating new entries or when editing existing entries as only data categories stored in entry and term templates can be edited To enable the editing of these data categories add the desired attributes to the respective templates after the terminology import Information on this is provided in chapter 7 3 4 of the user manual Across at a Glance Then click Next gt User Manual Across Step by Step 201 6 crossTerm Importing Terminology a crossTerm Import Wizard Map data categories q There are unassigned data categories in your MultiTerm export file Please specify to which Across data categones the MultiTerm data categones should be mapped If a corresponding data category does not exist in Across you can create it using the crossTerm settings button Note All information of MultiTerm data categories that are not mapped to Across data categones gets lost MultiTerm data categ Type Across data category A Entry pickiist Subjects Type Entry pickiist None Graphic En
154. ating the option Apply the same WAN package options for all users the settings of the package you are currently compiling will be used for all offline users you just assigned tasks Finish the settings and click OK User Manual Across Step by Step 52 3 Project Management with Across Multiple Task Assignment y Information provided to offline users To reduce the amount of data to be transmitted or to hide information you can define which information should be delivered to the user y Q Advanced fiters M Provide only crossTank entries with matching greater ER M C Force storage of finished translations Upload mode Allow upload of data y crossTem Provided crossTem entries Provide all entries v O Advanced fitters V Provide only terms that appear in source document C Use stemming L Transfer also terms only available in source language e g for offiine translation C Exclude images _ Apply same WAN package options for all users ox canca Help OK y Task Assignment You have successfully assigned the following task s to user s y These tasks are now in the state Unconfirmed until they have been confirmed or rejected User Task name Christian Ziegler Fact sheet_Across features Across features_EN docx Germ Claire Dutred Fact sheet_Across features Across features_EN docx Fren C Do not show this dialog again o 8 The confirmatio
155. ation memories E Use the crossTank Export Wizard to export your Translation Memory or parts of it in Translation Memory eXchange Format TMX In this wizard you can also define filter criteria and or language pairs in order to restrict the export to the relevant crossTank entries a id goeeesecoceessssooeescosceceessseseesosscoessssssoossssoseossssssg 3 Select the TMX format as export format and click Next gt If you started the crossTank Export Wizard from the Projects module continue with step 7 E crossTank Export Wizard Select expot file format p Format ipti TMX Export Exports to a Translation Memory eXchange TMX file cme wens canes ep 4 You can use and combine various filters to narrow down or restrict the crossTank entries to be exported The following filters are available server context for crossGrid date subject relation created by modified by status and project Once you have made all the settings click Next gt User Manual Across Step by Step 157 5 crossTank Exporting Translation Memories E crossTank Export Wizard Ea Fitter _ Server context _ Date Subject v Relation sam Dessen as None Marketing Sales Software Technical Documentation K 4 _ User defined system attributes Created bv cea nea cance nep 5 Now you can determine the attrib
156. ation on the content of the particular columns It is recommended that before you start the import you check the CSV file to see whether the file you would like to import has column headings To do this open the CSV file and check if the first row of the file contains information on the content of the individual columns or whether it already contains terminology data CSV file with column headings The first row of the CSV file contains information on the content of individual columns A 1 Deutsch Genus Englisch 2 Fuzzy Suche f fuzzy search CSV file without column headings The first row of the CSV file contains terminology data A 1 Fuzzy Suche t tuzzy search 2 Hauptbenennung f main entry term User Manual Across Step by Step 181 in crossTerm Import Wizard Import template 6 crossTerm Importing Terminology The crossTerm Import Wizard helps you to import your existing termbases in CSV format and to map the corresponding fields such as languages or subjects in crossTerm 1 Start the crossTerm Import Wizard In the crossTerm Manager you can start the wizard via the corresponding section on the crossTerm Manager start page via the F icon in the toolbar or via gt gt Tools gt gt Import in the menu bar a crossTerm Import Wizard Import tems r Use the crossTerm Import Wizard to import previously compiled terminology databases or lists and assign the corresponding languages and subjects in crossTerm 2 On
157. atus Progress Words Deadline Project ID Projects All Q Q Factsheet_Acro Across features ES p BM S9 Matt Jefferson Unconfirm 0 828 5 1 2014 4 O oe All J Factsheet_Acro Across features ES p BM Unassigned 0 828 5 1 2014 4 fie Display texts H crossWash_v4 dixml Iie Fact sheet_Across features Cockpit W Across features_EN docx French France ANA i German Germany Fact sheet_Localization 3 Software localization with Acrc Projects s z Properties Open Task Report Reset fiter Assignment Workflow Available users for selected task Name Rating Source language Target language Relay lang Sonja Wagner D 8 Unknown EJEnglish Vereinigte BiGerman Germany V Matt Jefferson ow 8 Unknown E2eEngiish Vereinigte German Germany Christian Ziegler D 8 Unknown EJEnglish Vereinigte BiiGerman Germany Quality Christian Ziegler ow 8 Unknown LillFrench France B Gemman Germany gt O p Management Styles Assign Task Unassign Task More gt gt v Administration lt gt Ready CAP NUM SCRL B B re Multi Assignment 3 Once the wizard has started click Next gt Wizard y Multi Assignment Wizard Ea M Multi Assignment Wizard as This wizard helps to assign several tasks to one user _ Do not show this info again 4 Inthe left pane select the project for which you want t
158. bject You can only activate the options if the TBS file to be imported does not contain any entry or term GUIDs These are unique IDs of entries and terms When re importing terminology previously exported from Across the TBX file contains GUIDs If this is the case the options will be grayed out as the treatment of existing entries is determined by the preceding step of the wizard Finally you can determine that all imported terms are to be set to Released If this option is disabled the imported terms are set to Unreleased Import template User Manual Across Step by Step 178 6 crossTerm Importing Terminology Click Save import template to create a template with the settings you selected for the import and a file extension import If you want to import the same data or other data with the same entry structures and data categories later on you can use the template for this purpose see step 3 In this way the respective settings will be pre configured in the Import Wizard reducing or eliminating the need for manual adjustments 12 Click Import to start the import 13 The import of the TBX file is started Cc crossTerm Import Wizard Import progress r Importing entry 531 of 22571 Remaining time 0 13 51 elapsed time 0 00 20 Help 14 If you activated the option Check for existing terms and show manual correction dialog in the previous step of the crossTerm Import Wizard and a term to be import
159. by Step 71 3 Project Management with Across Creating and Customizing Document Settings Templates Condition Properties Add parent Add chid Add attribute Value Normal v Cancel 6 Ifyou have imported the XML document to the document settings template see above you can select the desired attribute from the drop down list on the left in our case the attribute translate Otherwise enter an attribute manually The name of the attribute must correspond exactly to the attribute name in the XML document J Configure Attribute and its Value EA Value cma 7 Inthe right input field enter the value of the attribute in this case yes Here too the attribute value must correspond exactly to the attribute value in the XML document Then click OK fy Configure Attribute and its Value Ea Attribute Value rent is used as wid card for attributes and values cor 8 From the drop down list select the desired processing and display mode in Across In this case select Normal as the element contents with the attribute value yes are to be edited by the translator in the normal way i e they are to be translated Then click OK User Manual Across Step by Step 72 3 Project Management with Across Creating and Customizing Document Settings Templates Condition Properties 9 The condition has been added and represented in the form of an XPath expression Click Add and subsequ
160. can be displayed by clicking Show info Select the entry to which you would like to add the term to be imported Determine what is to be done with the information available for the term Select one of the following four options User Manual Across Step by Step 193 6 crossTerm Importing Terminology Use new definitions and properties The definitions and properties of the term to be imported will be adopted and those of the existing term will be dropped Use existing definitions and properties The definitions and properties of the existing term will be adopted and those of the term to be imported will be dropped Merge new and existing definitions and properties Both the definitions and the properties of the term to be imported and of the existing term will be adopted If the properties to be merged are values of data categories that may only occur once you can use an option to additionally determine whether the existing value or the new value is to be used Manual merge Using the More options gt gt you can determine for each particular term how the terms to be imported are to be processed In addition detailed information will be displayed g Already existing entries EJ ne terms you want to inser New term s LI cele shoelace C Add as new entry Merge with existing entry Manual merge Entry definitions summary New entry definitions count 0 Selected entry definitions count 1 Show Entry
161. ce the wizard has started click Next gt 3 First select CSV as import format If you created an import template during a previous import See step 26 you can select it now To do this click Browse select the template with the file extension import and click Open Use an import template only for another import of the same data as during the creation of the import template or for an import of other data with the same entry structures and data categories Click Next gt E crossTerm Import Wizard Select import file format q Format Description DICSV Imports terminology saved in Comma Separated Values format fsi MuitiTem Imports terminology exported from Trados MuiltiTerm Star Martit Imports terminology from a Star Martit file TBX TBX Imports terminology from a TermBase eXchange TBX file Use template no template Browse lt Back Cancel Help 4 First select the file you want to import To do this click Browse User Manual Across Step by Step 182 6 crossTerm Importing Terminology E crossTerm Import Wizard ES Select file to import q Select file to import Select import mode Import with user interaction C Import without user interaction all questionable entries will be stored to a TMX TBX file _ Create import log lt Back Cancel Help 5 Select the file you want to import and click Open Cc Open Ez Tt d gt Computer gt Local Disk C Terminology v S
162. ces _ informational literature regarding the product 3 and other formats that can A This means that translators For example the user interface s error messages E So korrespondieren beispielsweise die V use the same multi forma correspond with the respective passages in the Fehlermeldungen der Software mit den and use a single translatic A aaa OA 2 9 9 9 6G 3c HM Bs Ux ate allocation of consistent ke Heading 1 Alt adaptation of user interfac B special quality assurance s R T pe T in addition the high admin LOKalisierung von Software Oberflachen mit Across rere integrated update function integration and automatio a SAB TSZ X the ability to expand supp Thus the integrated concer K Quick fiter Ma 5 GE 8 nn thin bewnie E lt gt a Search Center a x e Search for similar sentences in crossTank ES gt a gt E Et 4 x T 4 i gt 7 Te ae b EE ah Oneal s Localizing Software with Across 2 g 0 e o 8 1s S Lokalisierung von Software Oberfl chen mit Across Ready Touched CAP NUM SCRL 6 After you have completed the translation a dialog box opens automatically to complete the task Select the option Finish task and define whether the translation should be saved in crossTank Generally it is recommended to enable the storing of translations to crossTank This ensures that all translations with corresponding attribut
163. cked in to Across as Tagged XML on the basis of the customized document settings template Element Conditions Condition Value Order t p transiate yes normal 1 p transiate no locked 2 Close 13 In crossDesk the checked in document appears as follows to the translator crossView A x FS SS me oe oo He Qe H se AB all 1m V U No condition at all Sj ConditionalXML xmi E Document To be translated El doc ol Do not translate The element contents without condition are displayed in the normal way see 1 In line with the first defined condition the contents with the attribute value yes are also displayed in the normal way in crossDesk and can be edited by the translator see 2 In contrast the element contents with the attribute value no are displayed as blocked for the translator in accordance with the second defined condition This is evident from the gray background of the respective paragraph see 3 and from the icon in crossView User Manual Across Step by Step 74 3 Project Management with Across Creating and Editing Styles 3 6 Creating and Editing Styles The following step by step instructions will help you to easily understand how to create and edit a new style template for a target document Run the Style Wizard to edit or create templates for target documents for example if they need to deviate from the original because of differing standards in the target language Pl
164. classic 3 Project Management with Across crossGrid English and German but not in French will be transmitted By default the crossTank and or crossTerm entries in all sublanguages will be transmitted Further information on compiling the data is available in chapter 4 8 2 1 of the user manual Across at a Glance Once you have made all the settings click Next gt 14 The data to be transmitted are now compiled E crossGrid Package Wizard EJ Transmitting data G 5 Action Remaining time Total time crossTank import export Cancel Not available Not available crossTerm import export Cancel Not available Not available Build package Cancel Not avaiable Not available Collect translations for Project Fact sheet_Across features Document Across features_EN_update docx Language French Cancel Heip 15 After compiling the details click Finish yg crossGrid Package Wizard E Transmitting data G 5 Action Remaining time Total time cance Ha 16 The package that has just been built is displayed in the list of delegated packages and is now available for download by the Trusted Server To provide the data in the form of a GWU file crossGrid classic click crossGrid classic OUT Specify the name and location of the GWU file and click Save The GWU file will be created You should provide this file to the project manager on Trusted Server side on a suitable data medium e g a CD or a U
165. click Remove match Click Join all to save all sentences of the paragraph pair ina single segment Otherwise match the sentences correctly by selecting the matching sentences in the source and target segments and click Add match Continue until all sentences are matched correctly and click Save matches in order to transfer the translation units to crossTank and continue with the import To skip the manual correction and discard the translation units click Cancel y Sentence Alignment Ea Available sentences Source sentence Target sentence v Add match Complete matches Since terminology is important both to Weil Terminologie im Marketing genauso wie im A marketing and to product management Produktmanagement von Bedeutung ist steht crossTerm can be deployed throughout the crossTerm auf Wunsch unternehmensweit zur company Verf gung In this way the terminology system can be Dadurch k nnen nicht nur Redakteure und accessed not only by editors and translators bersetzer auf das Terminologiesystem but also by the individual departments and zugreifen sondern auch Fachabteilungen und secretariats Sekretariate v A flexible riahts and profile svstem contributes Ein flexibles Rechte und Profilsvstem traat zur Editmatch Remove match Removeal Jonan Conce Hep User Manual Across Step by Step 153 5 cross
166. consult the relevant Star documentation 1 Goto gt gt Options gt gt Database Administrator gt gt Export to switch to the export dialog User Manual Across Step by Step 282 10 Incorporating Data from Third Party Systems Terminology from Star TermStar er tSp Poke H am l oo lle iE aclivale gt sefect a E 24 10 2002 apania mask Leura Serra f ea ay bf adien DEJ ein eine gine application Acre iL Hepap Tog ra rintt Cxaalad or chaveaeel et Gender fh Leste Gr CAME a_dueir application wrlreel oe Anwrnndumysta ester IGITAN Pa S F Engish UK gt German Tutorial TermStar a 2 Select the dictionary in the TermStar database you would like to export and click Import Export TermStar Dictionary Expert 2 x Select the working dictionary TermStar dictionary utorial TermStar Received TermStar Dictionary From the hierarchy first select the database and the dictionary and then the action to be performed 3 Use the Export tab and select MARTIF as the export format Click Browse Database Administration Expert Tutorial TermStar Import Database Export Select the export format C TemStar 2 6 2 7 MARTIF C TermStar 3 02 image Export options I Values Lists I Modified Field Names T Input Verification I Passwords F Oniy structure no data I Apply filter Chance Source langu
167. cribes the creation of a first bibliographic entry Creating bibliographic entries Example of how to create a first bibliographic entry 1 Start the creation of a new entry e g by clicking the E icon in the toolbar of the cross Term Manager and select the newly created template in this example Bibliography as the basis for the new entry Default Across Server ka Properties J Bibliography 2 Enter a value for the index e g an abbreviation of the bibliographic source and complete the other data categories for entering the bibliographic source such as Author Title etc User Manual Across Step by Step 239 6 crosslerm Administration of Bibliographic Sources with the Help of Indexes Instance Default Across Server M Properties j Bibliography Duden 1 Author name Add property Title Add property Duden Die deutsche Rechtschreibung Year of publication Add property 2013 City of publication Add property Publisher Add property t Add firstterm FA Save standalone entry 3 After you have added all needed data categories click Save standalone entry 4 The creation of a first bibliographic entry is thus completed PERREN Default Across Server Default Layout Entry Editenty t Addterm E Merge entry ID 30394 Properties Title Duden Die deutsche Rechtschreibung Year of publication 2013 indexes Bibliography Duden 1 a ti Created by Sonja
168. crossWAN classic To transfer data packages back to the project manager or the Across Server offline users can use the Deliver Task pee Wizard et _D SS _ Do not show this info again 2 Once the wizard has started click Next gt 3 Decide whether you would like to download the task directly from the Across Server or whether you would like to import the task as a CWU file Client Working Unit which contains all the data required for you to work on the task that may have been provided to you by the project manager If you would like to import the task as a CWU file select the appropriate option use Browse to select the file and click Open Then click Next gt gy Retrieve Task Wizard Please select the retrieval mode Please select the retneval mode Download task s directly from server crossWAN load C Import task s from CWU client work unit file crossWAN classic lt Back 4 Select the task that you would like to download or import and click Next gt User Manual Across Step by Step 244 7 crossWAN Working Offline via the Internet Retrieving crossWAN Tasks y Retrieve Task Wizard Ey Retrieve tasks Please select the tasks you want to retrieve Action T Project Document Total J Addnewtask Fact sheet_Localization Software localization with Across_EN docx gt E 394 words Select All Deselect All Invert Selection lt
169. ct the CRU file and click Open Click Next gt User Manual Across Step by Step 110 3 Project Management with Across Exporting and Importing crossWAN Tasks Import Export WAN tasks wizard EJ Select transfer direction Please select an action to perform import offine packages from a file or export offline packages to a file Import CRU file path C Export Offline user Helen Parker CWU file path lt Back Next gt Cancel Help 4 Select the task s that you would like to import and click Next gt iy Import Export WAN classic Tasks Wizard Ea Select task s 4 5 Creation 4 29 2014 Client package version 17 Current Offline user Helen Parker Name Description Status Deadline Fact sheet_Localization Softwa gt BS Confirmed v Document re 5 1 2014 Select All Deselect Al Invert Selection v crossTank Import 4 V crossTerm Import lt Back Cance Het 5 The data selected for the CRU file are now imported 6 Once the import procedure has been completed click Finish y Import Export WAN classic Tasks Wizard EJ Progress Remaining time Total time 7 The desired data of the CRU file have been successfully imported to Across User Manual Across Step by Step 111 3 Project Management with Across crossGrid crossWAN 3 11 crossGrid crossWAN 3 11 1 Importing crossTank crossTerm Packages The following step by ste
170. cts web ste ii Open Show report 828 words Sonja Wagner Administration Ready CAP NUM SCRL crossDesk your 5 crossDesk opens displaying your translation task virtual desk Here you can find all information relevant to the translation at a glance Source View and Target Editor displaying the source and target texts divided into paragraphs the document navigation toolbar crossView crossTerm with the authoritative terminology entries crossTank the translation memory containing all previously translated texts the concordance search for quickly finding words in crossTank and crossSearch for researching Internet or Intranet resources Te crossDesk offers you three different crossDesk modes for displaying your text Edit Mode The source and target texts are shown underneath one another in separate windows the Source View at the top and the Target Editor at the bottom Correction Mode B The source text is shown side by side with the translation for the purpose of comparison In the Correction Mode you can only change the paragraph states In order to edit the paragraphs you need to use the Edit or Combi Mode Combi Mode E The default mode in crossDesk It presents a combination of the Correction and Edit modes In the upper pane the Context View the source and target texts are displayed side by side The current paragraph can be edited in the Target Editor in the usual manner In the example below translating documents i
171. d ua ai 7 OS Had e gt Aae Igooar aAA crossView Complete overview Viaets crossTerm ABC f a A eS Englisch Vereinigte Staaten E Deutsch Deutschland a No results found TEN Project Fact sheet_Localization System attributes Software localizati th A EN d ee en ee ee A Document Software localization with Subject Flyers ___2 Content Across_EN docx Relation Marketing B Localzing Software with Across Project manager Sonja Wagner User defined attributes 5 gt Seamlessly integrated localization of so Date 5 1 2014 2 08 31 PM Software needs to be localized not c terface s er Localizing Soft Context View crossView mamiz with Across d crossTerm fver therefc 4 yl Standard windows resources in bi al mit Across B Standard Windows resources in sc amp IB Microsoft NET resources in binary Seamlessly integrated Nahtlos integrierte V N lacalizatinn of coftwara and Lakaliciaruina wan Sofhuara gt Microsoft NET resources in source 5 and other formats that can be a c An AA amp amp q mM TIBI U xXx E gt B This means that translators and pro Segoe UI 16pt v use the same multi format editor Ree it A A o OKallsierung Vi len mI cross z 5 an use a single translation mem g Target Editor Bs a E This process thoroughly takes into z lt gt 4 Quick filter vi gt Search Center y Fuzzy Concordance crossSearch S
172. d package You can also check the transmission history of crossGrid packages for detailed information on the history of crossGrid packages You can open the transmission history by selecting a crossGrid package in the crossGrid module and clicking Properties Then go to the Status tab and click Transmission history Information on the crossGrid transmission history is available in chapter 4 8 1 5 of the manual Across at a Glance If you exported a crossGrid task as a GRU file you need to send it to the project manager on the Master Server side The project manager will import it thereby gaining access to all relevant data 9 You receive a corresponding message as soon as the transferred files have been processed by the Master Server Please note that the crossTank and crossTerm entries that were transmitted by the Master Server for processing the delegated tasks or that were created while processing the tasks will be deleted after the tasks are finished and uploaded to the Master Server and will no longer be available to you 3 10 Exporting and Importing crossWAN Tasks 3 10 1 Exporting crossWAN Tasks The following step by step instructions demonstrate how you as a project manager can create Client Working Units CWU files for tasks to be processed in the crossWAN load mode The Import Export WAN classic Tasks Wizard supports you in exporting the data to a CWU file Please note that you need to have the appropriate rights in o
173. d target segments these the dialog boxes are shown during the storage process Click Join all to save all sentences of the paragraph pair in a single segment To correct the translation unit s manually select the sentence s in the source and target segments that belong to one translation unit and click Add match in order to join the sentences to one translation unit Continue this process until all sentences have been matched Use Edit match to carry out corrections on either source or target segments Click Remove Match to rematch the source and target segments When you are finished click Save Matches User Manual Across Step by Step 130 4 Translating and Correcting Documents in Across Quick Translate 3 Sentence Alignment Available sentences Source sentence Target sentence Software Oberflachen m ssen nicht Software needs to be localized not only nur f r Anwendungs Software als for the application as such but also for solches lokalisiert werden sondern machine controls diagnostic devices etc auch f r Maschinensteuerungen In all cases the contents of the user Diagnose Ger te etc In allen F llen interface are found in various finden sich die Inhalte der Software informational literature regarding the Oberfl che in unterschiedlichen Product produktbezogenen Informationen M Edit match Remove match Save matches Cancel Help 10 Once
174. data with the same entry structures and data categories Click Next gt User Manual Across Step by Step 206 6 crossTerm Importing Terminology a crossTerm Import Wizard aon F Format Description 1 csv Imports terminology saved in Comma Separated Values format Si MuitiTem Imports terminology exported from Trados MuitiTerm Imports terminology from a Star Martif file TBX TEX Imports terminology from a TermBase eXchange TBX file Use template no template Browse 4 First select the file you want to import To do this click Browse IE crossTerm Import Wizard Select file to import aN Select file to import a Select import mode Import with user interaction Import without user interaction all questionable entries will be stored to a TMX TBX file Browse C Create import log ceee wens canes Hep 5 Select the file you want to import and click Open ol Open T di gt Computer gt Local Disk C gt Terminology v Search Terminology P Organize v New folder v ih ids Local Disk C a Name Date modified Type D BiTest a Congree B Demo Data P inetpub J Install MSOCache d PerfLogs p Program Files B Program Files x86 ProgramData P Projects J sources P temp M Terminology b TMX ei Le gt ef StarMartif_Sample mtf 10 7 2004 5 49PM MTF File File name StarMartif_Sample mtf v _ Star Martif Files
175. den dazu geh rigen Online Hilfen Das eine wird intern in der Entwicklung bersetzt das andere in der Dokumentationsabteilung oder bei einem externen Sprachdienstleister internally during development while the other is translated in the documentation department or on the premises of outside language service provider Zur Minimierung der Aufw nde und Maximierung der Qualit t ist es deshalb wichtig dass sowohl fir die Software Oberflache als auch fir die sie beschreibenden Dokumente die qgleichen Sprach Ressourcen To minimize expenses and maximize quality it is therefore important that the same language resources be used for both the user interface and the descriptive documents In the Correction Mode you can only change the editing states of the paragraphs To edit the content of paragraphs you need to switch to the Edit Mode or Combi Mode e g by pressing F2 e Click the BEI icon in the crossDesk toolbar to switch to the Correction Mode Click the icon to switch back to the Edit Mode Press the F2 function key to toggle back and forth from the Edit Mode to the Correction Mode 6 Correcting translations in the Edit Mode Once you have opened the correction task you will automatically be taken to the first paragraph to be corrected in the Edit Mode The active paragraph is highlighted in light blue in the Source View The active sentence appears in black and all other sentences in the paragraph are grayed out
176. do not yet exist in crossTerm all data categories and values that have been mapped to the corresponding data categories and values in crossTerm will be imported to crossTerm Thus data categories and values that have not been mapped will not be imported If the author and or user of the entries or terms to be imported has not been mapped to any Across user the Across user who performs the import will automatically be used as author user in crossTerm For entries and terms you can separately determine how to proceed if entries and or terms to be imported already exist in crossTerm e Use entry term properties of the CSV file The properties of entries or terms that already exist in crossTerm will be overwritten with the respective properties of the entries or terms from the CSV file Properties of the entries or terms that already exist in crossTerm that are not contained in the CSV file or that have not been mapped to any corresponding property in crossTerm will be deleted Entry properties include definitions images or subject information in contrast term properties include the term type the part of speech or the grammatical gender of terms lf the user of the entries or terms to be imported has not been mapped to any Across user the Across user who performs the import will automatically be used as user in cross Term However the date from the import file will always be used as modification date The details of the entries or terms
177. drop down list Available data categories and add it to the template by clicking Add Data Category In particular add the newly created index e g Bibliography and the data categories for entering the bibliographic sources Author Title etc Proceed in this way until the template contains all needed data categories User Manual Across Step by Step 238 6 crossTerm Administration of Bibliographic Sources with the Help of Indexes You can remove the default data category Definition from the template as it is usually not needed for bibliographic sources Using the Mandatory checkboxes you can additionally determine that values must be entered for certain data categories when creating a bibliographic entry Otherwise it will not be possible to save the entry J Settings EA Instance r Default Across Server Y Manage crossTem Settings Template administration i Entries Template Indexes Bibliography v Set as default Text fields Picklists New Edit Delete System attributes Attachments Groups Mandatory i Terms Biblography v Text fields Author name Pickists Title v System attributes Year of publication C be Attachments City of publication a Grmups Publisher a Template Administration M Eny ienpiate i Term template Tooltip administration 6 The basic structure for entering bibliographic sources is now ready Continue with the next section which des
178. e The CSV file contains a column with German terms a column with English terms and a column with gender details for the German terms In the following step the column with the gender information is mapped to the column with the German terms so that the gender details are added to the respective German terms during the import Te When using the default picklist Term type of the default instance Standard Across Mi Server the term type of the term to be imported e g main entry term or synonym will also be determined Example The CSV file contains a column with German terms that represent main entry terms and another column with German terms that represent synonyms of the main entry User Manual Across Step by Step 188 6 crossTerm Importing Terminology terms In the next step the first column is mapped to the term type Main entry term and the second column to the term type Synonym Columns with other terminology information that was not mapped to any column with terms will not be imported crossTerm Import Wizard EJ Assign tem data categories r Please assign the term data categories to the terms CSV fiekis Type of information B Deutsch Engisch caoat cmoa He 20 Select a column of the CSV file that contains terms and click Map data categories or click the icon in the respective line 21 The Term Data Category Mapping dialog is displayed for the selected column containing terms The lef
179. e crossAPI Click Export to start the export of the TMX file E crossTank Export Wizard Choose file name E Please select an option TMX Backup _ TMX Export for Translation Memory Exchange with other CAT Tools Target file C TMX tmx_export tmx Browse v Export Rich Translation Memory information goceeeccoceceeesosececsosooeecsococceeoosoceosossoosssossooeesos Export context information R ecececcocccccccscoccccosoccecccceccccoccocecccsseoccoseccoeesos v Export usage history information Save export settings lt Back Hep User Manual Across Step by Step 160 5 cross lank cross lank Maintenance 10 The export of the crossTank entries begins crossTank Export Wizard Exporting translation units p Requesting results from server Help 11 Upon completion of the export click Finish E crossTank Export Wizard Exporting translation units E Export finished 12 The requested crossTank entries have been successfully exported to the TMX file 5 4 crossTank Maintenance TM maintenance The following step by step instructions show how you can execute mass operations in crossTank for maintenance purposes with the help of the crossTank Maintenance Wizard Before you modify your crossTank data with the crossTank Maintenance Wizard we recommend backing up the crossTank database Moreover carefully review the possible consequences before
180. e no gt Do not translate lt p gt aimiz 3 lt doc gt The document contains the external element lt p gt which occurs three times in the example document once as normal element without attribute see 1 and twice as element with the attribute translate see 2 and 3 and different attribute values In the first case the element content is to be translated attribute value yes see 2 and therefore displayed in the normal way in Across In the second case however the element content is not to be translated User Manual Across Step by Step 69 3 Project Management with Across Creating and Customizing Document Settings Templates attribute value no see 3 Accordingly the element content is to be displayed as locked for the translator in Across In Across the implementation of these attribute values can be mapped with the help of conditions Conditional ML 1 Access the document settings template in which you want to determine conditions via gt gt Tools gt gt System Settings gt gt Document Settings There select the desired format Tagged HTML SGML or XML in this example Tagged XML and the desired template via the drop down list under Document settings template 3 System Settings ES Server Tagged XML Local v New Delete Import Export Reporting A Document settings template Segmentation Conditional 4 Structure Attributes Subjects System Attributes User defin
181. e style properties that you would like to edit and make the desired changes under Font Font style and or Size Use Details to edit other settings such as the font color If documents to be checked in contain characters that cannot be displayed correctly in the target language Across will replace the particular font with another during check in according to the settings under gt gt Tools gt gt Profile Settings gt gt General gt gt Fonts If fonts were substituted during check in but this is not desired the substitution can be undone by means of a corresponding option Once you have made all the settings click Next gt User Manual Across Step by Step 80 3 Project Management with Across Finishing Projects y Style Wizard Adjust document style properties Te Style Template Fix fonts not to be substituted LatinTemplate v Document Style Across features_EN docx Word 2007 2013 v Default Paragraph Font Y Style Properties Name Font Style Size Qara unicode MS Adobe Fan Heiti Std B A Regular OOOO 10 A Adobe Gothic Std B Anal Unicode MS 12 Batang 14 BatangChe 16 DFKai SB v 18 V Details Se a Hep 7 lf other fonts are used in the source document they will be listed under Additional fonts and can be replaced by other fonts Then click Next gt y Style Wizard EA Adjust additional fonts Te Style Template Document LatinTemplate v Across features_EN docx Word 20 Y Additional
182. e a d paa e pal a Do not show this info again Next gt Cancel Help 4 The reports already created for the respective project are listed in an overview the Report History Click Delete to remove a report from the history or Display report to view a report y Reports EJ a Report History J H Type Created Created by MDR 4 22 2014 09 24 Sonja Wagner MDR 4 24 2014 13 54 Sonja Wagner DDR 4 24 2014 13 54 Sonja Wagner aQmMR 4 24 2014 13 54 Sonja Wagner lt Back cancel _ He In addition to the Across reports extensive reporting log files are generated when reports are updated Among other things these reporting log files contain detailed information about utilized crossTank entries match rates etc The icon indicates that a reporting log file is available for a report The file can be saved by clicking Save logfile e You can access the reporting history under the Reports tab in the settings of a project Mi at a any time 5 Select the desired report and click Next gt Further information on the various types of reports in Across is available in chapter 4 3 of the user manual Across at a Glance 6 Ifyou have started the Report Wizard e g via the icon in the Across toolbar you can now select the project for which you would like to generate the report Then click Next gt User Manual Across Step by Step 57 3 Project Management with Across Creating Reports iy
183. e dialog window you can select the project whose workflow you want to change User Manual Across Step by Step 54 3 Project Management with Across Changing the Workflow of Multiple Documents 5 6 The new workflow has been successfully assigned to the selected documents y Multi Document Workflow Change Wizard EN Select documents 6 5 Projects Est Documents ist All projects All Documents fim Display texts my Software localization with Across_EN lim Fact sheet_Across features Fact sheet_Localization Select Al Unselect All lt Back Crea cance He Subsequently the documents of the project are displayed on the right side Activate the respective checkboxes to select the documents whose workflow you want to change Now you can select a further project in the left part of the dialog window and select additional documents Continue until all documents whose workflow you want to change are selected Then click Next gt y Multi Document Workflow Change Wizard Select documents 5 Projects lst Documents lst All projects AI Documents fie Display texts lim Fact sheet_Across features lim Fact sheet_Localization uY Software localization with Across_EN lt Back In the drop down list in the lower part of the dialog window select the workflow to be Select All Unselect Al Crea cance He allocated to the selected documents Click Finish
184. e following dialog Execute Export and manual cleaning of crossTank entries with multiple translations You can export the source segments of the corresponding crossTank entries in the form of an XML file check in the file in Across and remove the superfluous translations manually in crossDesk When selecting the languages be sure to select an exact language combination with language and sublanguage both for the source language and for the target language Apart from the XML file a document settings template DST file is automatically generated and saved to the storage location of the XML file By means of the corresponding button you can import this template under gt gt Tools gt gt System Settings gt gt Document Settings gt gt Visual XML and subsequently check in the XML file on the basis of this template In crossDesk the multiple translations for every source segment are displayed in the crossTank window allowing you to systematically decide which translations to keep and which not by deleting redundant translations by clicking the icon in the Fuzzy Search toolbar User Manual Across Step by Step 167 Deletion Deletion 5 cross lank cross lank Maintenance 5 4 4 Deleting Duplicates 5 4 4 1 Removing Sentence Duplicates The Remove sentence duplicates action deletes all the duplicates existing in crossTank Apart from normal sentence duplicates the action also deletes sentence duplicates which mer
185. e successfully assigned the following task s to user Matt Jefferson Fact sheet_Across features Across features_EN docx German Germany 1 Document The task s state is unconfirmed until the user Matt Jefferson has confirmed or rejected it _ Do not show this dialog again Continue assigning tasks until all of the tasks in the project have been assigned The project creation has now been completed The users who have been assigned tasks will find corresponding tasks inthe My Tasks module in crossBoard As soon as they confirm the task they can begin working on it The project manager in charge of the project is notified as soon as a task has been confirmed or rejected User Manual Across Step by Step 50 3 Project Management with Across Multiple Task Assignment 3 2 Multiple Task Assignment 0 Projects with multiple documents and or languages naturally also comprise many tasks all ve of which must be assigned The Multi Assignment Wizard facilitates the quick and efficient Assignment assignment of multiple tasks ready steady go 1 Click the module bar on the left and then gt gt Projects gt gt Tasks to switch to the Tasks module Tasks module 2 Click Multi Assignment to start the Multi Assignment Wizard y Across Language Server v6 0 59795_en Sonja Wagner Tasks oa File View Tools Help 6 EGE a ae amp crossBoard Tasks ze a E GA Fy Project Document Assigned to St
186. eables formatting or tags If possible this one stored segment is auto adjusted if for example a segment that contains the same text but different numbers needs to be translated so that a 100 match is also available in this case Due to handling or program errors crossTank may contain several segments duplicates that only differ in terms of the date time or number formats or placeables formatting or tags If there are tags in the segments both such segments that only have different tag names and segments whose attributes or attribute values are different are removed The following examples demonstrate the properties of this special type of duplicates e Example 1 Duplicates with redundant numbers Segment 1 Bolt 4 5 x 60 mm Segment 2 Bolt 5 0 x 60 mm Normally only one crossTank segment would exist Across would automatically change the contained numbers if necessary e Example 2 Duplicates with redundant tags Segment 1 This is a lt b gt test lt b gt Segment 2 This is a lt i gt test lt i gt Normally only one crossTank segment would exist Across would automatically adjust the contained tags if necessary User Manual Across Step by Step 170 5 cross lank cross lank Maintenance 5 4 5 Support Action Count Sentence Duplicates The Count sentence duplicates action determines the number of sentence duplicates existing in crossTank These are duplicate or multiple identical segments Normally and
187. earch Terminolog p Organize v New folder S in i Local Disk C Name Date modified Type Bi_Test db Congree Demo Data dJi inetpub dE Install MSOCache di PerfLogs Program Files id Program Files x86 G5 Across_en de csv 4 24 20149 16 AM Microsoft Excel C ProgramData ab Projects dJ sources d temp m Terminology Ji TMx T 5 File name Across_en de csv v All CSV Files txt csv v 6 Select the mode with which you want to import the terminology file You can run the import with or without user interaction al crossTerm Import Wizard Select file to impot Select file to import C Terminology Across_en de csv Select import mode Import with user interaction C Import without user interaction all questionable entries will be stored to a TMX TBX file L Create import log lt Back Next gt Cancel Help Import mode In the mode without user interaction all ambiguous terminology entries that would require interaction e g when importing homographs are saved to a separate I BX file These terminology entries can later be imported en bloc This mode is especially recommended for extensive terminology imports To run the import without user User Manual Across Step by Step 183 6 crossTerm Importing Terminology interaction select this mode and click Browse Enter a name and a location for the separate TBX file and click Save Log file 7 Anew option enables you to determ
188. earch for similar sentences in crossTank TA EAE EEA GES Localizing Software with Across g crossTank Concordance Search amp Lokalisierung von Software Obe Subjects Web sites Flyers General Projects Fact sheet_Lc 100 crossSearch 10 Each paragraph has an editing state After confirming the review task the paragraphs normally have the editing state translated 5 Your task is to check the document and set the reviewed paragraphs to the editing state reviewed 2 This can be done with the corresponding icon in the crossWeb toolbar or via a context menu command in the Context View 11 Set the first paragraph to reviewed The icon will change from E to T You can delegate a paragraph back to the translator for revision by setting it to the _ editing state touched E 12 Now you can continue with the next paragraph To do this click the respective paragraph In this way the paragraph is marked and can be processed The editing states do not need to be assigned one by one for all paragraphs you can also assign the editing states en bloc for the entire document This can be done by means of the Mark All Paragraphs as Reviewed item in the context menu User Manual Across Step by Step 262 8 crossWeb for Browser Based Work with Across Reviewing Translations with crossWeb 13 14 15 For quick navigation in the entire document use the crossView in the left pane To make the work as easy as
189. ease note that you need to have the appropriate rights in order to edit or create templates By default the project manager is designated for this type of task gt Follow the instructions below if you would like to create a new style template Follow the instructions starting on page 78 to edit an existing template 3 6 1 Creating a New Template 1 Inthe module bar on the left go to the Styles module by clicking gt gt Projects gt gt Styles and select the project and then the document for which you Styles module would like to create a new style y Across Language Server v6 0 59795_en Sonja Wagner Styles E EA a EG Pare g gt Styles ax Pal E 8 Project ID Name Relation Progress Finish Description Projects All A E2 Display texts 0 0 of 63 words 4 25 2014 nes m Display texts as 3 Fact sheet_Locali Marketing 0 0 of 394 words 5 1 2014 H crossWash_v4 dixml Ba 4 E Bm Fact sheet_Across features Across features_EN docx Cockpit G L Style Templates Languages fj Fact sheet_Localization 1 0 Software localization with Across_ crossBoard Fact sheet_Acros Marketing 0 0 of 1656 words 5 1 2014 Description of Across feat Projects Properties Name Language Progress Deadline Description Tasks Across features _E E amp JEnglish ve 0 0 of 1656 words 5 1 2014 Quality Management Styles a Administration lt gt Ready C
190. ectors SacrossAnalytics crossAnalytics se crossAnalytics Administration crossAPI S crossAPI crossAPI A Gonmei A crossConnect crossConnect crossConn 2 crossTerm Web read only anonymous SacrossTerm Web read only anonymous crossTerm Web with read only anonymous access s See na S crossTerm Web read write crossTerm Web with read write access AE Vict Seca Chet Memes piso Supply Chain Managers Linguistic Supply Chain Managers s Project Managers Project Managers Project Managers Ma Reviewers Sa Reviewers Reviewers amp Supervisors a Supervisors Supervisors amp Terminologists S Terminologists Terminologists s Translators KA Translators Translators a Groups New Properties Delete AA 7 Name PM Lastlogin Login state E mail wo Sonja Wagner hs 4417 2014 10 2 Online sonja wagner example com Profiles wo Default Supervisor tae 4 11 2014 1 45 10 Offfine Relations Languages Add R Prop Message d E m Ennis l gt Ready CAP NUM SCRL 2 In order to create a new grou the Group Wizard 3 Once the wizard has started y Group Wizard Administer user groups p click New click Next gt Use the Group Wizard to define the individual rights and profiles that have been established for a group of users The User Wizard allows you to assign each user to one or more groups _ Do not show this info again ES _ 4 Enter a name for the group and if desired add a description Select a standard group
191. ects B Eg File View Tools Help O EG eas f2OEat crossBoard Prajecis na A ma ka 8 Name Language Progress Status Deadline Description Projects All Across teatures_E 0 0 of 1660 words Oof language 5 1 2014 Q je About Across HF Display texts fm Fact sheet_Across features 5 Across features_EN docx Cockpit English Vereinigte Staz French France German Germany fiey Fact sheet_Localization Add Document Properties Delete Update Check Out Partition Language Attachments Language Assigned users Progress Deadline oS el 0 0 of 830 words 5 1 2014 ES Document translati Claire Dutreil 0 0 of 830 words 4 29 2014 e 0 0 of 830 words 5 1 2014 Quality ES Document translati Sonja Wagner 84 698 of 830 words 4 29 2014 Management Styles New D Proper Administration lt gt Ready CAP NUM SCRL Ei 2 Click Update below the project window on the upper right to start the Update Wizard Update Wizard As soon as you have selected a document or project you would like to update you can also use the ea icon in the toolbar to run the Update Wizard 3 Once the wizard has started click Next gt fy Update Wizard n ES Update translations i If the source document is changed or parts of it have been translated the Update Wizard indicates which parts of the source and target documents are
192. ects Wizard 87 Font Download Wizard 250 GLO files import 145 Group Wizard 20 groups create 21 GRU file create 104 GWU file create 93 import 99 import GLO format 145 TMX format 145 translation memory 145 285 11 Index TTX format 145 Import cross Tank Term Packages Wizard 112 Import Projects Wizard 89 Import Export WAN classic Tasks Wizard 107 incorporating data from third party systems terminology from Star TermStar 282 terminology from Trados MultiTerm 278 translation memories from Passolo 277 translation memories from Star Transit 276 translation memories from Trados Workbench 275 linked objects 47 Multi Assignment Wizard 51 Multi Document Workflow Change Wizard 54 objects embedded 47 linked 47 Partition Wizard 264 Profile Wizard 27 project management 40 Project Wizard 40 projects archiving 87 exporting 87 exporting to files 87 importing 89 importing from files 89 QM Criteria List Wizard 34 Relation Wizard 30 Report Wizard 56 Retrieve Task Wizard 243 sentence boundary 127 single sign on 15 softkeys create 37 specialized vocabulary 172 Split multi value attributes in crossTank entries 166 Star Martif 206 step by step instructions adding fonts 250 alignment 136 archiving projects 86 changing the workflow of multiple documents 54 check out documents 258 checking out documents 82 correcting translations 123 create user with Windows authentication 15 U
193. ects iad i Open Confirm reject 394 words Sonja Wagner Administration Ready CAP NUM SCRL 3 Click Confirm in the following dialog box to accept the task Click Show content if you wish to see a preview of the source document To close the preview click the menu item gt gt File gt gt Close task or the X icon in the toolbar User Manual Across Step by Step 124 Commenting on rejection J Correction task 4 Translating and Correcting Documents in Across Correcting Translations y Task Confirmation Ep Task is unconfirmed Do you wish to confirm or reject it Task information Task name Document correction Project Fact sheet_Localization 3 Sonja Wagner 50 characters per line including spaces Marketing Software localization with Across_EN docx English Vereinigte Staaten Target language German Germany Creation Date 4 17 2014 Start Date 5 1 2014 Deadline 5 1 2014 2 08 31 PM Document information 1 General Description Software localization with Across_EN docx Subject Flyer Format Word 2007 2013 V Creation Date 4 17 2014 p ae Swe When assigned packages are rejected the rejection can be commented in a dialog window In the lower pane of the My Tasks module click Open to open the correction task You can also confirm and open the task via gt gt File gt gt Open task To do this select the desired task from the list of tasks that have been assigned to you and click OK th
194. ed Dictionary Search Center Concordance Search Description Customize Tagged XML Settings i a 2 j Concordance Search Add Edt Delete Load Stopwords Term Extraction Name Type Content Mode Document Settings NET resources Display text Document Associations Excel 2000 2003 Excel 2007 2013 IDML MIF7 MIF 8 11 PowerPoint 2000 2003 PowerPoint 2007 2013 QuickSilver Tagged HTML Tagged SGML Tagged XML v2 Visual XML Windows Resources Word 2000 2003 Word 2007 2013 gt XLIFF Configure v Ca He 2 To customize the processing of XML elements these elements must first be inserted in the template Usually the easiest way to do this is to import the document or the DTD in the document settings template by means of the Load button In this way all elements contained in the document are written to the document settings template for quick and easy customizing Now select the external element for which you want to define conditions Conditions can only be defined for external elements Customize Tagged XML Settings Mame Type Content Mode Extemal Normal doc P Eemal Normal User Manual Across Step by Step 70 3 Project Management with Across Creating and Customizing Document Settings Templates External elements are located outside the body text never within a text line Usually D they cause a line break In contrast inline
195. ed already exists in crossTerm a dialog window will appear J Already existing entries EA iino e terms you want to insert New term s EI abbrechen cancel Add as new entry C Merge with existing entry Pasting entnes m Abbrechen ES Cancel ok s cons In the dialog window you can determine how the term to be imported is to be processed In principle you can first choose whether a new entry with the term to be imported should be created or whether the term should be added to an existing entry To create a new entry select a respective option and click OK To add the term to an existing entry select the respective option A list will display any existing entries terms Any additional data categories and information for an existing entry term e g definitions can be displayed by clicking Show info Select the entry to which you would like to add the term to be imported User Manual Across Step by Step 179 Log file 6 crossTerm Importing Terminology Determine what is to be done with the information available for the term Select one of the following four options Use new definitions and properties The definitions and properties of the term to be imported will be adopted and those of the existing term will be dropped Use existing definitions and properties The definitions and properties of the existing term will be adopted and those of the term to be imported will be drop
196. ed paragraphs are now marked as Updated Ss or New D Paragraphs whose inline objects placeables or tags have changed during a document update are flagged as Updated Editing states Paragraphs that have been added to the current document or whose text has changed Updated amp New during a document update are flagged as New 3 Now begin translating the source text in the usual way or continue with the translation Information on translating with Across is available in chapter 5 of the user manual gt Across at a Glance and in the step by step instructions starting on page 116 y Across Language Server v6 0 59795 _en Sonja Wagner crossDesk Document translation Across features_EN_update docx Fact sheet_Across features Marketi File View Tools Help OA EE BSE l amp OSES 8068 8688004rP RAHEL AAZARANAB crossView SX ies Qa Q crossTerm a x Tan P qQ EE PS V10 MS with the idiosyncrasies of the document format in konzentrieren und muss sich nicht mit den A E E W Across features_EN_update docx question Eigenheiten des jeweiligen Dokumentenformates E 1 Zieltext B Content besch ftigen Translator oO Translating with Across _ _ z z A ea a AN a EE aii Besides Besides the source and target texts the Neben dem Quell und Zieltext sieht der m 2 Ubersetzer fo B A P bersetzer d
197. eeees 280 10 4 3 Exporting Termbase Definition Fil cccccssscccsseeeeceneseeesaneeessaneseesenes 282 10 5 TERMINOLOGY FROM STAR TERMSTAR ccccccceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeseeeeeeeeesaeaaeees 282 11 MN GOX 25s tatacdensseeccein TE E E E E E 285 User Manual Across Step by Step Help 1 About This Documentation Introduction 1 About This Documentation In this chapter Introduction see below Icons page 5 Conventions page 6 Additional information page 6 Feedback page 6 Document versions page 7 1 1 Introduction This manual is mainly intended for users who want to get acquainted with the basic operations in Across in an easy way For this purpose this manual provides detailed step by step instructions that guide you through the various operations Please note that the step by step instructions demonstrate the operations on the basis of sample data As the documents you process may have different forms and contents the procedure may vary slightly This manual does not contain general information on using Across For general information please refer to the user manual Across at a Glance Countless cross references point to further information in this manual This documentation refers to all of the functions of the program even if one or more features may not be available in the product edition you have selected The respective sections are marked accordingly Instructions for installation are not i
198. efault Paragraph Font v Style Properties Name Y Font Style Adobe Fan Heiti Std B CETT m Adobe Gothic Std B 11 12 Batang 14 BatangChe 16 DFKai SB Details lt Back Cance Hep 8 If other fonts are used in the source document they will be listed under Additional fonts and can be replaced by other fonts Then click Next gt User Manual Across Step by Step 77 3 Project Management with Across Creating and Editing Styles y Style Wizard Adjust additional fonts Te Style Template Document LatinTemplate v Across features_EN docx Word 20 Y Additional fonts Substitute by Name Substituted by Anal Unicode MS TONE Adobe Fan Heiti Std B A Segoe UI ieaie Adobe Gothic Std B Segoe UI ec akan Segoe UI Segoe UI Batang BatangChe DFKai SB Dotum DotumChe FangSong Guim GulimChe Gungsuh GungsuhChe lt Back Cancel Help 9 Click Finish to create the new style J Style Wizard Final overview Te Review your source documents style templates and target languages Across features_EN docx Word 2007 2013 LatinTemplate 1 German Germany French France lt Back Cancel Help 10 The new style has now been created and has been assigned to the desired target document 3 6 2 Editing Existing Styles 1 Inthe module bar on the left go to the Styles module by clicking gt gt Projects gt gt Styles and select the p
199. elements are located within the body text for External vs inline example they may cause a certain word within a string to be displayed in bold type Usually elements always consist of a start tag e g lt i gt and an end tag e g lt i gt The following example shows a string with an external element lt p gt p for paragraph and an inline lt b gt element embracing the word boldface b for bola lt p gt This is lt b gt boldface lt b gt lt p gt The lt p gt and lt p gt tags are located outside the body text and mark the beginning and end of the string or paragraph The lt b gt and lt b gt tags however are located within the body text and mark the beginning and end of the bold text in this case the word boldface 3 Click Edit Select the element type External and the Conditional option Then click Settings in order to define the conditions y Element Properties General Attributes Formatting Name p Content type Nonmal _ CDATA i Empty Element type C Internal Normal Treat as white space Nonna Hidden L May corftain nlo code e g HTML na ed by CDATA a Conditional esca 4 Click Add Element Conditions Condition Value Order t Close 5 The element to be adapted is displayed in our case lt p gt Click Add attribute in order to define the first condition for the attribute translate User Manual Across Step
200. ely differ in terms of the date time or number format or placeables tags or formatting In addition translation duplicates are also removed that may be created during the deletion of sentence duplicates Definitions of the various duplicate types are available on page 170 Since the new action Remove sentence duplicates functionally covers both the action Delete duplicates with redundant date time and number format and the action Delete duplicates with redundant placeables tags or formatting these two actions have been removed from the crossTank Maintenance Wizard Generally segments and translation units are automatically adjusted or changed only when two crossTank options are enabled These are the option for auto changes for date time and number formats and the option for auto adjustment of placeables formatting and tags Both options are enabled by default You will find the options under gt gt Tools gt gt System Settings gt gt General gt gt crossTank The action Remove sentence duplicates is always performed for all segments entries in crossTank Therefore the selection of a language pair the definition of filters and the preview function are not available for this action The action Remove sentence duplicates makes distinction between upper and lower case spelling Thus the two sentences segments Danach Hohe neu einstellen and danach Hohe neu einstellen would not be treated as sentence duplicates
201. en click Confirm in the following dialog box y Across Language Server v6 0 59795_en Sonja Wagner My tasks E EN File View Tools Help O EO FEFAOQEAS crossBoard IE E ma T H Document translation Display texts crossWash_v4 dt E 0 63 63 4 25 2014 CELE a Document translation Fact sheet_Across Across features_E 0 828 825 5 1 2014 Dashboard Document correction Fact sheet_Localiz Software localizati 0 394 394 5 1 2014 o o My tasks Fact sheet_Localization English Vereinigte Staaten 3 E German Germany Software localization with Across_EN docx 5 1 2014 2 08 31 PM Document correction 5 1 2014 2 08 31 PM Projects ia j Open Show report 394 words Sonja Wagner Administration Ready CAP NUM SCRL 5 crossDesk opens displaying your correction task Here you can find all information relevant to the translation at a glance Source View and Target Editor displaying the source and target texts divided into paragraphs the document navigation toolbar crossView crossTerm with the authoritative terminology entries crossTank the translation memory containing all previously translated texts the concordance search for quickly finding words in crossTank and crossSearch for researching Internet or Intranet resources User Manual Across Step by Step 125 4 Translating and Correcting Documents in Across Correcting Translations Te crossDesk offers you three different crossDesk modes for displaying yo
202. en click Properties select the User rights tab andclick gt gt crossTerm gt gt Public filters filter sets to access the section of the filter rights Activate or deactivate the checkboxes to assign the filter to the corresponding user groups or revoke it Te To adapt a filter select it in the dialog window for the management of user defined filters li and filter sets and click Edit User Manual Across Step by Step 228 6 crossTerm Creating Filter Sets 6 4 Creating Filter Sets The following step by step instructions will help you to create crossTerm filter sets Bundling filters crossTerm filter sets which consist of several user defined crossTerm filters enable A complex search queries using several filters In the course of the configuration of the filter set the filters are aligned in the desired sequence During search queries on the basis of a filter set a cascading search is performed i e the filter with the highest priority is applied Cascading search first If the search is unsuccessful the search continues with the second filter and so on The crossTerm Filter Set Wizard assists you in creating filter sets Please note that you need to have the appropriate rights in order to create filter sets By default the supervisor and the project manager are responsible for creating filter sets General instructions on using filter sets are available in chapter 7 5 4 of the user manual gt Across at a Gla
203. ension Some content update Content update Some content update Some content update E gt Users module 2 Administering Across Creating Users 2 Administering Across In this chapter Creating users see below Creating users with Windows authentication page 15 Creating groups page 20 Creating profiles page 27 Creating new relations page 30 Creating QM lists page 34 Creating softkeys page 37 General information on administration in Across is available in chapter 3 of the user manual Across at a Glance 2 1 Creating Users The following step by step instructions will help you to easily understand how to create a new user in Across The User Wizard will help you to create a new user Please note that you need to have the appropriate rights in order to create a new user The default setting assumes that the supervisor is responsible for creating users The following step by step instructions describe how to create a user with Across Login see step 4 You can find more information on creating users with Windows authentication in the step by step instructions starting on page 15 General information on users in Across is available in chapter 3 2 of the user manual Across at a Glance 1 Use the module bar on the left to switch to the Users module via gt gt Administration gt gt Users User Manual Across Step by Step 8 2 Administering Across Creating Users y Across Lan
204. ently Add attribute in order to define the second condition for the attribute translate Element Conditions Condition Value Order t p transiate yes normal 1 Close XPath XML Path Language is a language used to address parts of an ML document It can be used to address specific nodes of these documents Further information on XPath is available at www w3 org TR xpath20 10 From the drop down list on the left select the desired attribute in this case the attribute translate and enter the value of the attribute in the right input field in this case no Then click OK fy Configure Attribute and its Value Ea Attribute Value fe is used as wid card for attributes and values co 11 From the drop down list select the desired processing and display mode in Across In this case select Locked as the element contents with the attribute value no are not to be translated However the contents are to be displayed to the translator Otherwise you could select Hidden In this case the contents would be invisible to the translator Click OK User Manual Across Step by Step 73 3 Project Management with Across Creating and Customizing Document Settings Templates Condition Properties 12 The second condition too is added and represented in the form of an XPath expression In this way both conditions have been defined Click Close and then OK Now the XML document can be che
205. enuunuteununrueeununrnenunarneennn 123 AS QUICK TRANSEA TE Saaai E AO EAE 131 5 Gross Ua i asana a 136 Dal ALIGNING TRANSLATIONS fetus nen a a a aa e aa a a ea 136 5 2 IMPORTING TRANSLATION MEMORIES cccsscceceseeeceseeeceseeceeseetsesceteneeeneeeerens 145 5 3 EXPORTING TRANSLATION MEMORIES cccsescccccessececesececeeneceeeeeseeetaeseeetseneess 156 5 4 GROSS TANK MAINTENANCE ansvicanoivionesae tsi oi ncaa Ga tons seaayaeisantenuaes 161 Ba CHANGING AUAOULCS sio8 seiestienietatecercattemictsadicsheddlonial cieueseidiecindaedacebanate 164 OAvica Changing AttriDUTES tc 5 ieet iene a Ea 164 5 4 1 2 Splitting Multi Value Attributes in crossTank Entries eeceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 166 5 4 2 Deleting cross lank Entries vs sisvcsncsisoxisaciatarciis sinetuntabiecistareiesiebbossuiards 166 5 4 3 Cleaning crossTank Entries with Multiple Translations 10cccccc00e00e 167 5 4 4 Deleting Duplicates ccccccsseccccnscseccnsenecccsaveeccnaesescnseussessacuessssansesens 168 5 4 4 1 Removing Sentence Duplicates ccccccccccecccceecseeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeesaaeeeess 168 5 4 4 2 Remove Sentence Duplicates by TeXt ccccccccccsseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeees 168 5 4 4 3 Removing Translation Duplicates cc ceecccseeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeseaeeeeaeneeeeaees 169 5 4 44 Duplicate Definitions 2isiecceexaccsctsiucsnaedvariectilenveceielensaniurenslebledvucsnuseectdulecuncees 170 5 4 5 Support
206. er Manual Across Step by Step 232 6 crossTerm Creating User Defined Layouts y crossTerm Layout Wizard Ea Define layout entry properties ial gocececccceccecccceccesesoccccccseccecosoccccceseoceccesecceccscesccccssesecccsssceccesesseg Recsscccossccscensccscoeccsccsssecsccecossestrensescsonacosecsscoccocescecescnensocnscoeeed C Show only the following data categones at entry level Property Use in layout Image E Subjects C Note Definition Relations Projects Beck cma He 6 Now the data categories at term level to be displayed in the new layout are to be selected Basically all data categories will be displayed that are defined in the cross Term settings at term level Data categories at term level are data categories related to the terms e g term type grammatical gender grammatical number or collocation Here too determine whether all data categories available in the respective cross Term instance are to be displayed in the new layout or whether the new layout is to contain only certain data categories In the latter case activate the corresponding option and select the data categories to be displayed by check marking them Click Next gt fy crossTerm Layout Wizard Ea Define layout term properties r ceccsccccecccccccoccccoccccessececccseccecccseccecccsececcessocecceseccecccseccecesseseeg Recsscscossccscessccscoecanscsssveccccasossestrensoscsseacoscsssscscsc
207. ercent B The folowing document formi 2 Office appications Text pro Select Partition Type Microsoft Word DOC DO o i 2 Microsoft Excel XLS fies a O Two partitions equal cl paa ae OPP Anewa O Two partitions 1 3 and 2 3 Four partitions equal S Text fles TXT files Two partitions 2 3 and 1 3 Five partitions equal TeX TEX files The erosaTerm Terminoloay Svstem Y lt gt Other manual partition cc cores Hep 5 Click Finish to confirm the selected partitioning User Manual Across Step by Step 265 Partitioning Documents Partitioning document 9 Special Workflows and Tasks Partition Wizard Across features_EN docx First paragraph Lastparagraph Words Percent am ae o o Add Content Content 0 0 A 2 E Aoh oan Translating with Picture 1 238 29 S The crossDesk multiformat editoi at i lt Remove The crossTerm Different state 461 56 The translator s main work e1 3 R sidan a 129 18 y idea ho subce ana kai ocaiizing Displ y Virtually The spell check text length Arecord of the editing state i B The following document form E Office applications Text pro Select Partition Type Microsoft Word DOC DO S Microsoft Excel XLS files a Q Two partitions equal Three partitions equal Microsoft PowerPoint PPT M a O m Two p
208. es in the form of GWU files continue with step 4 2 Click Update list under the bottom right pane Across will check whether any packages have been delegated to your Across Server Any delegated packages will be listed in the bottom right pane Received packages Package ID Name Master Server Status Download d Finish date Last upload E Translation Unit E Across Systems GmbH Not downloa 00 00 00 00 By default all Master Servers are queried for delegated tasks when the list is updated Due to extended response times this process can take some time especially if there are several Master Servers Therefore you can limit the query and display to a specific Master Server by means of the tree view To do this select a Server from the tree view y Across Language Server v6 0 60019_en Default Supervisor crossGrid gt i ER File View Tools Help O BG FF BAe A crossGrid ax e Delegated packages s 3 58 Al Package ID Name Trusted Server Download date Last upload Status Progress Finish date Projects fa GE Trusted B zik Vie crossBoard Projects Quality Create Build Delete Report Properties crossGnd classic OUT crossGnd classic IN Received packages Package ID Name Master Server Status Download d Finish date Last upload Progress fl Translation Unit E Across Systems GmbH Not downloa 00 00 00 00 0 of 0 task s finis crossGrid gt g g Update ist Delete Properties
209. es will be again transferred to crossTank Then click OK J Finish task Ea All paragraphs of the following task have reached a final state Project lt TEMPORARY PROJECT gt Document Software localization with Across_EN docx __ Source language English Vereinigte Staaten Target language German Germany Task Document translation QM check summary Mandatory Criterion 7 Errors Ignored Spel check 57 0 Identical punctuation check 4 0 Bounding spaces check 2 0 Consistent capitalization 2 0 First capitalization 10 0 What would you like to do Store Finished Translations to crossTank Continue the task Remind again after 1 minute User Manual Across Step by Step 133 4 Translating and Correcting Documents in Across Quick Translate 7 If you have selected the option Store finished translations to cross Tank a dialog box for storing the translations to crossTank appears You can choose that for each translation unit you would like to save a window will appear for checking and if necessary correcting the units that this dialog should only be shown if there is a different number of source and target sentences or that this dialog should never be shown Select the desired option and click Store 8 Once the saving has been completed click Finish y Store Finished Translations to crossTank Software localizati Ex Show match making dialog for each paragraph C Never show
210. escecsoseanssesscoe C Show only the following data categories at term level Property Use in layout A Tem type Part of speech L_ Grammatical gender Grammatical number Degree of synonymy Stockkeeping unit Part number Collocation Set phrase Usage note v Beck cma He 7 Now you can specify which administrative information is be displayed in the new layout Administrative information is information that is automatically assigned or entered while creating or editing an entry a term or an index value This includes the entry ID the creation and modification date of the entry term or index value and the information on the Across user who created or modified the entry term or index value The selection of administrative information takes place separately for information at entry level and at term level on the one hand and separately for each index on the other both for entries and for terms and for indexes you can for example determine whether the creation date of the respective entry and or term and or index value is to be displayed Activate the respective checkboxes to select the information to be displayed in the new layout The administrative information for an index can only be selected only then if the corresponding index was selected in step 5 User Manual Across Step by Step 233 6 crossTerm Creating User Defined Lay
211. esoecssseseccessssosssses Or a a a A Edit an existing original style template for use by your target document ceee weas canes Hep 6 The new style appears To change the name of the style click the style that is displayed in blue and enter a new name User Manual Across Step by Step 76 3 Project Management with Across Creating and Editing Styles If you would like to make changes to the style settings activate the option Edit an existing original style for use by your target document If you only want to create a new style and do not want to edit style settings continue with step 9 iy Style Wizard EA Overview of created style templates Te Style Templates and Assigned Languages LatinTemplate German French Edit advanced style settings lt Back Cane Hep 7 Under Style or Document you can select the style or document for which you would like to make changes Under Style properties all the fonts that are contained in the style are listed Select the style properties that you would like to edit and make the desired changes under Font Font style and or Size Use Details to edit other settings such as the font color Once you have made all the settings click Next gt iy Style Wizard Ea Adjust document style properties Te Style Template Fix fonts not to be substituted LatinTempilate v Document Style Across features_EN docx Word 2007 2013 D
212. ess Projects Comments Relation ID 4 pemon nane Web Creation date 4 17 2014 ox cance 5 Youcan enter the master data of the contact s in the Primary contact and Secondary contact tabs gy Relation properties EJ Main Primary contact Secondary contact Address Projects Comments Firstname Elaine Department Phone 1 Phone 2 Fax E mail ok Canca 6 You can enter the address of the relation in the Address tab 3 Relation properties Ez Main Primary contact Secondary contact Address Projects Comments Address 1 ABC Street Address 2 Zip postal code 12345 City XYZ City Country v User Manual Across Step by Step 32 2 Administering Across Creating Relations 7 Inthe Projects tab you can use the drop down list to select a project manager that is always suggested as the manager of the particular relation s project In All Customer Projects the projects that have been set up for this relation will be listed once you begin setting up projects g Relation properties Ea Main Primary contact Secondary contact Address Projects Comments Primary project manager Sonja Wagner Associated projects Projects Description ox Canc 8 Inthe Comments tab click Add to add customer related comments Click Edit to view and edit comments or Delete to delete comments 9 Click OK to finish creating the new relation The new relation appears in t
213. et_Across features e Across features_EN_update Cockpit fie Fact sheet_Localization Projects 2 Add Document Properties Delete Check Out Partition o o Language Attachments Tasks F Language Assigned users Progress Deadline A B 0 0 of 831 words 5 1 2014 ES Document translati Claire Dutreil 0 0 of 831 words 4 29 2014 0 0 of 831 words 5 1 2014 Quality ES Document translati Sonja Wagner 69 579 of 831 words 4 29 2014 Management Styles New Delete Properties Preview Pre Transiation SN Administration lt gt Ready CAP NUM SCRL In the default setting the translator of the old document is automatically selected for translating the updated document If you would like to assign the translation of the updated document to another translator switch to the Tasks module and carry out the new assignment Information on assigning tasks is available in chapter 4 4 4 of the user manual Across at a Glance and in the step by step instructions on creating projects starting on page 27 12 Across sets up a separate new version of each updated document To view existing versions of a document select the document in the Projects module click Properties and switch to the Versions tab Click Report to view a report that shows the differences from the previous version fy Document properties Ea Document Status Comments Versions Attachments Version Creation File
214. f the analysis process click Next gt be Alignment Wizard 100 Text pair alignment then Checking Software localization with Across_EN docx Opening document C Word files Software localization with Across_EN docx Checking Software localization with Across_DE docx Opening document C Word files Software localization with Across _DE docx lt Back Help 10 For the alignment of the matching segments in the source and target documents Across uses an algorithm y Alignment Wizard Text pair alignment in Select document matching algorithm By structure only By structure and content The document matching algorithm affects the way in which different parts of two documents are compared Along with the text structure companson by structure and content also considers text features such as numbers abbreviations formatting etc It is more inteligent but slower than the companson by structure lt Back Next gt Cancel Help User Manual Across Step by Step 140 5 crossTank Aligning Translations Select the algorithm to be used e Comparison by structure only is the fastest algorithm however it only takes the structure of the document e g the number of paragraphs in the source and target document into consideration e The comparison By structure and content takes both the text s
215. f the blue connecting line Joining paragraphs To connect two paragraphs keep the left mouse button pressed and draw a line from the end point of one paragraph to the end point of the other If the matching within a pair of paragraphs is correct meaning that each sentence within a source text paragraph could be matched to a sentence in the target text paragraph the paragraphs are marked by two green dots that are connected by a blue line E However if the matching between a pair of paragraphs for example if the number of sentences in the source and target paragraphs is unequal could not be carried out User Manual Across Step by Step 142 5 crossTank Aligning Translations correctly the green dots on the paragraphs in question are marked with a red border C Please note that for these paragraph pairs the contained translation units will not be transmitted to crossTank Therefore you need to correct the matching within these paragraph pairs manually in order to make sure that the contained translation units will be transmitted to crossTank Editing the To edit the matching within a pair of paragraphs select the respective paragraphs and matching within click Match sentences paragraphs Subsequently select the first two matching sentences from the upper two panes e g one source language sentence and the matching target language sentence and click Add match Click Join all to join all sentences of the sentence pai
216. fied First the CSV columns are assigned to the languages and any regional variants sublanguages In the Across Language column click the row you would like to map A drop down list appears from which you can select an associated language in our case German since in our example the first column contains the German source language terms Finally you can select a sublanguage Germany in our example Continue until all the columns have been mapped Then click Next gt E crossTerm Import Wizard EJ Assign languages A Please assign language to next column CSV fiekis Across language Sublanguage B Deutsch German v Germany v Englisch English v Vereinigte Staaten vi lt tack cmoa He 17 In the next step all other columns of the CSV file will be mapped to the corresponding Across data categories the column with the gender of the German terms in our example Continue until all the columns have been mapped to the appropriate categories in Across Columns that are not mapped to any Across data category will not be imported Click crossTerm Settings to open the crossTerm settings and if necessary create a data category in Across Then click Next gt User Manual Across Step by Step 187 6 crossTerm Importing Terminology E crossTerm Import Wizard Map data categories q The CSV file contains data categories Please specify to which Across data categones the CSV data categones should be mapped If a corresp
217. fonts Substitute by Name Substituted by Anal Unicode MS Fan Heiti Std B A Segoe UI Segoe UI Adobe Adobe Gothic Std B Anal Unicode MS Segoe UI Segoe UI Batang BatangChe DFKai SB Dotum DotumChe FangSong Guim GuimChe Gungsuh GungsuhChe v lt Back cancel _ He 8 Click Finish to save the changes to the style and return to the Styles module 3 Finishing Projects The following step by step instructions will help you follow how projects are finished in Across The documents that have been worked on as part of the project are checked out meaning that they are converted back to their original format Once this has been done the project can be moved to the archive To finish projects with Across refer to the interactive tutorial Finishing and Archiving a Project in Across in the video library on the Across website at http www across net en knowledge base video library Please note that you need to have the appropriate rights in order to check out documents and archive projects The default setting assumes that the project manager is responsible for finishing projects User Manual Across Step by Step 81 3 Project Management with Across Finishing Projects After checking out a document and especially before publishing or forwarding the checked out document we recommend reviewing the document and checking the correctness of any translations auto inserted by the pre translation
218. format for which you want to customize the document settings template Tagged XML in our example Finally go to the drop down list and select the template you wish to customize User Manual Across Step by Step 66 3 Project Management with Across Creating and Customizing Document Settings Templates J System Settings Server Tagged XML New Delete Import Export i Reporting A Document settings template Segmentation Diner menu y Structure Attributes Subjects System Attributes User defined Dictionary rch Center Concordance Search Fuzzy Search Terminology Concordance Search Add Stopwords Tem Extraction Document Settings NET resources Display text Document Associations Excel 2000 2003 Excel 2007 2013 IDML MIF 7 MIF 8 11 PowerPoint 2000 2003 PowerPoint 2007 2013 QuickSilver Tagged HTML Tagged SGML Tagged XML v2 Visual XML Windows Resources Word 2000 2003 Word 2007 2013 XLIFF Configure v Cose Help 2 To customize the processing of XML elements these elements must first be inserted in the template Usually the easiest way to do this is to import the document or the DTD in the document settings template by means of the Load button In this way all elements contained in the document are written to the document settings template for quick and easy customizing Description ie Wg i ULL TUNNEL 000 00E OME Customize Tagged XML Settings m g T D 2 Name Type
219. g paragraph 31 of 31 Document structure extracted Document post processing lt Back 9 The result of the comparison of the old and new versions is displayed The number of changes in already translated as well as in not yet translated paragraphs is displayed as well When you update several documents you can use the drop down list to display the analysis of a certain document or the overall analysis of all documents y Update Wizard 0 EER Update translations rej Across features_EN docx v Paragraph Changes Paragraph type Number A Spit 0 Merged 0 Deleted 0 Created 1 y lt gt Translators Effects Translator Target Language Translated changes Untranslated changes Sonja Wagner German Germany 0 0 Claire Dutrea French France 0 0 lt back cance He 10 Click Finish to finish updating the document s 11 The updated documeni s appear s in the Projects module The translator can now begin translating the updated version User Manual Across Step by Step 271 9 Special Workflows and Tasks Updating Documents fy Across Language Server v6 0 59795_en Default Supervisor Projects B Eg File View Tools Help ER e EE as crossBoard ee S he ee A Name Language Progress Status Deadline Description Projects All JA W Across features_E 0 0 of 1662 words 0of2 language 5 1 2014 Q F E About Across fe Display texts ia Fact she
220. ghts in order to partition documents The default setting assumes that the project manager is responsible for partitioning projects Please also note that you need to partition the document before it is assigned to the particular users If there are any assigned tasks you therefore need to unassign them before you partition the document s Please note that unassigning tasks may cause data loss 1 Inthe module bar on the left go to the Projects module click gt gt Projects gt gt Projects and select the project and the document you would like to partition fy Across Language Server v6 0 59795_en Sonja Wagner Projects B ER File View Tools Help 8 EG edenes Projects a x i he GA FY Name Language Progress Status Deadline Description All Q M Across features_E 0 0 of 1656 words 0 of 2 language 5 1 2014 crossBoard Projects Q fim About Across H Display texts Fact sheet_Across features W Across features_EN docx Cockpit H Fact sheet_Localization Add Document Properties Delete Update Check Out Partition Language Assigned users Progress Deadline A B 0 0 of 828 words 5 1 2014 oi 0 0 of 828 words 5 1 2014 Quality Management Styles Administration Ready CAP NUM SCRL 2 Click Partition below the project view on the upper right to start the Partition Wizard for partitioning documents User Manual Across Step by Step 264 9 S
221. gnment Wizard w g using the menu item gt gt File gt gt Alignment Subsequently select the option Load stored alignment and select the desired intermediate state Click Next gt and in the following dialog click Manual corrections The desired intermediate state will be opened 1 Start the Alignment Wizard by selecting menu item gt gt File gt gt Alignment 2 Once the wizard has started click Next gt User Manual Across Step by Step 136 5 crossTank Aligning Translations y Alignment Wizard H O aT m Text pair alignment Use the Alignment Wizard to import text pairs that have already been translated During this process Across carries out an alignment in which segments in the source and target document that correspond to each other are paired up and transferred to crossTank When changes are made to the source document translations can be updated easily by using the Update Wizard _ Do not show this info again 3 First select the document pair you want to align To do this select New document on both sides if the documents are available as files outside Across e g on the local hard disk Select From Across database if the document s have already been checked in to Across To add a target document to a source document that has already been checked in simply select the target document 19 y Alignment Wizard OR a Text pair alignment S J Select first
222. gories Click Next gt a crossTerm Import Wizard Select import file format r ee a terminology saved in Comma Separated Values format fsi MultTerm Imports terminology exported from Trados MuitiTerm Star Martit Imports terminology from a Star Marti file Imports terminology from a TermBase eXchange TBX file Use template no template Browse lt Back Cancel Help 4 First select the TBX file you want to import To do this click Browse User Manual Across Step by Step 173 6 crossTerm Importing Terminology E crossTerm Import Wizard ES Select file to import q Select file to import Select import mode Import with user interaction C Import without user interaction all questionable entries will be stored to a TMX TBX file _ Create import log lt Back Cancel Help 5 Select the file you want to import and click Open of Open EZ Tt m gt Computer gt Local Disk C gt Terminology v Search Terminolog p Organize v New folder ey in be Congree Name Date modified Type d Demo Data B inetpub J Install MSOCache ab PerfLogs B Program Files d Program Files x86 ProgramData P Projects _ AcrossTermCollection tbx 1 11 2011 4 39 PM TBX File Ji sources di temp m Terminology J TMX d Users ob Windows as v lt gt File name AcrossTermCollection tbx v TBX Files tbx xml tbx xml v 6 Subsequently select the mode with which you
223. gt Project Wizard Settings gt gt Define source language settings you can determine the source language via Auto detect Set the target languages of the project To do this select one or several target languages from the list of Available languages on the left hand side and add them to the right hand side e g with a double click Then adjust the planned deadline if necessary y Project Wizard Ez Document languages a Source Language English v Vereinigte Staaten v Available languages Target Languages Deadiine date Deadline time ES Engish ga ceman 5 1 2014 15 20 E German P Li French 5 1 2014 15 20 Li French ES Dutch gt gt Ei taian cm Spanish Germany v lt aack cance Cr In addition to the source and target language you can also set corresponding sublanguages Select a sublanguage for the source language by selecting the desired sublanguage in the drop down list to the right of the source language To set the sublanguage of a target language select the corresponding target language and use the drop down list below the target language area to set the desired sublanguage User Manual Across Step by Step 44 3 Project Management with Across Creating Projects Te Apart from the country specific sublanguages e g Germany Switzerland Austria etc li for German you can also select the sublanguages uncorrected and simplified The first can be used specifically for document correction workflows e g
224. gte Staaten German Germany German Germany lt Back cance af Help 9 Ifthe file you want to import contains translation units consisting of more than one sentence in the source segment and or target segment the following dialog is displayed User Manual Across Step by Step 149 5 cross Tank Importing Translation Memories crossTank Import Wizard EA Sentence alignment settings aE The selected file contains ambiguous translation units Please specify below how you want to proceed Import fle summary 78 translation units with one source and one target sentence 0 translation units with N source sentences and N target sentences N gt 1 2 translation units with N source sentences and M target sentences N lt gt M 80 translation units in total _poceaacescnscsnsecsscees ssenassocsosecsoescnsensseesoncesovenssessssssesscsonensseonsecceseasveccsonsoseecs oaan m a _ Import translation units with sentence segmentation Units with n source and n target sentences Units with a different number of source and n gt 1 target sentences Assume perfect match Show manual correction dialog Show manual correction dialog Merge to one segment Merge to one segment Discard Discard cma neas cane He If the dialog is not displayed continue with step 11 You can determine whether the translation units containing more than one sentence are to be imported as a single segment without segmentation o
225. guage Server v6 0 59795_en Sonja Wagner Users E ES File View Tools Help GGF a aS gt crossBoard be 7x ae amp 7 e v Name PM Last login Login state E mail Bie a 8 Christian Ziegler Sonja Wagner 417 201 Online sonja wagner example com H Administration 5 i Default Supervisor pi Matt Jefferson n a gt Offiine matt jefferson example com p Di Denis Girardin i Helen Parker lt n a gt Offline helen parker example com i amp Helen Parker amp Denis Girardin lt n a gt Offiine denis girardin example com oi Matt Jefferson amp Default Supervisor 41120141 Offine 2 Sonja Wagner amp Christian Ziegler lt nla gt Offine christian ziegler example com Users Groups New Properties Delete Calendar Message Send E mail amp a4 amp Source Lan Target Language Subject Rating Profiles N Propert Des Languages FF ae i C omeny FA 2 Click New below the pane on the upper right to start the User Wizard which will help User Wizard you create a new user You can also run the User Wizard without being in the Users module To do this click the AA icon in the wizard toolbar 3 Once the wizard has started click Next gt 3 User Wizard E Administer employees team members AA Use the User Wizard to set up new team members and enter their contact and access data group memberships and profiles You can ch
226. h Remove match Join all Save matches Cancel Help 13 Once the task has been finished the project manager receives a notification about the completion of the task Now that the task has been finished it will no longer appear in list of pending tasks in the My Tasks module By default the My Tasks module shows only tasks that are not yet finished To display and open finished tasks click the icon in the header of the Status column to select Finished Thus all tasks that you have already finished will be displayed Select a task and click Open The task will be opened in read only mode 4 2 Correcting Translations The following step by step instructions will show you in a simple way how you would typically make corrections with Across Further information on proofreading translations in Across is available in the interactive tutorial Proofreading a Translation in crossDesk in the video library on the Across website at http Awww across net en knowledge base video library Please note that the following example has been condensed and simplified in order to provide an initial impression of how correcting translations works in Across 1 Use the module bar on the left to switch to the My Tasks module via gt gt crossBoard gt gt My Tasks My Tasks User Manual Across Step by Step 123 4 Translating and Correcting Documents in Across Correcting Translations y Across Language Server v6 0 59795
227. has priority over the operator or Groupings Like logical operators groupings can also be used to link criteria Select two or more criteria and select Group from the context menu Tem Subjects Newsletter land Entry Created by Helen Parker Entry Last modified by Helen Parker Add term count Group amp ka p S A anunn Ungroup Remove The grouping is displayed in the form of square brackets comprising the grouped criteria Entry Created by egual to Helen Parker Entry Last modified by equal to Helen Parker Further information and examples on using the logical operators and groupings is available in the respective chapter of the user manual Across at a Glance 7 Click Finish to create the user defined filter It is now available in the respective drop down list and can be used for performing searches in crossTerm By default a newly created public filter is available to all user groups The use of each public filter is controlled by means of a respective right in the user group rights In this way the filter will be available to the users of the assigned groups for search queries The rights can be assigned or revoked in the Public filters filter sets subsection of the crossTerm section of the user group rights Go to the Groups module via gt gt Administration gt gt Groups and select the group to which you want to assign or from which you want to revoke the new filter Th
228. hat are not contained in the MultiTerm or XDT file to be imported these data categories will not be offered for mapping during the import process and will not be imported or created in crossTerm Click Next gt a crossTerm Import Wizard Select import file format q Format Description csv Imports terminology saved in Comma Separated Values format X MultiTerm Imports terminology exported from Trados MultiTerm A Star Martf Imports terminology from a Star Martif file TBX TEX Imports terminology from a TermBase eXchange TBX file Use template no template Browse 7 Cancel Help 4 First select the file you want to import To do this click Browse User Manual Across Step by Step 196 Import mode 6 crossTerm Importing Terminology al crossTerm Import Wizard ES Select file to import q Select file to import o Select import mode Import with user interaction C Import without user interaction all questionable entries will be stored to a TMX TBX file Browse File with additional properties XDT Browse If there is different structure information in the XDT and XML file use the structure of the XDT file Information from the XML file that does not comply with this structure wal be lost C Create import log cme meas cmoa Hep 5 Select the file you want to import and click Open ol Open Tt d gt Computer gt Local Disk C gt Terminology v gt p Orga
229. he desired user s and click the gt button Click Finish to complete setting up the new user crowd User Manual Across Step by Step 26 2 Administering Across Creating Profiles y Group Wizard ES Verbet 3 Group Membership No member Members pA Default Supervisor i Christian Ziegler ow Sonja Wagner pi Matt Jefferson lt Back Finish Cancel Heip 9 The new crowd is displayed in the Groups module along with its members fy Across Language Server v6 0 59795_en Sonja Wagner Groups File View Tools Help BBG FF Bogg amp crossBoard ZS KA Across Language Portal Solutions Acr Name Description Projects Correctors SacrossaPl aman Administration E an S crossConnect croseConnect S crossTem Web read only anonymous crossTerm Web with read only anonymous access amp SacrossTerm Web read wnite crossTerm Web with read write access s crossTerm Web matony anonymous 2 P SE E E amp crossTerm Web read write 5 RA Linguistic Supply Chain Managers a dea aialemerder sain ee e amp Project Managers 4 CEN M Reviewers S Supervisors Supervisors 00 Eime iiis Translators Translators Translators Properties Delete 7 Name PM Last login Login state E mail ow Matt Jefferson lt nla gt Offline matt jefferson exampie com wo Christian Ziegler lt n a gt Offiine christian ziegler example com A newly created crowd is automatical
230. he body text and mark the beginning and end of the string or paragraph The lt b gt and lt b gt tags however are located within the body text and mark the beginning and end of the bold text in this case the word boldface 4 Subsequently determine the element type In this example it is an external element As the content marked with the element is to be locked for the translator select locked Confirm the settings by clicking OK e Apart from the normal definition of the processing via Unconditional the areas to be Mi edited can also be defined by using regular expressions and Conditional XML y Element Properties General Attributes Formatting Name calories Content type Normal O CDATA Empty Element type C Internal Normal Treat as white space _ Conditional Conditional settings 5 The customization of the document settings template for this example is finished Go to gt gt Configure gt gt Splitting Settings gt gt Preview and gt gt Advanced to customize Tagged XML templates Information on this topic is available in the part on Tagged XML document settings templates in chapter 3 11 2 of the manual Across at a Glance 6 Now the document to be translated can be checked in to Across on the basis of the customized document settings template For this purpose select the customized document settings template in the respective dialog of the Project Wizard User Manual Acro
231. he list of relations in the Relations module To modify the details and specifications of a relation at any time select the desired relation in the Relations module and click Properties To delete a relation select the relation from the list Click Delete and then Yes in the following dialog box y Across Language Server v6 0 59795_en Sonja Wagner Relations E Ex File View Tools Help 6 E BE ie EP 4 7 Relations ax crossBoard een DEE de Marketing Name Address City E mail Default project mana Projects Sales 2 Marketing inistrati pincer Aae es Administration pad Sales Technical Documentation A Sare D Technical Documentation y T New Properties Delete e a fa amp 3 a Project ID Name Documents Status Deadline Description Profiles m Relations a Languages es Ennis Ready CAP NUM SCRL User Manual Across Step by Step 33 2 Administering Across Creating QM Lists 2 6 Creating QM Lists You can use the following step by step instructions to easily create a new quality management list The QM Criteria List Wizard will assist you in creating a new QM list Please note that you need to have the appropriate rights in order to create a new QM list The default setting assumes that the supervisor is responsible for creating QM lists When you create a new QM list only existing criteria are available to you If
232. hecking the correctness of any translations auto inserted by the pre translation Projects module 1 Goto the Projects module using the Projects tab hy My Tasks Projects Tasks Sonja Wagner 371198725 w Help Projects A New Project ID Name Relation Progress Status Finish Description B 2 Display texts 0 0 of 1 document s finis 25 Apr 2014 B 3 in 4 Marketing 100 1 of 1 document s finis 01 May 2014 01 May 2014 Fact sheet_Localization Fact sheet_Across features Marketing 0 0 of 1 document s finis Description of Across fe 2 Select a project for which you want to check out one or more documents Then click Check Out to start the Check Out Wizard to check out documents Check Out Wizard 3 After the wizard has started enable the corresponding checkbox to select the translations to be exported If you wish to export all documents in all target languages you can use the Select all button Clicking the column headers to select the desired documents by means of filters Check Out Wizard Select documents to check out x Document Language Progress F Software localization with Across_EN docx 3 Englisch Vereinigte Staaten 7 a Saad Rain Sa a aq Datsch TEE naan a a a ren ee ee eee a i Select All Deselect all bd Next User Manual Across Step by Step 258 8 crossWeb for Browser Based Work with Across Checking out Documents with crossWeb In addition to the target documen
233. hen items already exist If an entry already exists Use entry data categories of the TBX file Ignore entry data categories of the TBX file C Use most recent data categories according to the modification date If a term already exists Use term data categories of the TBX file Ignore term data categories of the TBX file Use most recent data categones according to the modification date lt Back Cancel Help User Manual Across Step by Step 176 6 crossTerm Importing Terminology The dialog window will be displayed only if the TBX file to be imported contains entry or term GUIDs A TBX file contains e g GUIDs if the file was exported from Across and now has to be re imported GUIDs are IDs that clearly identify entries and terms T If the entries or terms to be imported do not yet exist in crossTerm all data categories and values that have been mapped to the corresponding data categories and values in crossTerm will be imported to crossTerm Thus data categories and values that have not been mapped will not be imported If the author and or user of the entries or terms to be imported has not been mapped to any Across user the Across user who performs the import will automatically be used as author user in crossTerm For entries and terms you can separately determine how to proceed if entries and or terms to be imported already exist in crossTerm e Use entry term properties of the TBX file The properties
234. hes check Vv Segmentation crossTerm check 2 Click Manage QM lists QM Criteria List 3 Click New to start the QM Criteria List Wizard for creating a new QM list Wizard 3 Criteria List Editor Ea Criteria Lists Default criteria lst New Delete Cance 4 Once the wizard has started click Next gt User Manual Across Step by Step 34 2 Administering Across Creating QM Lists y Criteria list QM Criteria List Wizard a a a This wizard helps to create and modify changed to translated criteria lists Quality criteria list is a set of quality aspects which can be checked at chosen document state transitions For example you can impose grammar verification when document state is 5 Enter a name for the new QM list and if desired add a description Click Next gt to confirm these details y Criteria list General properties Name Advanced Lisi z Description smek neas nes 6 Setup the criteria of the new list To do this click Add y Criteria list List contents Criteria List Items cmo rman cona Help Help 7 Select a criterion that you would like to add to the list and confirm by clicking OK Repeat this procedure until the new list contains all the desired criteria To delete a criterion from the new list select it in the new QM list and click Delete User Manual Across Step by Step 35 2 Adminis
235. ial Finishing Tasks as an External Translator in the video library at http www across net en knowledge base video library User Manual Across Step by Step 246 m Deliver Task Wizard T v 7 crossWAN Working Offline via the Internet Delivering crossWAN Tasks The Deliver Task Wizard helps you to deliver tasks Please note that you must be assigned the user type Offline user in Across to be able to deliver tasks as outlined in the step by step instructions below 1 Start the Deliver Task Wizard e g by clicking the n icon in the Across toolbar or via the menu item gt gt File gt gt Deliver Tasks As soon as you have finished working on a task in crossDesk the Deliver Task Wizard is started automatically and does not need to be started manually y Deliver Task Wizard ES Delivering translations The Deliver Task Wizard is for offline users who want to transmit their data packets to the project manager or the Across Server These packets are transmitted either via direct upload to the Server crossWAN load or via the export to a file that is then send by e mail or data medium crossWAN classic When offline users want to receive new data packets they have to use the Retrieve Task Wizard _ Do not show this info again Next gt Cancel Help 2 Once the wizard has started click Next gt 3 Decide whether you want to upload the task directly to the Across Server or export it in
236. ically set to translated final editing state In this way you do not need to manually set the paragraph to translated e Using the shortcut Ctrl Alt Enter you can change the state of the current paragraph li to translated and automatically jump in the next paragraph Also with the Ctrl Alt Z shortcut you can change the state of the current paragraph to translated and move on to the next paragraph automatically Pre translated paragraphs between the current paragraph and the next untouched paragraph are automatically set to the final editing state 9 Now translate the next paragraph In this example the sentence is highlighted in green This indicates the existence of a corresponding translation in crossTank The color indicates the match quota which is the degree of similarity between the active sentence and the crossTank entry In order to insert the crossTank entry in your translation just mark the required entry in the fuzzy search results and click the icon The entry will then be inserted at the current cursor position in the Target Editor This can also be done by double clicking the corresponding entry in the Target Editor Te You can customize the color used to highlight the crossTank entries in the Ssource Context View in the Profile Settings under gt gt Tools gt gt Profile Settings gt gt crossDesk gt gt Source Context View User Manual Across Step by Step 120 4 Translating and Correcting Documents in
237. id packages and tasks contained in them All relevant information on the respective task is displayed in a report in order to assist you in your decision to confirm or reject the task Click Confirm to confirm the delegated crossGrid packages and tasks contained in them Click Reject to reject the task In this case the crossGrid Retrieve Wizard will cancel retrieving fy Do you want to confirm or to reject it Project Fact sheet_ Across features crossGrid package confirmation 2 Project Team Name Sonja Wagner 3 Overall Project Analysis Analysis a Details total b Locked c Hidden d Repetitions in documents in project e crossTank analysis result French France E mail sonja wagner example com Para Sent Standard lines Words Fields and placeables 30 57 107 28 831 0 0 00 0 0 00 0 0 00 0 0 00 Matches in documents added counts No match Matches in project unique count over all documents No match f Details net French France in documents in project Document 1 Across features_EN_update docx 1 General Description Creation Date Words Web site Word 2007 2013 4 23 2014 831 Partition 1 831 word s Tasks Project management Document translation Char Letters Digits Numbers Punct Sep Asian Char Other Char 5364 4467 1 1 129 767 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Master language English Vereinigte Staaten 2 Docu
238. ie zum jeweiligen Textsegment translation memory E 1 ji len im T ii B The translators main work env logy om se korrespondierenden Fundstel en im ps 3 Translation Memorys jj g ees sous a Die i S Eee EEEE correspond to the text segment at hand ha ihc Dolum eain poke oie m 4 Translation Memory E Pe ae ae ma zas e der ntenstruktur erlaubt eine 2 The spell check text length ch display of the document s structure allows T a lavigation innerh OEE E translated E E ok BACT CON cee nnernaib aes VoKumentes 4 Arecord of the editing state is quick navigation within the document E HS abersetzt 3 The following document forma The spell check text length check and many other 8 Rechtschreibprifung Textlangenkontrolle und eine t f iit ai E 2 Office applications Text proce quality assurance features immediately report Vielzahl weiterer Qualitatssicherungsfunktionen vi s y sy j Microsoft Word DOC DOT potential sources of error Accidental ones zeigen m gliche Fehlerquellen sofort an Auch die E 6 Terminologiesystem E Microsoft Excel XLS files as B Microsoft PowerPoint PPT ar O A 10 T a F amp EE a TPT 1 B I U m i X aA I Rich Text Format RTF files Normal Segoe UI 10 pt Text files TXT files z TeX TEX files Neben dem Quell und Zieltext sieht der bersetzer die zum jeweiligen Textsegment 5 Po Eundstellen im Transiatior n Memon
239. ill be available to the users of the assigned groups for search queries The rights can be assigned in the Public filters subsection of the crossTerm section of the user group rights Further information on this is available at the end of these step by step instructions Click Next gt User Manual Across Step by Step 226 6 crossTerm Creating User Defined Filters y crossTerm Filter Wizard Specify name instance and description Ng Name Corporate Language Instance 2 Default Across Server hd Description Searches only for terminology belonging strictly to our corporate language v Public lt Back Cancel Help Defining criteria 5 Now you can define the filter function For this purpose you can determine the criteria on whose basis the filter is to operate A criterion consists of a field a condition and one or several values Moreover several criteria can be linked by means of logical operators and groupings 1 Selecting a field To select the first criterion select a field from the corresponding drop down list in the first row of the dialog window The list contains all picklists and text fields at entry and term level that have been created in the entry term template of the crossTerm instance for which the filter is created 2 Assigning a Then select the desired conditions Depending on the selected field the following filters condition are available equal lt gt not equal In Not in
240. in the Language Settings section of the system settings Information on this topic is available in the manual Across at a Glance The following example demonstrates the import of translation memories from a TMX file The import of other formats TTX as well as GLO takes place in the same or at least similar way So you can perform the import for these file formats in an analogous manner 1 Start the crossTank Import Wizard In the crossTank Manager you can start the wizard via the corresponding section on the crossTank Manager start page via the icon in the toolbar or via gt gt Tools gt gt Import in the menu bar crossTank Import Wizard Ea Import translation memories we Use the crossTank Import Wizard to import existing translation memories in TMX format and determine the corresponding parameters for crossTank Next gt Cancel Help 2 Once the wizard has started click Next gt 3 Select the format you want to import and click Next gt User Manual Across Step by Step 146 Import mode 5 cross Tank Importing Translation Memories a crossTank Import Wizard Select import file format F Format ipti U TMX Import Import of Translation Memory eXchange files TTX TTX Import Import of TRADOS Bilingual Document files GLO Glossary Import Import of Glossary files ceee weas canes Hep 4 First select the file you want to import To do this click Browse crossTank
241. ine that a log file with detailed information on the import is to be created during the import The log will be stored locally in the log directory of the respective Windows user You can access the log directory e g via the link in the log directory of the Across installation folder The log file can also be saved locally by means of a button in the final step of the crossTerm Import Wizard Apart from the selected import settings the log file contains detailed information on the imported terminology data and on their processing e g information on the successful import of entries and terms and if not imported information on why the import did not take place Further information on log files is available in chapter 7 12 4 of the user manual Across at a Glance Then click Next gt crossTerm Import Wizard Select file to import r Select file to import C Terminology Across_en de csv Browse Select import mode Import with user interaction C Import without user interaction all questionable entries will be stored to a TMX TBX file prseccccccscssesnccecsssesesscsosessensees lt Back Next gt Cancel Help 8 Now select the character to be used as data delimiter such as comma or semicolon If the CSV file you want to import contains entry and or term GUIDs you can activate GUID mapping option The GUID is a globally unique identifier of a data object For example each entry and each term in crossTer
242. ine will then appear in a list on the left hand side of the window Cc crossTerm Import Wizard EJ Specify type of columns r Please specify the type of information for each column goceccsssoscosecosoosessocssocososoecoosssoseososssosesosg CSV fiekis Type of information B Column 1 Fuzzy Suche None v B Column 2 f None v Bl Column 3 fuzzy search None v yec cona Hep 14 Now the mapping will be carried out The columns of the CSV file are mapped to the terminology categories and attributes that are available in Across First select a column on the left side of the window under CSV fields for example the header for the column that contains the source language terms and in the drop down list on the right under Type of information select the appropriate Across category User Manual Across Step by Step 186 6 crossTerm Importing Terminology E crossTerm Import Wizard Specify type of columns A 4 Please specify the type of information for each column First ine is CSV header CSV fiekis Type of information B Column 1 Fuzzy Suche Tem v E Column 2 f Tem data category v 3 Column 3 fuzzy search Term vi Beck cma He 15 Continue until all the columns have been mapped to the appropriate categories in Across Columns that are not mapped to any Across category will not be imported Then click Next gt 16 Next the mappings that you have made need to be further speci
243. ing Translation Memories iy Alignment Wizard 0 Ea Text pair alignment iy Total comparison time 0 142 seconds Category Source document Target document Software localization with Across_ Software localization with Across _ Paragraphs 26 of 26 100 5 26 of 26 100 Sentences 28 of 28 100 28 of 28 100 Styles 12 of 15 80 12 of 18 66 segs lt Back Start import Cancel Help 16 Click Start import in order to finish the alignment and import the aligned sentences as translation units to crossTank 17 When the Import has been finished click OK 3 Across EA Oo Import successfully finished 18 Henceforth you can use the translation units that have been transferred to crossTank e g for pre translations If you selected a workflow in the Alignment Wizard you can now further process the source document e g to add missing translations in the target document 5 2 Importing Translation Memories The following step by step instructions demonstrate how you can easily import existing translation memories TMs in the TMX TTX and GLO formats The Translation Memory eXchange format TMX format is an exchange format that standardizes the presentation of translation memory content and renders it exchangeable between different tools or translators with a minimum of information loss Information on exporting translation memories in the TMX format from Trados Workbench is available starting on page 275 a
244. inish the task later in order to carry out corrections according to the QM criteria for example select the option Continue task Enable the checkbox Remind again after to determine a period of time after which would you like to be reminded again Confirm by clicking OK To finish a completed task in crossDesk at any time use gt gt File gt gt Finish Task or click the F icon from the crossDesk toolbar or use the Ctrl Shift F shortcut key Please note that a finished task can only be opened in read only mode meaning that it is write protected and thus you cannot edit the task any further If you have selected the option Store finished translations to crossTank in the previous dialog box a dialog box for storing the translations to crossTank appears You can choose that for each translation unit you would like to save a window will appear for checking and if necessary correcting the units that this dialog should only be shown if there is a different number of source and target sentences or that this dialog should never be shown Select the desired option and click Store y Store Finished Translations to crossTank Software localizati Ea _ Show match making dialog for each paragraph C Never show match making dialog Skip paragraphs with different amount of sentences a If in the previous dialog box you have selected the option to show a dialog box for each paragraph that has an unequal number of source
245. ion 1 AA gt gt Users fy Across Language Server v6 0 59795_en Sonja Wagner Users ES Users module e aiii File View Tools Help G60 aeg Okar crossBoard Users f a Ci amp Name PM Last login Login state E mail Projects oil Christian Ziegler 50 Soni sap oo B irn Oae conga wegnere ea Sy Administration y Default Supervisor wo Matt Jefferson lt n a gt Offfine matt jefferson example com Denis Girardin amp Helen Parker lt n a gt Offline helen parker example com E Helen Parker S Denis Girardin lt nla gt Offiine denis girardin example com a oi Matt Jefferson amp Default Supervisor 4 11 20141 Offine as Sonja Wagner amp Christian Ziegler lt nla gt Offine christian ziegler example com Users BA Groups New Properti Delet Calen Message E mail tP aa amp Source Lan Target Language Subject Rating Profiles Relations Ne Propert Delet Languages L Eonts z lt gt Ready cap Num scrL h 2 Click New below the pane on the upper right to start the User Wizard which will help User Wizard you create a new user You can also run the User Wizard without being in the Users module To do this click the Pel icon in the wizard toolbar 3 Once the wizard has started click Next gt y User Wizard Administer employees team members Use the User Wizard to set up new tea
246. ir actual work and do not need to be concerned with the idiosyncrasies of the document format in question As the paragraphs set to this style do not contain any information that the translator needs for the translation these paragraphs should not be visible to him i e they should be hidden In Across this function is implemented by means of the format type hidden In this way the translation volume is reduced and the translator cannot do anything wrong in these paragraphs e g by mistakenly translating these contents Before running through the following example you should create a new Word document settings template Information on this topic is available on page 60 1 Goto gt gt Tools gt gt System Settings gt gt Document settings and select the format for which you want to customize the document settings template Word 2007 2013 in our example Finally go to the drop down list and select the template you wish to customize User Manual Across Step by Step 62 3 Project Management with Across Creating and Customizing Document Settings Templates J System Settings Ea Aan Word 2007 2013 d Local v New Delete Reporting A Document settings template Segmentation Structure Attributes J Subjects Description System Attributes Document template for Word files by Across User defined Dictionary Search Center Concordance Search ae Customize Word 2007 2013 Settings Terminology Co
247. irmed the task continue with step 4 User Manual Across Step by Step 116 4 Translating and Correcting Documents in Across Translating Documents fy Across Language Server v6 0 59795_en Sonja Wagner My tasks E File View Tools Help O 80 F crossBoard PRIORITY TASK TYPE DOCUMENT LANGUAGES PROGRESS TOTAI REMAINING FINISH DATE My tasks Fact sheet_Across features 4 t Across features_EN docx Document translation Web site 828 words Projects Administration Ready Document translation V V Document translation crossWash_v4 dt PS 0 63 63 4 25 2014 Fact sheet_Acros Across features E gt ES 0 828 828 5 1 2014 je E English Vereinigte Staaten E German Germany 4 17 2014 3 34 01 PM 5 1 2014 3 20 00 PM Open Confirm reject Sonja Wagner CAP NUM SCRL 3 Click Confirm in the following dialog box to accept the task Click Show content if you wish to see a preview of the source document To close the preview click the menu item gt gt File gt gt Close task or the X icon in the toolbar fy Task Confirmation Task is unconfirmed Do you wish to confirm or reject it Task information Task name Document translation Project Fact sheet_Across features Project ID 4 Sonja Wagner 50 characters per line induding spaces Marketing Across features_EN docx English Vereinigte Staaten German Germany 4 17 2014 4 17 2014 5 1 2014 3 20 00 PM Document informa
248. ish Cancel Help 4 After the download the fonts are automatically installed in the Across database The status changes to Installed Click Finish y Font Download Wizard Add fonts e Font name Download Status T HeiveticaNeue LT 67 MdCn Not available T HelveticaNeue LT 47 LtCn Not available T HelveticaNeueLT Std Med Ext Not available Status Start download Help User Manual Across Step by Step 251 7 crossWAN Working Offline via the Internet Adding Missing Fonts 5 The missing fonts have been added to the Across database The task is now opened automatically You can start working on your task Please note that the Font Download Wizard only adds missing fonts to the Across database and does not install them on the respective computer If the missing fonts are not also installed on the respective computer display problems may occur when creating previews namely if an external application like MS Word is used for the preview As the font is not installed on the computer the external application will usually use a substitute font instead of the missing font However display problems may occur if the substitute font cannot or not correctly display characters of the missing font To solve this problem the missing font must be installed on the computer User Manual Across Step by Step 252 Projects module Create Project Wizard 8 crossWeb for Browser Based Work with Across Creating Project
249. ithin the paragraph pair has been edited manually The translation units contained in the paragraph pair will be transferred to crossTank after the alignment is completed Paragraphs that are never matched e g images Paragraph for which a marker has been set Markers enable the marking of paragraphs e g to be able to find the respective paragraphs quickly in larger documents 13 If you need to correct the content e g due to spelling errors in the source or target text this can be done directly in the two windows in the bottom pane The content is not corrected in the actual documents but only in the translation units that are imported to crossTank after the alignment If you want to correct errors directly in the documents you must do so outside Across integrated update functions Heading 1 Alt SM A 14 Integration und Automatisierung der Prozesse Uber offene Schnittstellen M ee SERERE EPE I _e e wii Pa3 A4 Segoe Ul 10 pt Localizing Software with Across mit maximaler Konsistenz und Wiederverwenbarkeit 14 After you have completed all manual corrections click OK Click Save to save the current alignment status Click Save and close to save the alignment status and close the Alignment Wizard 15 The window of the comparison overview is displayed again User Manual Across Step by Step 144 Importing TM content What is TMX 5 cross Tank Import
250. k Next gt al crossTerm Import Wizard Assign tem data categories q Please assign the term data categories to the terms CSV fiekis Type of information B Deutsch type main entry term Flengisch _ttype main entry term Assign data categories cme neas emea He 24 Now define how you would like to proceed if entries and or terms that should be imported already exist in crossTerm al crossTerm Import Wizard How to proceed with existing entries and tems r During import genuine identifiers of the CSV file and the crossTerm database are used to identify already existing entnes and terms Please specify how to proceed when items already exist If an entry already exists peeeescceceeeescoceesescsoessosocsoessooscesesssoecsessssoesssssoseeessoceesesssseeseg C Ignore entry properties of the CSV file Use most recent properties according to modification date If a term already exists Use term properties of the CSV file C Ignore term properties of the CSV file Use most recent properties according to the modification date lt back noas canes Hep v The dialog window will only be displayed if the CSV file to be imported contains entry or term GUIDs and if GUID mapping has been activated see step 8 GUIDs are IDs that clearly identify entries and terms User Manual Across Step by Step 190 6 crossTerm Importing Terminology Te lf the entries or terms to be imported
251. ks Please note that tasks need to be assigned for each partition that has been inserted Information on assigning tasks is available in the step by step instructions on creating projects starting on page 27 User Manual Across Step by Step 266 z Projects module 9 Special Workflows and Tasks Updating Documents 9 2 Updating Documents Use the following step by step instructions to learn how as the project manager you can update documents and as the translator you can edit updated documents If parts of the previous document version have already been translated they are incorporated into the new updated target document This means that the translation can be continued without any complications or data loss Note the following instructions to update documents or projects in Across as project manager Follow the instructions starting on page 273 to edit an updated document as translator General information on updating documents in Across is available in chapter 10 2 of the user manual Across at a Glance 9 2 1 Updating Documents or Projects The Update Wizard helps you to check in an updated document for editing in Across The old and new documents are compared This allows you to quickly and easily recognize and edit parts of the text that have been changed in the source and target document Across supports you in updating individual documents as well as entire projects i e in updating all documents of a pr
252. lable on the Internet at www across net en knowledge base video library 1 3 Conventions To ensure better legibility and clarity the following conventions were used in this manual Key labels names of menus and commands are presented in bold and spaced typeset Technical terms are printed in italics 1 4 Additional Information The Across product line is constantly being developed and improved In turn the documentation is also being expanded and updated For the latest version of the documentation and further Across related information visit www across net 1 5 Feedback Our objective is to provide all Across users with optimum working conditions For this reason we welcome any feedback All information texts and illustrations have been prepared with utmost care Nevertheless errors may occur Please contact us by e mail at documentation across net if this should be the case User Manual Across Step by Step 6 1 About This Documentation Document Versions 1 6 Document Versions Across Version Document 5 5 9 7 5 7 5 7 9 7 6 0 6 0 6 0 version 4 1 4 1 1 4 1 2 4 2 4 2 1 4 2 2 5 0 5 0 1 5 0 2 date Mar 30 2013 Apr 25 2013 June 27 2013 Aug 20 2013 Sept 12 2013 Nov 13 2013 June 1 2014 June 20 2014 July 29 2014 User Manual Across Step by Step Changes Content update Content extension Content extension Content extension Content ext
253. lance User Manual Across Step by Step 274 Exporting translation memories 10 Incorporating Data from Third Party Systems Translation Memories from Trados Workbench 10 Incorporating Data from Third Party Systems In this chapter Translation memories from Trados Workbench see below Translation memories from Star Transit page 276 Translation memories from Passolo page 277 Terminology from Trados MultiTerm page 278 Terminology from Star TermStar page 282 10 1 Translation Memories from Trados Workbench To export translation memories from Trados Workbench follow the instructions below For additional information on exporting translation memories from Trados Workbench please consult the relevant Trados documentation 1 Run Translator s Workbench 2 Open the translation memory you wish to export via gt gt File gt gt Open Note that the checkbox Exclusive must be enabled Suchen in ex FE A lt ph my E y we 2 amp m ao T o A z N 4 amp o o amp a am du g ia T i a nif a m g N Dateiname Sample tmwy Dateityp Translation Memory tmw Abbrechen Netzwerkumg Z Exclusive Hite 73 3 Goto gt gt File gt gt Export to switch to the export dialog Datei Einstellungen Ansicht Optonen Extras Hilfe aA Neu Strg N ffnen Strg O Schlie en Eigenschaften Setup Import Reorganisiere
254. lect All Deselect All lt back cance He Selecting language If you activated the option for exporting language pairs in step 5 the application will not pairs display any languages but the language pairs with the source language selected in step J E crossTerm Export Wizard EA Select languages 4 Select languages to export Language Export English French E English Dutch C English Italian C English Spanish C Select All Deselect All lt Back cance Hep Then click Next gt 8 Inthe next step specify whether images are to be exported too In addition you can determine that crossTerm entries are to be exported as a whole Please note that if the option is activated the crossTerm entries will be exported with all terms existing for the respective entries in the languages to be exported Synonyms for example will also be exported Thus any export limitations that you made in the preceding steps of the crossTerm Export Wizard may no longer fully apply In addition you can determine whether you want to export the data in the Across specific TBX format or in the official TBX format We recommend using the Across specific TBX format only for terminology exchange with Across versions prior to v4 0 SP3 patch D Export template Click Save export template to create a template with the settings you selected for the export and a file extension export If you want to export the same data or o
255. ll be adopted and those of the term to be imported will be dropped Merge new and existing definitions and properties Both the definitions and the properties of the term to be imported and of the existing term will be adopted If the properties to be merged are values of data categories that may only occur once you can use an option to additionally determine whether the existing value or the new value is to be used Manual merge Using the More options gt gt you can determine for each particular term how the terms to be imported are to be processed In addition detailed information will be displayed User Manual Across Step by Step 204 Log file 6 crossTerm Importing Terminology 3 Already existing entries isti tri e tems you want to i New tem s LI ficelle O Add as new entry Merge with existing entry Manual merge Entry definitions summary New entry definitions count 0 Selected entry definitions count 1 Show Entry properties summary New entry properties count 0 Selected entry properties count 1 Show Term shoelace New term properties count 0 Selected term properties count 2 Show lt lt Less options 0k sto _conce Click Finish to exit the wizard Cc crossTerm Import Wizard Import progress q Import successful Remaining time 0 00 00 elapsed time 0 00 02 Save log file as is available for your translation work ol Across v6 0 59795_en crossTerm
256. llows you to define filter criteria and or languages in order to restrict the export to the relevant crossTerm terminology goesoscoscoscessesseesescesoesossesoessoessocessesossosesescesessy Reesescesoesoecosseesoesoscecoesoesosocesceseesosseeseesseoeosesos cao canei He 2 Once the wizard has started click Next gt 3 Select the TBX format as export format and click Next gt E crossTerm Export Wizard Select export file format a Format Description JJ CSV export Export terminology to CSV TBX export Exports terminology to a TermBase eXchange TBX file wes M rae User Manual Across Step by Step 214 Export template Export language pairs Standalone entries 6 crosslerm Exporting Terminology 4 User Manual Across Step by Step Enter a location and a name for the TBX file If you prefer you can select a location via Browse and assign a name for the file to be exported Click Save to confirm If you created an export template during a previous export See step 8 you can also select it now To do this click Browse select the template with the file extension export and click Open Use an export template only for another export of the same data as during the creation of the export template or for an export of other data with the same entry structures and data categories Then click Next gt a crossTerm Export Wizard Select a file Destina
257. ly offered when assigning tasks e g translations If a crowd is temporarily not to be offered for the task assignment this can be determined in the crowd settings by means of the option Do not offer for assignment 2 4 Creating Profiles The following step by step instructions will help you to create a new profile The Profile Wizard will assist you in creating a new profile Please note that you need to have the appropriate rights in order to create a new profile The default setting assumes that the supervisor is responsible for creating profiles General information on profiles in Across is available in chapter 3 4 of the user manual Across at a Glance User Manual Across Step by Step 27 2 Administering Across Creating Profiles EA 1 Click the module bar on the left to switch to the Profiles module via gt gt Administration gt gt Profiles y Across Language Server v6 0 59571_en Default Supervisor Profiles Oo Profiles module File View Tools Help Personal tools 8 EG a aS g Profiles ax amp Default Profile Name Description Projects uz Administration crossBoard ra wo New Properties Delete Q 3 5 a Profiles m Relations Ready CAP NUM SCRL Profile Wizard 2 Click New below the pane on the upper right to start the Profiles Wizard which will assist you in creating a new profile 3 Once the wizard has started click Next gt
258. m members and enter their contact and access data group memberships and profiles You can change the standard profile according to group membership here if needed greccccsscssnssencscssenssscscsscessssessscsssssesesesseesssoossey Leeerrerrnrerrrnrrnritrerirrrrrtrtttren a 4 The Basic information dialog box opens Enter the name and if desired the e mail address of the new user In addition select the Windows authentication option and click Browse User Manual Across Step by Step 16 2 Administering Across Creating Users with Windows Authentication iy User Wizard Ea Basic information e First and last name Claire Dutred E mail Claire dutred example com Login Across login Windows logini Browse Username Password Confirm password More gt gt lt Back Cancel Help 5 The dialog box for selecting the Windows user opens Enter the name of the new user e Instead of manually entering the user you can perform a search by clicking li Advanced and take over the user Click the button to check that the name is correct and click OK 3 Select User T EEN Select this object type User Object Types From this location WIN CG9AAP6LLRD Locations Enter the object name to select examples WIN CGSAAPE6LLRD Claire Dutreil Check Names Advanced OK Cancel 6 You will be taken back to the Basic information dialog box The user name is automatically entered according t
259. m has a special GUID The GUIDs are automatically generated What is GUID and consist of a random character sequence of 32 hexadecimal characters e g F191323D 346D 49D0 A28A 1913901A76C7 Each GUID occurs only once in the entire Across system The entries and terms are clearly identified by the associated GUIDs Further information on the GUID mapping is available in the chapter crossTerm Import gt with GUID Synchronization of the user manual Across at a Glance Then click Next gt User Manual Across Step by Step 184 6 crossTerm Importing Terminology E crossTerm Import Wizard Choose separator for file Ng gocccecccecsocesocececeee Resseeesoeeseescessseseo First Line Deutsch Genus Englisch Enable GUID mapping SS SS Heb 9 First select the crossTerm instance to which you want to import the CSV file Information on crossTerm instances is available in chapter 7 3 1 of the user manual Across at a Glance Click Next gt E crossTerm Import Wizard Instance E Select instance for import v Default Across Server lt Back Cancel Help 10 If the first line of your CSV file contains the column headers of the associated table Across sorts them out and inserts them in the left side of the window under CSV fields If the first row does not contain column headings continue with step 13 al crossTerm Import Wizard Ea Specify type of columns r Please specify the type of infor
260. mStar 3 0 4 image Input Verification T Passwords M Oniy structure no data Apply filter z Change Source language afikaans i Select output file Output file C Programme T ermStar XW DBS Tutorial mtf Browse Export format Select one of the three available export formats Export options Select the information to be exported in addition to the terminology data If you want to create a new and empty dictionary select Only structure no data The new dictionary will then inherit the structure of the existing dictionary Specify the name of the export target file Output file Abbrechen 7 The dictionary will now be exported Progress bar File Tutorial mtf 8 You can now use the crossTerm Import Wizard to import the dictionary you have exported as a MARTIF file into Across Follow the step by step instructions starting on page 206 User Manual Across Step by Step 284 11 Index 11 Index Across login 8 alignment 136 content corrections 144 content related corrections 142 loading saved intermediate state 136 saving intermediate state 136 Alignment Wizard 136 ARA files exporting 87 importing 89 Check Out Wizard 82 crossGrid delegating packages 93 delivering delegated packages 104 GRU file 104 GWU file 93 99 language allocation 95 retrieving delegated packages 99 status closed 99 crossGrid Delegation Wizard 93 crossGrid Deliver Wizard
261. mation for each column v First line is CSV header CSV fiekis Type of information B Deutsch None v 3 Genus None y B Englisch None v Net gt Canoe Help User Manual Across Step by Step 185 6 crossTerm Importing Terminology 11 Now the mapping will be carried out The columns of the CSV file are mapped to the terminology categories and attributes that are available in Across First select a column header on the left side of the window under CSV fields for example the header for the column that contains the source language terms and in the drop down list on the right under Type of information select the appropriate Across category crossTerm Import Wizard x Specify type of columns q Please specify the type of information for each column J First ine is CSV header Seccccscscccevcvcesccccccesescncccocecscccccccececcecce CSV fiekis Type of information B Deutsch Term v Bl Genus Tem data category v Englisch Term y Beck ama He 12 Continue until all the column headings have been mapped to the respective categories in Across Column headings that are not mapped to any Across category will not be imported Then click Next gt and go on with step 16 13 If the first row of your CSV file does not contain column headings and is filled with terminology entries disable the checkbox The first line is a CSV header The columns along with the contents of the first l
262. ment The drop down list in the Master Data Report provides various sample XSLTs to customize reports Below you can find an example for integrated billing with Across After generating a report and especially if the report is going to be used as the basis for billing a translation we recommend checking the report for correctness and plausibility Further information on this topic is available in chapter 4 3 4 of the user manual Across at a Glance 3 5 Creating and Customizing Document Settings Templates The following step by step instructions will show how you can easily create and customize document settings templates in Across Document settings templates can be used to determine the way documents of a particular format e g MS Word or XML should be processed during the check in process in Across and accordingly represented in crossDesk afterwards Further information on document settings templates is available in chapter 4 2 5 of the manual Across at a Glance 3 5 1 Creating Document Settings Templates 1 First open the system settings via gt gt Tools gt gt System Settings and go to the Document Settings section 2 Select the style for which you want to create a new document settings template In this example a template is to be created for a Word document User Manual Across Step by Step 60 3 Project Management with Across Creating and Customizing Document Settings Templates
263. ment Analysis Analysis Para Sent Standard lines Words Fields and placeables Char Letters Digits Numbers Punct Sep Asian Char Other Char a Details total 30 57 107 28 831 2 5364 4467 1 1 129 767 0 0 b Locked 0 0 0 00 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Vv c Hidden 0 0 0 00 0 0 0 0 Oo 0 0 0 0 0 If you accept the packages the import of the relevant data including crossTank and crossTerm entries if made available by the Master Server will begin 11 Once the import has been completed click Finish 3 crossGrid Retrieve Wizard Ex Transmitting data Te f by pS Action Remaining time Total time Cancel Heip 12 The package delegated to your Across Server is displayed both in the list of delegated packages and in the project tree marked with a green arrow pointing to the right H User Manual Across Step by Step 103 User defined workflows crossGrid module crossGrid Deliver Wizard 3 Project Management with Across crossGrid Pack Name Master Server Status Download d Finish date fa 3 Translation Unit E Across Systems GmbH Downkbaded 4 29 2014 1 13 The tasks contained in the delegated packages can be processed like normal tasks in Across after the tasks are assigned they are processed and finished Subsequently the data are transmitted back to the Master Server This can be done with the crossGrid Deliver Wizard If you are assigned tasks that are part of a user defined workflow
264. mine whether tasks may be assigned for a project If for example a project is merely created for the purpose of preparing a quotation you can avoid the premature commencement of the translation work by preventing the accidental assignment of tasks Moreover you can set a priority level low medium or high for the project Finally you can select attributes via corresponding buttons and define the desired attribute values For example you can use default attributes like Relation and Subject or user defined attributes In Across a relation is usually a customer but for example may also be a partner a country subsidiary or a product or product group Now click Next gt User Manual Across Step by Step 43 3 Project Management with Across Creating Projects y Project Wizard Ea Main project properties ao Project settings Default vi Project manager amp Sonja Wagner y Reporting template Default y Finish date 5 1 2014 gv 15 20 Description Description of Across features Task priority High y Project attributes Name Default values Relations Marketing y a Subjects Web site M Add Remove v Released lt Back cance He 8 Now define the source language for the project Across tries to detect the source language for most formats automatically If you have disabled the automatic language detection under gt gt Tools gt gt Profile Settings gt gt General gt
265. mport template Click Save import template to create a template with the settings you selected for the import and a file extension import If you want to import the same data or other data with the same entry structures and data categories later on you can use the template for this purpose see step 3 In this way the respective settings will be pre configured in the Import Wizard reducing or eliminating the need for manual adjustments 27 Click Import to start the import 28 If you activated the option Check for existing terms and show manual correction dialog in the previous step of the crossTerm Import Wizard and a term to be imported already exists in crossTerm a dialog window will appear 3 Already existing entries EA 3 isti tri terms you want to insert New term s ES abbrechen cancel Add as new entry C Merge with existing entry g ENINES BE Abbrechen E5 Cancel ok s cons In the dialog window you can determine how the term to be imported is to be processed In principle you can first choose whether a new entry with the term to be imported should be created or whether the term should be added to an existing entry To create a new entry select a respective option and click OK To add the term to an existing entry select the respective option A list will display any existing entries terms Any additional data categories and information for an existing entry term e g definitions
266. mtw lt iew gt E oj x File Edit view Search Help Create New Termbase Target Deutsch gt apple Open Termbase Ctrl O try containing an English term and its Change Termbase Definition Properties Alt Enter Release Locked Entries Import Define Export Export This Entry Export All Entries Ghr R Create Fuzzy Index Ctrl Z Exit Alt F4 a Define load or save the format for ter mbase output to an ASCII ANSI file 4 Across provides a special export definition for an optimal exchange with crossTerm Fur this purpose please contact our support Finally import the export definition using the Load button x Fields and Field Groups Any Term gt Any Attribute Help Any Term gt Any Text ie Add Load Delete Save Copy Remove New Before the Structure After the Structure lt term lt term gt V Export Field Name Before the Field Name After the Field Name type E V Export Field Contents Before the Field After the Field lt name gt lt I CDAT gt lt name gt User Manual Across Step by Step 279 Exporting terminology 10 Incorporating Data from Third Party Systems Terminology from Trados MultiTerm 5 Click Close to confirm the export settings 6 Click gt gt File gt gt Export all entries in the menu toolbar fol x Target Deutsch 2 apple try containing
267. n Datenpflege Beenden 1 C Programme TRADOS TS_FLiTTitest trav 4 Select the fields you wish to export If you wish to export all entries we recommend that you remove the filters that have been set up by clicking Restore User Manual Across Step by Step 275 10 Incorporating Data from Third Party Systems Translation Memories from Star Transit Filterkriterien Feld Kriterium x Abbrechen German Germany Hilfe t Ht Nicht Feldliste Kriterium l Hinzu Loschen Pickliste Oder J Zur cksetzen Ge ndert von Textfelder Laden Text Field z Speichern 5 Click OK to confirm the selection 6 Now enter the name and location of the translation memory you wish to export and select TMX format under File type Exportdatei erstellen a 2 x Speicher a tmp e c Ed L ateiname test C ateityp TMx tres Abbrechen Hilfe 7 Click Save to start exporting the translation memory 8 You can now use the crossTank Import Wizard to import the TMX file you have exported to Across Follow the step by step instructions starting on page 145 10 2 Translation Memories from Star Transit To export translation memories from Star Transit follow the instructions below For additional information on exporting translation memories from Star Transit please consult the relevant Star documentation 1 Start Star Transit Exporting 2 Goto g
268. n crossDesk will be presented from the point of view of the Combi Mode Combi Mode User Manual Across Step by Step 118 4 Translating and Correcting Documents in Across Translating Documents J Across Language Server v6 0 59795_en Sonja Wagner crossDesk Document translation Across features_EN docx Fact sheet_Across features Marketing 0 File View Tools Help i EE NESE l t oeg 26068080800 4r AA RHEL HOFER i crossView a x ieee SE Aa Qe cross Term a x Tea Y if pr A E S E translated ey oR Translating with Across Ubersetzen mit Across A m 1 bersetzt E 45 AE ES Translat B The crossDesk multiformat editor is Ta m bersetzer B designed to meet translators m requirements in the best warernnnrttete 3 The translator s main work environrr El crossDesk the Across multiformat e Context View information relevant for the translati 7 displayed in this editor outside the crossView format Thus translators can concentrate on their actual work and do not need to be concerned with the idiosyncrasies of the document format in question crossTerm Resides the source and tarnet tevtc the translator fe a m OA 2 F S F EG DCW Bl uUD x ASS B heading 1 Segoe Ul bersetzen mit Across B Term search B r n HBDS x B Target Editor F E Quick fiter v z h a 7 ae Search Center ax Search for similar sentences in crossTank Ready
269. nagement of bibliographic sources as an example For this purpose special bibliographic entries are created Unlike terminology entries these entries do not contain any terms but only bibliographic information A separate bibliographic entry is created for each bibliographic source Creating the structure for entering bibliographic sources Create an index 1 First create a new index The new index is to be used for entering the bibliographic sources In the crossTerm Manager go to the Indexes section of the crossTerm settings and click Add fy Settings Ea Instance J Default Across Server v Manage crossTem Settings Entgg Text flekis Pickisit System afigbutes Attachment Groups e Terms Text fields T Pick sts 5 System attributes a Attachments i Index name Standalone Multiple Groups Template Administration Entry template e Term template ry Tooltip administration User Manual Across Step by Step 237 Creating data categories Creating a template 6 crossTerm Administration of Bibliographic Sources with the Help of Indexes 2 Subsequently enter a name for the new index e g Bibliography and activate the option Allow standalone entry If this option is activated entries containing the index can be created even if no terms are stored which Is normally the case with bibliographic entries J Edit Index Name Bibliography Toon P Change icon aa Allow multiple
270. nager Documents Creation Date Start Date Finish Date 2 Project Team Name Sonja Wagner 3 Overall Project Analysis Analysis a Details total b Locked c Hidden d Repetitions in documents in project crossTank analysis result German Germany Matches in documents added counts Phone 4 Description of Across features Sonja Wagner 1 4 17 2014 4 17 2014 5 1 2014 E mail sonja wagner example com Para Sent Standard lines Words Fields and placeables Char 28 55 106 62 828 1 0 0 0 00 0 0 0 0 0 00 0 0 0 0 0 00 0 0 0 0 0 00 0 0 5331 0 0 0 0 Tuesday April 22 2014 09 24 22 4 Letters Digits Numbers Punct Sep Asian Char 4438 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Spaces included Contact 1 E mail Phone Contact 2 E mail Phone it 0 it it 0 Tasks Project management 126 767 0 it 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Yes Other Char User Manual Across Step by Step Now select the document or the documents for which you would like to create a report 59 3 Project Management with Across Creating and Customizing Document Settings Templates Click the amp icon to print the report Use the icon to copy the report to the clipboard From here you can use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl V to paste it into another application e g Microsoft Word for further editing Click the icon to save the report as an HTML or XML docu
271. nalysis User Manual Across Step by Step 58 3 Project Management with Across Creating Reports 9 fy Report Wizard lt Select report settings template a Assigned report settings templates Project Template Fact sheet_Across features Projects Fact sheet_Across features Report settings template Default Description _ Only project section _ Update pre transiation analysis Note This wil update the pre transiation analysis results in all reports There is no undo option Itis recommended to create and store the report without the update first and execute the update then Offiine translators wil get an updated task confirmation report only if the task was not downloaded yet cece neas ones Help y Report Wizard Select repot settings template Select documents Name mi Across features_EN docx Select All Unselect all Click Finish to generate the report 10 The report appears in a separate window S El lt Default gt Master Data Report project Fact sheet_Across features Master Data Report project Fact sheet_Across features Created by Sonja Wagner Created on Project Name Fact sheet_Across features Project ID Counting Standard line length 50 Relation Marketing Relat No 2 Address ZIP City Sublanguage Web Project Fact sheet_Across features 1 General Project ID Description Ma
272. name Path Comment 1 4 17 2014 Across feature C Word files First version 2 4 23 2014 Across feature C Word files 129509 bytes iJ 3 4 23 2014 Across feature C Word files 16344 bytes Add Setactve Properties Repo Dee OK Cancer This means that old version states can be restored or deleted easily Information on this is available in chapter 10 3 of the user manual Across at a Glance User Manual Across Step by Step 2 2 9 Special Workflows and Tasks Updating Documents 9 2 2 Translating Updated Documents The following step by step instructions will explain how to translate an updated document As soon as a document has been updated you will receive an Across internal message informing you about the update and the changes in the document which resulted from it 3 Incoming Message Ea From First name Default Date 23 04 2014 Time 16 05 Last name Supervisor Project E mail Relation Message History The document Across features_EN_update docx of project Fact sheet_Across features was updated Statistics Unchanged 29 Moved 0 Split 0 Merged 0 Deleted 0 Created 1 Please note that any images and objects that have been replaced with other images or objects using the command Insert from file from the context menu in the Target Editor are restored to the original version when the file is updated and must therefore be replaced anew 1 Inthe module bar on the left go to the My
273. nce Open the crossTerm Manager and select the menu item gt gt Tools gt gt Manage user 1 defined filters filter sets 2 Click the Add button in the Filter sets tab Manage user defined filters filter sets User defined mer Faer sess Name Description y 3 The crossTerm Filter Set Wizard is started which will guide you through the process of a new filter set creation Click Next gt y crossTerm Filter Wizard Create a filter set This Wizard helps you to create more robust filter sets based on the filters order scccencesseccvcensccacssccsscesscassosensseossccasecasesecsccesses Nececccsenscvecccseesecenececssscoeseccsescoaseccessecesesocecces r C ep 229 User Manual Across Step by Step 6 crossTerm Creating Filter Sets 4 Now specify a name of the filter set and enter a short description if necessary Now you can also define the filter set as a public filter set In this way the filter set is available globally i e to all users of the respective groups of an Across installation In contrast non public filter sets will only be available in your personal Across environment and are invisible for other users You can for example define a new filter set as a non public filter set in order to check its functionality first After checking the new filter set you can define it as public filter set The rights for a created public filter set must be assigned to one or
274. ncluded in this user manual Please consult the Across QuickStarts or the Across administrator manual if you have questions on installing This documentation was created using OfficeHelp www officehelp de 1 2 Icons This manual makes use of the following icons and conventions Icon Description Attention This icon introduces information and notes that are essential for using Across correctly Tip This icon introduces tips and useful recommendations that facilitate the lt work with Across User Manual Across Step by Step 5 1 About This Documentation Conventions Additional information This icon indicates additional information and explanations intended to improve your understanding of the feature described Pointer This icon points to more detailed information in other chapters or documents Across Language Server Features marked with this icon are available only in the Across Language Server not in the Across Personal Edition Optional components Features marked with this icon are only available if you have purchased a corresponding license of the Across Language Server New features and changes in Across v6 0 This icon marks new features and changes in Across version 6 0 Moreover it points to extensions in the documentation e g added chapters ww te O YouTube Videos and Interactive Tutorials This icon refers to YouTube videos and interactive tutorials on the corresponding topic avai
275. ncordance Search Stopwords Tem Extraction eas Document Settings ACROSS HIDDEN NET resources Display text ACROSS LOCKED acne ACROSS _Ptaceable_C 2 Excel 2000 2003 ACROSS _Ptaceablie_P Excel 2007 2013 Image IDML Object MIF7 Document property MIF 8 11 PowerPoint 2000 2003 PowerPoint 2007 2013 QuickSiver Tagged HTML Tagged SGML Tagged XML Tagged XML v2 Visual XML Windows Resources Word 2000 2003 XLIFF gt oe Ha 2 By default Word templates are already prefilled with some elements The prefilling consists of the elements images objects and document settings which determine how these Word elements are to be processed By default these three element categories are ignored This means that during check in to Across they are not taken into consideration and are therefore not available in Across as information This reduced use of resources has a positive effect on the work with Across as the documents are leaner and can be processed and edited faster In this example the prefilled elements do not need to be customized If you want to edit one of these elements select it and click Edit Subsequently you can determine how the element is to be processed and displayed in crossDesk User Manual Across Step by Step 63 3 Project Management with Across Creating and Customizing Document Settings Templates Customize Word 2007 2013 Setti
276. nd from Star Transit starting on page 276 The TTX TRADOStag format is an XML based format of the Trados TagEditor In addition to the translation units in two languages the bilingual TTX files also contain information on the respective context This information is used to determine context matches Further information on context matches is available in chapter 6 1 3 of the user manual Across at a Glance User Manual Across Step by Step 145 What is Glo aag crossTank Import Wizard 5 cross Tank Importing Translation Memories Glossary files glo are text files with a set data structure Every line contains a source text segment and one or more target text segments Source text segments and target text segments are separated from each other by tabs Information on exporting translation memories in the GLO format from Passolo is available from page 277 The crossTank Import Wizard helps you to import your existing TM databases and assign them to the respective languages and subjects in cross Tank Before importing translation memories to crossTank we recommend optimizing the number and sentence detection settings for the languages to be imported For example if the definitions of the number formats in Across correspond to the number formats in the translation memory to be imported the numbers will be identified correctly during the import resulting in better and more consistent data You can find these settings
277. nd the project manager of the package Click Next gt User Manual Across Step by Step 101 3 Project Management with Across crossGrid y crossGrid Retrieve Wizard 5 Select project manager and workflow Hil ralt n a Master Server Across Systems GmbH Name Translation Unit EMEA Description Manager Default Supervisor v ceee wens canes Hep 8 The tasks contained in the package are listed Select the task you want to retrieve by enabling or disabling the respective checkboxes Then click Next gt y crossGrid Retrieve Wizard Involved Tasks Acton Tas Project Document Total Add new task Fact sheet_Across featu Across f 831 words _ Select Al Deselect Al Invert Selection smak meas an Hep 9 The download of relevant data begins 3 crossGrid Retrieve Wizard Transmitting data 3 by Action Remaining time Total time Bi Download package Cancel ST Not available Not available GWU import Cancel SM Not avaiable Not available E crossTank import export Cancel MM Not avaiable Not available Py crossTem import export Cancel Not available Not available User Manual Across Step by Step 102 3 Project Management with Across crossGrid Please note that due to technical reasons you cannot work in crossDesk while downloading or importing crossGrid packages 10 Now you can confirm or Reject the delegated crossGr
278. nder the list of documents In Across a workflow describes the sequence of work steps or procedures that are processed successively in the form of tasks The simplest workflow the Translation workflow merely consists of a translation task Other workflows may contain the downstream correction of the translation or the upstream terminology work in the form of term extraction and term translation The project workflow should always be selected carefully and in coordination with the customer In this context the document type the utilization purpose and the requirements for the translation quality are some of the aspects that should be taken into consideration If the quality requirements are high greater emphasis may need to be put on the correction and review of the translation and the consideration and use of the QM criteria User Manual Across Step by Step 45 3 Project Management with Across Creating Projects 11 Click Next gt after having selected the workflow y Project Wizard Ea Select workflow templates fiery Assigned workflow templates Document Workflow GY Across features_EN docx None Documents Across features_EN docx Workflow template None Advanced EN 15038 Standard External Editing Terminology work and transiation Terminology work translation and correction Translation Translation and correction Translation review correction Cancel Hei
279. nding checkboxes to select the language combination for which you want to export the crossTank entries Then click Next gt E crossTank Export Wizard x Select languages to export E List of existing translations Source language Target language Number of trans Export Eng sh Vereinigte Staaten Geman Germany 29 v Select All Deselect All lt back cma He 8 Decide whether you want to use the crossTank entries to be exported as backup or for exchange with other CAT tools The TMX export for the exchange with other CAT tools corresponds to TMX version 1 4 The TMX backup however corresponds to TMX version 1 3 and contains further information and attributes pertaining to the stored database entries of your Across installation which are needed for the correct mapping when re importing the data Therefore the TMX backup file can often be considerably larger than the TMX files exported for exchange with other CAT tools Enter a location and a name for the TMX file You can also select a location via Browse and assign a name for the file to be exported Click Save to confirm the information User Manual Across Step by Step 159 5 crossTank Exporting Translation Memories crossTank Export Wizard Choose file name Please select an option TMX Backup _ TMX Export for Translation Memory Exchange with other CAT Tools Target file C TMX tmx_export tmx Browse Export Rich Translati
280. nfo Select the entry to which you would like to add the term to be imported Determine what is to be done with the information available for the term Select one of the following four options Use new definitions and properties The definitions and properties of the term to be imported will be adopted and those of the existing term will be dropped Use existing definitions and properties The definitions and properties of the existing term will be adopted and those of the term to be imported will be dropped Merge new and existing definitions and properties Both the definitions and the properties of the term to be imported and of the existing term will be adopted If the properties to be merged are values of data categories that may only occur once you can use an option to additionally determine whether the existing value or the new value is to be used Manual merge Using the More options gt gt you can determine for each particular term how the terms to be imported are to be processed In addition detailed information will be displayed User Manual Across Step by Step 212 Log file TBX vs CSV 6 crossTerm Exporting Terminology g Already existing entries Es isti tri terms you want to inser New term s LI ficetle shoelace O Add as new entry Merge with existing entry Manual merge Entry definitions summary New entry definitions count 0 Selected entry definitions count 1 Show
281. ng Documents in Across Quick Translate 5 After the check in procedure has been completed crossDesk opens automatically and you can now begin translating the document in the usual manner Information on translating documents in crossDesk is available in chapter 5 3 of the user manual Across at a Glance and in the step by step instructions starting on page 116 y Across Language Server v6 0 59795 _en Sonja Wagner crossDesk Document translation Software localization with Across_EN docx lt TEMPORARY PROJECT gt o File View Tools Help HH EE SEI e mT OBS lt gt S6S8SG8GS8000P RA BHEL ZRARAAB Crossview a JESF A crossTerm a x Tea Vv 0 d A r a z i No results found W Software localization with Across_EN doc Localizing E Software with z abo Across Oberfl chen mit Across Localizing Software with Across a A Spona localiza Seamlessly integrated localization of Nahtlos integrierte Lokalisierung von UD Feir aiir ater laia software and corresponding Software und korrespondierenden B To minimize expenses and documentation Dokumenten 5 Louch Op Language a Software needs to be localized not only for the S 5 Standard iN renne application as such but also for machine controls i 5 i Standard Windows diagnostic devices etc In all cases the contents 5 Microsol NET ERR of the user interface are found in various I Microsoft NET resour
282. ng different from that used in the source document goeeeeessssseeesseeeceeeessecesessseeesseseeeesessecesessseeeesssg 4 Select the target language s for which you would like to edit a style Then click Next gt User Manual Across Step by Step 79 3 Project Management with Across Creating and Editing Styles y Style Wizard Ea Select document languages Te Documents Document type Target Language Select Across features_EN docx oF Word 2007 2013 German Germany ia v Across features_EN docx Word 2007 2013 French France z Select Al Unselect All Next gt Cancel Help 5 Select Edit an existing original style for use by your target document and then click Next gt y Style Wizard Ez Select Style Wizard mode Te Use the Style Wizard to Create a new style template for your target document goceeescceccesssoccecessoooecscsecooecssoceccssscoeecessooseesoosecoesssesecossooecesseseosessseocooeesooseocesssecosessoooeeososeoeossseeceessosocessesossosssseseosssea Lomme a a A a A A ae Across features_EN docx Word 2007 2013 LatinT empiate German Germany French France German Germany French France lt ack cma Hw 6 The existing style with the styles and settings it contains appears Under Style or Document you can select the style or document for which you would like to make changes Under Style properties all the fonts that are contained in the style are listed Select th
283. ngs ACROSS_HIDDEN ACROSS LOCKED ACROSS Placeable_ ACROSS Placeable_P Image Object Document property 3 Apart from the existing elements new elements can be added to a template Usually the easiest way to do this is to import the document to be translated in the document settings template by means of the Load button In this way all styles contained in the document are written to the document settings template for quick and easy editing Customize Word 2007 2013 Settings Add Edit gus m i Name a Mode a ACROSS_HIDDEN Hide ACROSS LOCKED Lock ACROSS_Placeable_G Read Only ACROSS Placeable_ Lock Image Ignore Object Ignore Document propert Ignore Normal heading 1 heading 2 Default Paragraph Font List Paragraph Adresses 2 8 gt 8 8 5 EEan Alternatively you can manually add a new element to the template To do this click New and enter the name of the element However please note that the name must precisely correspond to the name of the style in the Word document 4 Selecta style in this example Addresses and click Edit Under Type determine how the style is to be processed and displayed As the paragraphs with this style are to be invisible to the translator select hidden Confirm the settings by clicking OK 3 Add ES User Manual Across Step by Step 64 3 Project Management with Across Creating and Customizing Documen
284. nguages 6 5 Source Language Target Language ES english BB German New Propertie Delete lt Back cana He 7 Select of the user group s for which the crowd is to be created e g a crowd of translators and or correctors in this example a crowd of translators To do this double click the desired group s or select it them and click the gt button Click Next gt to continue y Group Wizard EJ Only members of the involved groups can belong to the user crowd 5 Group restriction Not involved groups amp Involved groups S Across Language Portal Sol amp Transiators amp Correctors amp crossAnalytics kr crossAPI keri crossConnect amp crossTerm Web read wnite lt fer Linguistic Supply Chain Man fer Project Managers KA Reviewers amp Supervisors S Terminologists lt Back Next gt Cancel Help 8 Select the users to be included in the crowd Only the users mapped to the respective languages in the user settings in this example English gt German are offered Moreover the users must belong to the respective user groups in this example the user group Translators The users must be members of all user groups allocated to the crowd Therefore for a crowd of translators and correctors only users that are members of the user group Translators and of the user group Correctors will be offered for selection For selecting the users double click the desired users one after another or select t
285. nize v New folder J v inn amp Local Disk C Name Date modified Type Bi_Test d Congree d Demo Data P inetpub J Install MSOCache D PerfLogs Program Files id Program Files x86 uf MultiTerm_Sample xml 4 16 2009 1 59PM XML File ProgramData Projects J sources B temp P Terminology k TMX D z 5 File name MultiTerm_Sample xml v All Files txt xml M 6 Subsequently you can choose other import settings al crossTerm Import Wizard Select file to import q Select file to import C Terminology MultTerm_Sample xmi Browse Select import mode Import with user interaction C Import without user interaction all questionable entries will be stored to a TMX TBX file Browse File with additional properties XDT C Terminology MultiT erm_Sample xdt Browse If there is different structure information in the XDT and XML file use the structure of the XDT file Information from the XML file that does not comply with this structure wall be lost preccscccccssecssecsocescecssesosesscesees R ecccecccceccccsccecccosccoceccsecccees ses ceee neas coe Hep First select the mode with which you want to import the terminology file You can run the import with or without user interaction In the mode without user interaction all ambiguous terminology entries that would require interaction e g when importing homographs are saved to a separate TBX file These terminology entries can la
286. nja Wagner Settings have been changed 4 22 2014 Sonja Wagner Last assignment for project Fact s 4 22 2014 Sonja Wagner Last assignment for language Ger ee 0K cones 3 8 Exporting and Importing Projects 3 8 1 Exporting Projects to Project Files The following step by step instructions show how to export projects from Across by storing them outside Across in the form of project files The Export Projects Wizard assists you in storing projects outside Across in the form of project files The project files are stored as ARA files This proprietary Across file format serves the export and subsequent re import of Across projects The ARA files contain information on the respective projects such as the project attributes and the source and target documents The project files do not contain crossTank or crossTerm entries These can easily be exported via the Across export functions 1 You can start the Export Projects Wizard via the menu item gt gt File gt gt Export Project Using the module bar on the left side you can switch to the Projects module via gt gt Projects gt gt Projects orto the Tasks module via gt gt Projects gt gt Tasks Subsequently select the project you want to export to a file and click the right mouse button in order to open the context menu Select the item Export to file in order to start the Export Projects Wizard User Manual Across Step by Step 87 19 3 Project Management wi
287. no longer fully apply Export template Click Save export template to create a template with the settings you selected for the export and a file extension export If you want to export the same data or other data with the same entry structures and data categories later on you can use the template for this purpose see step 4 In this way the respective settings will be pre configured in the Export Wizard reducing or eliminating the need for manual adjustments Click Export to start the export of the crossTerm entries crossTerm Export Wizard EJ Specify additional export options r Select additional export options greeeecccceeeeesosoeeeessoeeeesossocesscsoseesessoseseessoocesesseseecesosesceesoscesessssoeesssssseessssoseesesseseesesssoeesessseessesoseseeesoseecessssseesssssseeesssoseesessss Save export template lt Back cance He 12 The export of the crossTerm entries begins If there are no terms to be exported due to languages and or filters selected a corresponding message will be displayed In this case click OK and start the export with adjusted language and filter settings anew User Manual Across Step by Step 224 6 crossTerm Creating User Defined Filters fy crossTerm Manager EA A No terms or entries can be exported with the selected filter options 13 Upon completion of the export click Finish crossTerm Export Wizard Specify additional export options a Select additional ex
288. nology database or parts of it in local file This wizard also allows you to define filter criteria and or languages in order to restrict the export to the relevant crossTerm terminology gocsccococssossoososesosescescossocscocsossosososesosocososossosea KocscossoosccceossceccoososscoosecccosseccccosoecoseseostioccoseoS lt Bed a Heb 2 Once the wizard has started click Next gt 3 Select the CSV format as export format and click Next gt E crossTerm Export Wizard Select export file format ON Format Description b CSV export Export terminology to CSV TBX TBX export Exports terminology to a TermBase eXchange TBX file lt Baci Help User Manual Across Step by Step 219 6 crossTerm Exporting Terminology 4 Enter a location and a name for the CSV file If you prefer you can select a location via Browse and assign a name for the file to be exported Click Save to confirm Export template If you created an export template during a previous export See step 11 you can also select it now To do this click Browse select the template with the file extension export and click Open Use an export template only for another export of the same data as during the creation of the export template or for an export of other data with the same entry structures and data categories Then click Next gt Cc crossTerm Export Wizard Ea Select a file r Destination file C
289. ns module User Manual Across Step by Step 30 Relation Wizard pg 2 Administering Across Creating Relations y Across Language Server v6 0 59795_en Sonja Wagner Relations ES File View Tools Help O EGF ndg 2 crossBoard Relations ax Marketing Name Address City E mail Default project mana j Projects gt m gt z nical Documentation Administration Software 2 Technical Documentation Groups New Properties Delete amp BA Project ID Name Documents Status Deadline Description Profiles Relations Properti Languages v Eonts Ready CAP NUM SCRL 2 Click New below the pane on the upper right to start the Relation Wizard which will assist you in creating a new relation You can also run the Relation Wizard without being in the Relations module To do this click the icon in the wizard toolbar 3 Once the wizard has started click Next gt y Relation wizard Welcome to the Relation Wizard 2 This wizard lets you create a new relation description goeeecesessoceeeseceoceeeessocesesssooeesesosceessseceseesssseeessg 4 The Relation properties dialog box opens In the Main tab enter the name and if applicable the web address of the relation User Manual Across Step by Step 31 2 Administering Across Creating Relations 3 Relation properties EA Main Primary contact Secondary contact Addr
290. ns indicating that the desired tasks have been assigned appear Click 9 The view returns to the Tasks module All desired tasks have been assigned fy Across Language Server v6 0 59795_en Sonja Wagner Tasks File View Tools Help 6G a aS a crossBoard Tasks ae ig k7 FA Project Document Assigned to Status Progress Words Deadline Project ID Projects All A Be Factsheet Acro Across features ES p EE g Matt Jefferson _Unconfirm _ 0 828 5 1 2014 4 O Bg All JA Factsheet_Acro Across features ES p Mi S9 Christan Ziegler Unconfirm 0 828 5 1 2014 4 fim Display texts 3 crossWash_v4 dtxml Ii Fact sheet_Across features _ M Across features_EN docx French France German Germany E Fact sheet_Localization i Software localization with Acrc lt gt Assignment Workflow Available users for selected task Name Rating Source language Target language Relay lang C Sonja Wagner 8 Unknown EJEnglish Vereinigte BiGerman Germany Matt Jefferson pi 8 Unknown E Engish Vereinigte BliGerman Germany C Christian Ziegler 8 Unknown EJEnglish Vereinigte M German Germany Quality C Christian Ziegler D 8 Unknown llFrench France MiGeman Germany ES p C p m Management Styles Assign Task Unassign Task More gt gt Administration lt gt Ready cap Num scrL User Manual Across Step b
291. nterface are found in various finden sich die Inhalte der Software informational literature regarding the Oberfl che in unterschiedlichen Product produktbezogenen Informationen Edit match Remove match Join all Save matches Cancel Help User Manual Across Step by Step 143 Content corrections 5 crossTank Aligning Translations The border of the end points of the edited pair of paragraphs changes from red to green The translation units contained in the paragraph pair will thus be transferred to crossTank after the alignment is completed The following icons are used when matching paragraphs Icon red box and red dot L gray boxes i i red boxes i i green boxes J Function No matching paragraph found in the target or source document for the paragraph in the target or source document The sentences contained in the paragraph will not be transmitted to crossTank after the alignment is completed The matching within the paragraph pair has been carried out correctly The translation units contained in the paragraph pair will be transferred to crossTank after the alignment is completed The matching within the paragraph pair could not be carried out correctly The translation units contained in the paragraph pair will not be transferred to crossTank after the alignment is completed For this the matching needs to be manually post processed The matching w
292. number of sentences in the source and target segments e g 2 sentences in the source segment and 1 sentence in the target segment you can determine that e during the import process a dialog box will appear in which manual corrections can be made to the respective translation unit e the sentences are merged to one segment e the translation unit is discarded and is not transferred to crossTank User Manual Across Step by Step 150 5 cross Tank Importing Translation Memories 10 After selecting the needed settings click Next gt 11 The categories and attributes of the translation memory file are matched up with mapped to the corresponding categories and attributes that are available in Across Across tries to detect the correct mappings automatically The rest of the mapping must be done manually To do this select the column of an attribute e g the TMX attribute creationid which stands for the user who created the translation memory entries and then use the drop down list in the column to the right to assign the respective Across attribute e g Created by The creation and change time date and time of TM entries is adopted from the TMX file during the import If the TMX file does not contain this kind of information the import time will be set for the TM entries crossTank Import Wizard ea Map TMX attributes to Across attributes aE The TMX file contains attributes Please specify to which Across propertie
293. o assign tasks The documents to be processed within the scope of the project appear in the right pane Enable the checkbox es of the document s for which you want to assign tasks Continue in the same way with the other projects and documents Then click Next gt User Manual Across Step by Step 51 3 Project Management with Across Multiple Task Assignment y Multi Assignment Wizard EJ Step 1 of 2 Project fist Document ist All projects All Documents DRE E Across features_EN docx 7 fies Fact sheet_Localization fie Display texts Use relay language Select All Unselect All Dutch Netherlands cma neas conce Hep 5 Select a task on the left side The number in parentheses indicates the number of documents to be processed within the scope of the task Use the respective drop down list on the right to assign the task to a user Proceed in the same way until all tasks are assigned y Multi Assignment Wizard Ea Step 2 of 2 Name Assigned to Ess Document transiation 1 ow Matt Jefferson y R Document transtation 1 gt Hi JZ Document correction 1 gt J Document correction 1 gt I Matt Jefferson Claire Dutreil lt Back cancel Hep 6 Click Finish to complete the task assignment 7 If you assigned tasks to offline users you can now compile the information in a package to be transmitted to the offline users for processing the tasks By activ
294. o the pattern DOMAIN Windows_username To ensure the correct function of the login via Windows authentication do not change the auto inserted user name Click More gt gt and make sure that the option for creating is softkey is activated in order to be able to create a softkey for the new user after creating the user Now click Next gt User Manual Across Step by Step 17 2 Administering Across Creating Users with Windows Authentication iy User Wizard EA Basic infomation 2 First and last name Claire Dutred E mail Claire dutred example com Login Across login Windows login Browse Username WIN CGSAAPE6ELLRD Ciaire Dutred Password Confirm password More gt gt lt Back Cancel Help 7 Online User is automatically preselected as user type Assign the user groups that the new user is to be a member of Select the desired groups in the left pane and click gt You can also assign the user groups by double clicking the respective entries Under Profile you can assign a profile Usually the default profile is preselected y User Wizard Ea Type of user and group memberships AA Online User ma Online users can use the entire spectrum of Across they are only restricted by their group s user nights amp Offline User Offline users have imited possibilities They can only use the crossWAN load or crossWAN mai mode to access Across Offline users cannot perform project management
295. oad or import them as a CWU file crossWAN classic In this case the project manager in charge should provide this file to you on a suitable data medium e g a CD or a USB stick by e mail or as an FTP download Further information on retrieving crossWAN tasks is available in the interactive tutorial Starting to Work as an External Translator in the video library at http www across net en knowledge base video library The Retrieve Task Wizard helps you to import the data you require to work on your task Please note that you must be assigned the user type Offline user in Across to be able to export tasks as outlined in the step by step instructions below 1 Start the Retrieve Task Wizard e g by clicking the icon in the Across toolbar or via the menu item gt gt File gt gt Retrieve Tasks When you log on as a crossWAN load or crossWAN classic user for the first time the Retrieve Task Wizard is automatically started and does not need to be started manually User Manual Across Step by Step 243 7 crossWAN Working Offline via the Internet Retrieving crossWAN Tasks ty Retrieve Task Wizard Ey Retrieve tasks The Retrieve Task Wizard allows offline users to request data packages previously created by the project manager from the Across Server These packages are transferred either by directly downloading them from the server crossWAN load or by importing files received by e mail or ona data carrier
296. of entries or terms that already exist in crossTerm will be overwritten with the respective properties of the entries or terms from the TBX file Properties of the entries or terms that already exist in crossTerm that are not contained in the TBX file or that have not been mapped to any corresponding property in crossTerm will be deleted Entry properties include definitions images or subject information in contrast term properties include the term type the part of speech or the grammatical gender of terms lf the user of the entries or terms to be imported has not been mapped to any Across user the Across user who performs the import will automatically be used as user in cross Term However the date from the import file will always be used as modification date The details of the entries or terms that exist in crossTerm will always be used for the author and creation date Example In crossTerm there is an entry that contains a definition and that has been assigned the General subject The TBX file contains an entry with the same GUID that does not contain any definition and that has been assigned the Automotive technology Subject After the import the crossTerm entry will be assigned the Automotive technology subject The definition will be removed as the entry in the TBX file does not contain any definition e gnore entry term properties of the TBX file The properties of the entries or terms that already exist in crossTerm
297. og file contains detailed information on the imported terminology data and on their processing e g information on the successful import of entries and terms and if not imported information on why the import did not take place Further information on log files is available in chapter 7 12 4 of the user manual Across at a Glance Then click Next gt 7 Now the language mapping takes place The languages and sublanguages of the terms from the import file are assigned to the languages and sublanguages in Across Click the corresponding language in the Languages column to map the desired language Select a language from the drop down list Proceed in a similar way to map sublanguages Continue until all languages and sublanguages you want to import are mapped The languages from the import file that were not mapped to any language will not be imported Then click Next gt al crossTerm Import Wizard Map languages R 4 Please specify the mapping of the import languages to Across languages Note Al entnes that are not allocated wil not be imported Import language Across language Sublanguage pececcccececcsocecccoscoccecccocecosooseccecssoececcossococcoceccocccooseccossos ccoseccocecocseccescosececsssoocecossscoesocosecccocooceccossoceccocsccoceccoscecessosecccosscececocoscoccososececssosceccessoceccocsecocecoeseccesssseceeg en US Eng sh Vereinigte Staaten de de German Germany Beck cma Hep 8 Inthe following step the
298. ogress Status Finish Description Projects All A m2 Display texts 0 of 0of1 docum 4 25 2014 QO lim Display texts 3 Fact sheet_Locali Marketing 0 Oof Qoftdocum 5 1 2014 W Software localization with Across_ Cockpit New Properties Delete Move to Archive Check Out Reports Update Name Language Progress Status Deadline Description Kay Software locakzato 0 0 of 394 words 0 of 1 language 4 17 2014 Quality Management Styles Add Document Properties Delete Update C Administration lt gt Ready CAP NUM SCRL im 2 Click New below the project pane on the upper right to start the Project Wizard which Project Wizard will help you set up a project We If you prefer you can also start the Project Wizard from the menu bar via gt gt File gt gt New project or by clicking the Bm icon in the default toolbar of Across e Additionally you can supplement the Dashboard with a dashlet for opening the Project Wizard gt Further information on the Dashboard is available in chapter 2 4 2 of the user manual Across at a Glance 3 Once the wizard has started click Next gt User Manual Across Step by Step 41 3 Project Management with Across Creating Projects y Project Wizard Creates a new project ES Use the Project Wizard to create new projects and define elements such as source documents and target languages task assignments due dates and QM Use the Alignment Wizard to import
299. oject Please note that you need to have the appropriate rights in order to update documents The default setting assumes that the project manager is responsible for updating projects If a folder containing the source documents to be translated was selected during the project setup documents that were added to the folder later on are not detected automatically during an update and must therefore be updated separately Before updating a document in Across you should clarify the effects on the billing with the assigned translators Especially the deletion of paragraphs in the course of a document update must be taken into consideration Further information on the reporting in the case of document updates is available in chapter 10 2 2 of the manual Across at a Glance 1 Click the module bar on the left to switch to the Projects module via gt gt Projects gt gt Projects Updating a document Start by selecting the project and then the document that is available in an updated version Updating several documents Start by selecting the project and then the documents that are available in updated versions 2 To select several documents hold down the Ctrl key and select the desired documents in the document view Updating a project Select the project you would like to update User Manual Across Step by Step 267 9 Special Workflows and Tasks Updating Documents fy Across Language Server v6 0 59795_en Default Supervisor Proj
300. ojects S Correctors S crossAnah tics crossAnalytics Er crossAnalytics Administration ry nae S crossAPI crossAPI ry lt a Sa crossConnect crossConnect 2 ee a ee SacrossTerm Web read only anonymous crossTerm Web with read only anonymous access 2 crossTerm Web read ned gi S crossTerm Web read write crossTerm Web with read write access AA 2 Linguistic Supply Chain Managers Sa tingusic Supply Chain Managers Linguistic Supply Chain Managers T S PM Group A EME S Project Managers Sa Project Managers Project Managers S Reviewers S Reviewers Reviewers S Supervisors Sa Supervisors Supervisors amp Terminologists amp Terminologists Terminologists y AA amp Translators Groups New Properties Delete amp AA v Name PM Last login Login state E mail Profiles Relations Languages Add Remove Propertie Message Send E ma Fonts lt gt Ready CAP NUM SCRL To be able to use new groups created in Across for assigning tasks they first need to be integrated in the various workflows To do this switch to the Workflow module select the workflow then the task to be performed by the new group and then click Properties Confirm the message that follows with OK and switch to the Assignable Groups tab Now select the new group in the left of the window and then click gt in order to add it to the assignable groups Now click OK to accept the changes From now on the newly created group can be selected for assigning tasks You can now con
301. omatically after check in Minimize Linked objects If a document e g a Word file contains linked objects such as images you can decide during the check in process whether the linked objects are to be retained as such or embedded User Manual Across Step by Step 47 3 Project Management with Across Creating Projects The document Across doc contains linked objects If you want to see the objects e g images in crossDesk during translation please select Embed linked objects Please note that during check out the embedded objects wil NOT be reverted to linked Please select one of the following check in methods J Document Conversion A R If the linked objects are embedded they become part of the document These objects remain embedded also after the translated document has been checked out If the links are retained the objects continue to be linked to the external storage location The links are retained also after the translated document has been checked out For information about linked and embedded objects please refer to the documentation of the respective applications e g Microsoft Word 14 Upon completion of the check in process the view automatically switches to the Tasks oO D module in which tasks can be assigned to the respective users Tasks module If you already assigned tasks in the Project Wizard continue with step 1
302. ome of the criteria are mandatory These are displayed in the Required column If at least one of these criteria is not fulfilled you must first correct all fields in question Subsequently you can finish the task fy Finish task All paragraphs of the following task have reached a final state Project Fact sheet_Localization Document Software localization with Across_EN docx Source language English Vereinigte Staaten Target language German Germany Task Document translation QM check summary Mandatory Criterion Y Errors Ignored Spel check 57 0 Identical punctuation check 5 0 Bounding spaces check 3 0 Consistent capitalization 2 0 First capitalization 10 0 Format style sequence check 1 0 Format style usage check 1 0 What would you like to do Preececeescsecscesscnesccescesseses Neccccccesccesccessceescoseceeseses Store Finished Translations to crossTank Continue the task Remind again after 1 minute If you would like to finish the task now select the option Finish task You can also determine whether the translation should be saved in crossTank Generally it is recommended to enable the storing of translations to crossTank This ensures that all translations with corresponding attributes will be again transferred to cross Tank User Manual Across Step by Step 121 4 Translating and Correcting Documents in Across Translating Documents 11 12 If you prefer to f
303. ompiled the package is made available for download by the Trusted Server Using the button crossGrid classic OUT you can also create a GWU file Grid Working Unit You should provide this file to the project manager on Trusted Server side on a Suitable data medium e g a CD or a USB stick or as an FTP download The crossGrid Delegation Wizard and the crossGrid Package Wizard assist you in delegating packages from your Across Server to a Trusted Server and transmitting the respective data General information on crossGrid is available in chapter 4 8 of the user manual Across at a Glance The connection and communication between the Across Servers that are linked by crossGrid are secured by Server Certificate Package files SCP files Please note that these files need to be exchanged outside Across for example by e mail and imported to Across via gt gt Tools gt gt System Settings gt gt General gt gt crossGrid prior to connecting the Servers Further information on importing SCP files is available in the part on the crossGrid settings in chapter 3 11 2 of the user manual Across at a Glance Please consult the Administrator Manual for information on generating SCP files Please note that you need to have the appropriate rights in order to delegate packages By default the project manager is designated for this type of task User Manual Across Step by Step 93 3 Project Management with Across crossGrid Ao 1
304. on Memory information Export context information v Export usage history information Save export settings lt ack conc Fe 9 Subsequently determine whether the TMX file you want to export is to contain Rich Translation Memory information In this case formatting data inline elements and other characters will also be exported Further information on the Rich TM is available in chapter 6 1 1 of the user manual Across at a Glance By default this option is enabled However if you want to import the exported TMX file to other CAT tools it may be good to disable the option e g for Trados Workbench prior to version 7 0 Additionally you can determine whether the exported crossTank entries should contain context information In this case every translation unit is exported together with the information on preceding and following segment In addition you can select whether crossTank usage history information is to be exported In this way information on how often and when crossTank entries were used in a translation last time will be exported Further information on crossTank usage history is available in chapter 6 1 3 of the user manual Across at a Glance Finally you can click Save export settings to create a template with the file extension tmexport which contains the settings you selected for the export Currently the use of export templates is only possible for TMX exports via th
305. on on auto adjustments is available in chapter 6 1 4 of the user manual Across at a Glance Then click Next gt 7 The selected file is parsed i e the file is read out and analyzed Activate the respective checkboxes to select the languages whose translation units you want to change Click Next gt User Manual Across Step by Step 148 5 cross Tank Importing Translation Memories ff crossTank Import Wizard Select language to import Select languages to import Language name Sentence count English Vereinigte Staaten 29 Geman Germany 29 Finished Select all en Net Cancel Hg Import iv iv Deselect all Help 8 Now the language mapping takes place The languages and sublanguages of the translation units from the import file are assigned to the languages and sublanguages in Across Click the corresponding language in the Languages column to map the desired language Should a language not be recognized go to the column Across languages and click in the row with the language you wish to map Proceed in a similar way to map sublanguages Continue until all languages and sublanguages you want to import are mapped The languages from the import file that were not mapped to any language will not be imported Then click Next gt E crossTank Import Wizard Map languages Language mapping Import language Across language Sublanguage English Vereinigte Staaten English Vereini
306. on with crossWeb General information on crossWeb and reviewing translations is available in the chapters 9 1 and 9 2 of the manual Across at a Glance For working in the crossDesk Web we recommend using MS Internet Explorer version 9 0 or 10 0 For using crossWeb at least 1 GB RAM 2 GB and more recommended is required In addition a screen resolution of at least 1024 x 768 pixels 4 3 format or 1366 x 768 16 9 format in full screen mode F11 key is needed Please note that for reviewing translations with crossWeb you need an online license your Across username and possibly a password Furthermore you need the HIT TP address of the Across Server If necessary contact your system administrator or the Across supervisor to obtain the required access data Moreover you must have the needed rights By default the user group reviewers is intended for the review of translations Please also note that the following example has been condensed and simplified in order to provide an initial impression of the review of translations with crossWeb 1 Open your computer s Internet browser and enter the address http server P address crossWeb If the Server uses an encrypted connection enter https server P address crossWeb Replace server P address with the IP address of the Across Server User Manual Across Step by Step 260 8 crossWeb for Browser Based Work with Across Reviewing Translations with crossWeb 6
307. onding data category does not exist in Across you can create it using the crossTerm settings button Note All information of CSV data categones that are not mapped to Across data categories gets lost CSV data category Type Across data category E Gens Term data category Grammatical gender v cack ama He 18 If you have assigned picklists in the course of the previous mapping you need to map the individual values from the columns of the CSV file to the Across values gender information of the German terms in our example Data category values that are not mapped to any Across data category value will not be imported Click crossTerm Settings to open the crossTerm settings and if necessary add a li value of a data category in Across Then click Next gt al crossTerm Import Wizard Map picklist values r Please specify the mapping of CSV pickist values to Across pickiist values Note All information of CSV data categones that are not mapped to Across data categones gets lost CSV pickist CSV value Across pickist Across value B Term Genus f Grammatical gender feminine v B Term Genus Grammatical gender neuter EE crossTem settings lt Back cance He 19 The dependencies between individual columns of the CSV file are defined The columns of the CSV file that do not contain any terms but other terminology information Such as attributes are mapped to the respective terms Exampl
308. onsistent ke Heading 1 Alt adaptation of user interfac B special quality assurance In addition the high admini LOKalisierung von Software Oberflachen mit Across Term search FE integrated update function B integration and automatio gt wz X B the ability to expand supp P Thus the integrated concep 7 4K Quick fiter mal r A T T e ae 5 i Search Center 4 x Search for simlar sentences in crossTank N gt Seto X 7 Go mw amp _ E Localizing Software with Across 2 g ae l z 5 3s Lokalisierung von Software Oberflachen mit Across 8 Relations Marketing Ready Translated CAP NUM SCRL Correcting translations in the Correction Mode Click the El icon in the crossDesk toolbar or use the F2 function key to switch to the Correction Mode If the first paragraph to be corrected is free of errors set the editing state to checked D To do this click the corresponding icon in the crossDesk toolbar or use the Alt C shortcut key If you would like to make corrections in this paragraph double click into it to switch to the Edit Mode or use the icon in the crossDesk toolbar or the F2 function key and make the desired changes see above Then switch back to the Correction Mode Once you have corrected the first paragraph move on to the next To do this click the corresponding paragraph or click the icon in the navigation toolbar If you prefer you can al
309. ore Archive mo dule y Across Language Server v6 0 59795_en Sonja Wagner Archive B E File View Tools Help O BE FEJAORAS crossBoard Archive Zx Pal E gt 8 Project ID Name Relation Documents Description Projects All Q m3 Fact sheet_Localiza Marketing 1 Projects _ T pa Fact sheet_Localization W Software localization with Across_ oO oO Tasks Quality Delete Properties Restore Reports Management Name Source Language Description kai Software localization with Across_EN English Vereinigte Staaten Styles crossGrid Archive Administration lt gt Ready 2 Click Restore below the pane on the upper right 3 Click Yes to confirm CAP NUM SCRL User Manual Across Step by Step 114 3 Project Management with Across Restoring Projects from Archive y Across Ea Do you want to restore the project Fact sheet_Localization No 4 The project has now been restored and can now be worked on again in the Projects module User Manual Across Step by Step 115 4 Translating and Correcting Documents in Across Translating Documents 4 Translating and Correcting Documents in Across In this chapter Translating documents see below Correcting translations page 123 Quick Translate page 131 General information on translating and correcting in Across is available in chapter 5 of the user manual Across at a Glance 4 1 Translating Documents
310. ored as ARA files This proprietary Across file format serves the export and subsequent re import of Across projects The ARA files contain information on the respective projects such as the project attributes and source and target documents User Manual Across Step by Step 89 Import Projects Wizard 3 Project Management with Across Exporting and Importing Projects The project files do not contain crossTank or crossTerm entries These can easily be exported via the Across export functions Further information on exporting project files is available in the preceding step by step instructions on page 87 1 Start the Import Projects Wizard via the menu item gt gt File gt gt Import Project 3 Import Projects Wizard lt g 7 a A Use the Import Projects Wizard to restore the projects from the archive files _ Do not show this info again 2 Once the wizard has started click Next gt 3 Click Brows in order to select the project file to be imported fy Import Projects Wizard Choose the projects and their documents 6 5 Export Date Server Export by Archive path Browse Select projects Projects Progress lt Back Cancel 4 Select the project file and click Open User Manual Across Step by Step 90 3 Project Management with Across Exporting and Importing Projects fy Open T di gt Computer gt Local Disk C Projects Export v Search Export
311. ormation on changing the status of crossTank entries is available in chapter 6 5 of the user manual Across at a Glance 5 3 Exporting Translation Memories The following step by step instructions demonstrate how you can easily export cross Tank entries in the TMX format e g to back up your crossTank database The Translation Memory eXchange format TMX format is an exchange format that standardizes the presentation of translation memory content and renders it exchangeable between different tools or translators with a minimum of information loss The crossTank Export Wizard assists you in exporting your existing cross Tank database 1 Start the crossTank Export Wizard In the crossTank Manager you can start the wizard via the corresponding section on the crossTank Manager start page via the icon in the toolbar or via gt gt Tools gt gt Export in the menu bar You can also start the crossTank Export Wizard directly from the Projects module To do this enter the Projects module via gt gt Projects gt gt Projects and selecta document or a target language of a project for which you want to perform a TMX export and select TMX Export in the context menu In this case the filter settings See step 4 are made automatically in line with the project data Once the wizard has started click Next gt User Manual Across Step by Step 156 5 crossTank Exporting Translation Memories crossTank Export Wizard Export transl
312. ot be recognized go to the column Across languages and click in the row with the language you wish to map Proceed in a similar way to map sublanguages Continue until all languages and sublanguages you want to import are mapped The languages from the import file that were not mapped to any language will not be imported Then click Next gt User Manual Across Step by Step 209 6 crossTerm Importing Terminology al crossTerm Import Wizard Map languages q Please specify the mapping of the import languages to Across languages Note Al entnes that are not allocated wil not be imported Import language Across language Sublanguage A deu de German Germany spa es lt None gt lt None gt fra fr lt None gt lt None gt ita t lt None gt lt None gt por pt lt None gt lt None gt hun hu lt None gt lt None gt pol pi lt None gt lt None gt ces cz lt None gt lt None gt rus ru lt None gt lt None gt zho tw lt None gt lt None gt zho cn lt None gt lt None gt jpnjp lt None gt lt None gt kor kr lt None gt lt None gt v lt Back Cancel Help 10 In the following step the mapping of data categories takes place The data categories such as subject part of soeech or gender contained in the import file are displayed and mapped to the corresponding Across data categories In the Across data category column click the row of the data category you would like to assign A drop down
313. ou can define filters in order to limit the changes in the cross Tank database to the desired crossTank entries see 2 Apart from logical operators you can also use groupings and conditions 9 Use the preview function to ascertain how many and which crossTank entries are affected by the selected language and filter settings see 3 10 Now click Next gt 11 Proceed with the explanation of the action you selected Change attributes see below Delete crossTank entries see page 166 Clean crossTank entries with multiple translations see page 167 Splitting multi value attributes in crossTank entries see page 166 Remove sentence duplicates see page 168 Remove sentence duplicates by text see page 168 Remove translation duplicates see page 169 Support action Count sentence duplicates see page 171 Support action Count translation duplicates see page 171 5 4 1 Changing Attributes 5 4 1 1 Changing Attributes Using the action Change attributes you can modify the attributes attrioute values of cross Tank entries e g relations subjects or projects The following changes are possible e Adding attributes Select the action Add Gr and determine the attribute and the attribute value you want to add to the crossTank entries User Manual Across Step by Step 164 5 cross lank cross lank Maintenance E crossTank Maintenance Wizard Choose the attributes to be changed e Deleting
314. out procedure 3 Check Out Wizard Select check out options m MISS x Save to Folder C Users Sales User Documents Projects Browse C Keep structure of directories geeeeececesessscceeeesooeesessooeeesesoceseessssesessessesessssoecessssecesssssesesssssey a a a A Create subfolders for each document C Don t create subfolders Standard language names User defined ending No ending lt back cma Hw 12 After the check out procedure has been completed click Finish fy Check Out Wizard Select check out options mes Export Progress Document Language Progress m Software localization with Acro German Germany B Stoning finished Cancel Help 13 The document has now been converted back to its original format The translation of the document with Quick Translate has now been concluded User Manual Across Step by Step 135 T Saving intermediate states Alignment Wizard 5 cross Tank Aligning Translations 5 crossTank In this chapter Aligning existing translations see below Importing translation memories page 145 Exporting translation memories page 156 crossTank maintenance page 161 General information on crossTank is available in chapter 6 of the user manual Across at a Glance 5 1 Aligning Translations The following step by step instructions demonstrate how you can easily align translations i e how to store existing translations to a t
315. outs Click Next gt y crossTerm Layout Wizard EA Administrative information to display r Entry Term identifier Created by _ Created by _ Creation date Creation date Modified by Modified by Modification date Modification date Index name Created Created Modifie Modified lt ac cma ne 8 Now you can specify the order in which the data categories at entry level are to appear in the new layout Determine whether you want to use the indicated order of the data categories or whether you would like to adjust the order In the latter case activate the corresponding option and adjust the order of the data categories by means of the and icons Click Next gt y crossTerm Layout Wizard EN Define order of entry properties r ccessccececcsseccecescscceceseg occcoccocccccocccccccosossseco C User defined order Properties order Image Subjects Note Definition Relations Projects lt tack cance ne 9 Now you can specify the order in which the data categories at term level are to appear in the new layout Here too determine whether you want to use the indicated order of the data categories or whether you would like to adjust the order In the latter case activate the corresponding option and adjust the order of the data categories by means of the and icons Click Next gt User Manual Across Step by Step 234 6 crossTerm
316. p To change the selected workflow later on enter the Projects module and select the project and the document for which you want to select a different workflow Then click Properties and select the desired workflow in the respective drop down list of the Document tab Please note that a workflow can only be changed as long as no tasks are assigned for this workflow If you have already assigned tasks for the respective document and want to select a different workflow you must first revoke the assigned tasks The tasks to be edited within the project can now be assigned to the desired users To do this click the task you want to assign in the Performer column and select the desired user from the drop down list The assignment of tasks in this step is optional and can be performed later on In this case the tasks must be assigned in the Tasks module see below steps 14 and the following Continue until all the tasks have been assigned and click Next gt y Project Wizard Ea Task assignment a In this step you can assign all tasks of the same type to one user or crossGnd package for one target language Workflow Name Assigned to Translation and corre Document translation gt E Se Christan Ziegler v Translation and corre Document transiation gt Oi Translation and corre 42 Document correction gt Translation and corre Y Document correction O ie Claire Dutreil Matt Jefferson
317. p 105 3 Project Management with Across crossGrid only the crossTank and crossTerm entries in the language combination German English will be transmitted but not e g those in the language combination German French y crossGrid Deliver Wizard Ea Provided Infomation geeeccccccceccccecccssccoccccescocecscccccecscsosecsessesecseseg X ececcccccceccccecceccccocccccccccecccseccccescececcesesceccese lt Upload crossTem Entries Provide user information lt Back Cancel Heip 6 The relevant data are compiled and uploaded to the Master Server or saved to the GRU file yg crossGrid Deliver Wizard Ez rer dae Transmitting data m y f Action Remaining time Total time Buld package Cancel Not available Not available Upload package Cancel Not available Not available Waiting for processed result Cancel i Not available Not available Fain Coa Ha 7 Once task has been transferred or saved click Finish 3 crossGrid Deliver Wizard ET EEE Transmitting data io 7 Acton Remaining time Total time Feiss cma He User Manual Across Step by Step 106 a BA Import Export WAN classic Tasks Wizard 3 Project Management with Across Exporting and Importing crossWAN Tasks 8 Thus the tasks have been fully transmitted to the Master Server or saved to the GRU file Click Report to generate proof of the delivery of the crossGri
318. p instructions will help you understand how you can import crossTank and or crossTerm entries to Across that were transmitted to the Across Server during the translation or editing in the crossWAN load mode or when working on projects with crossGrid OA AA The Import crossTank Term Packages Wizard supports you when importing the entries Please note that you need to have the appropriate rights in order to be able to import crossTank and or crossTerm entries By default the project manager is designated for this type of task Information on project management of cross WAN load tasks is available in chapter 4 12 of the user manual Across at a Glance Information on crossGrid is available in chapter 4 8 of the user manual Across at a Glance If cross Tank crossTerm data packages are available for import when you log in to Across you will be notified accordingly You will only receive messages within the scope of projects you supervise as project manager Click Yes to start the Import crossTank Term Packages Wizard in order to import the data In this case follow the instructions below starting from step 2 3 Across Ea Q You have 2 crossTank Tem offline packages which should be imported Do you want to start Import Wizard now _ Don t show this message again Import 1 To start the Import crossTank Term Packages Wizard select the menu item gt gt Tools crossTank Term gt gt Import crossTank crossTerm Packages Wiz
319. page 225 Creating crossTerm filter sets page 229 Creating user defined layouts page 231 Administration of bibliographic sources with the help of indexes page 237 General information on crossTerm is available in chapter 7 of the user manual Across at a Glance To help you get acquainted with crossTerm the video library at http www across net en knowledge base video library features the interactive tutorial Terminology Work with crossTerm 6 1 Importing Terminology The following step by step instructions will help you to learn how to import legacy termbases in the following formats e BX format official TBX standard and TBX Basic format see page 172 e CSV format character separated data e g from MS Excel see page 181 e Trados MultiTerm data in TXT or XML format see page 195 e TermStar data in MARTIF format see page 206 The following step by step instructions cover the import of termbases with the help of sample data Since the files to be imported can contain different information such as languages text fields and picklist fields there may be differences during the import process 6 1 1 TBX Format The TermBase eXchange format TBX format is an exchange format that standardizes the presentation of terminology databases and renders it exchangeable between different tools or translators with a minimum of information loss Along with the official TBX format there is the TBX Basic format a ligh
320. pboard From here you can use the keyboard shortcut Ctrl V to paste it into another application e g Microsoft Word for further editing Click the icon to save the report as an HTML document User Manual Across Step by Step 180 6 crossTerm Importing Terminology E crossTerm Import Wizard Import progress r Import successful Remaining time 0 00 00 elapsed time 0 21 42 16 Click Finish to complete the TBX import 17 The terminology contained in the TBX file has now been imported to crossTerm and is available for your translation work 6 1 2 CSV Format The CSV format Character Separated Values is a file format in which the data are separated by punctuation such as a comma or semicolon This format is particularly well suited for the simple exchange of terminology tables Any terminology in Excel files can easily be saved as CSV files for import to Across In Excel click gt gt File gt gt Save As and in the next window select CSV in Save as type This file can easily be imported to crossTerm If your terminology contains non Latin characters e g in Cyrillic or Greek script or other special characters you should save the terminology as Unicode text file txt This process creates a CSV file with the file extension txt which automatically uses tabs as separators Subsequently this file can easily be imported to crossTerm The first row of a CSV file may contain column headings with inform
321. pecial Workflows and Tasks Partitioning Documents e As soon as you have selected a document you would like to partition you can use the icon in the toolbar to start the Partition Wizard 3 Once the wizard has started click Next gt 3 Partition Wizard Split translations a A By using the Partition Wizard you can split a large translation task into several parts This usually means having the task completed by several translators simultaneously Afterwards the various parts of the A translation are joined back together into one target document Bac Cancel Hep 4 Now select the desired partitioning To carry out a partitioning within a document manually select Other manual partition and in the document pane on the left select the paragraph s where you would like to insert a partition Click Add gt The inserted partitioning appears in the window on the upper right If you would like a predefined partition for instance two equal partitions select the desired partition The partition you have selected appears in the window on the upper y Partition Wizard Partitioning document m First paragraph Content Translating with Across ae The crossDesk multiformat editoi B The translator s main work e1 S Besides the source and targi S The spell check text length Arecord of the editing state i Last paragraph Words P
322. ped Merge new and existing definitions and properties Both the definitions and the properties of the term to be imported and of the existing term will be adopted If the properties to be merged are values of data categories that may only occur once you can use an option to additionally determine whether the existing value or the new value is to be used Manual merge Using the More options gt gt you can determine for each particular term how the terms to be imported are to be processed In addition detailed information will be displayed y Already existing entries EJ isti tri ne terms you want to inser New term s LI ficetle shoelace C Add as new entry Merge with existing entry Manual merge Entry definitions summary New entry definitions count 0 Selected entry definitions count 1 Show Entry properties summary New entry properties count 0 Selected entry properties count 1 Show Term shoelace New term properties count 0 Selected term properties count 2 Show lt lt Less options _0K step cance 15 After the import you can store the log file on your local machine provided you activated the respective option at the beginning of the crossTerm import wizard see step 6 In addition you can click Show Report to open an overview summarizing the most important data of the import Click the amp icon to print the report Use the icon to copy the report to the cli
323. port options Export entnes completely overrides filter restrictions from previous dialog Save export template Export successful Remaining time 0 00 00 elapsed time 0 00 08 14 The desired crossTerm entries have been exported to the CSV file 6 3 Creating User Defined Filters As all terminology data are stored in a central database it is important to be able to use val search filters for specific search queries e g to limit the search to terms belonging to a particular subject By default Across provides a number of filters referred to as quick filters Additionally user defined filters can be set up for search queries of a more complex or specific nature Creating new filters The following step by step instructions will help you to create user defined crossTerm filters The crossTerm Filter Wizard assists you in creating user defined filters Please note that you need to have the appropriate rights in order to create user defined filters By default the supervisor and the project manager are responsible for creating user defined filters General instructions on using user defined filters are available in chapter 7 5 3 of the user manual Across at a Glance 1 Open the crossTerm Manager and select the menu item gt gt Tools gt gt Manage user defined filters filter sets 2 Click the Add button in the User defined filters tab User Manual Across Step by Step 225 6 crossTerm
324. port template to create a template with the settings you selected for the import and a file extension import If you want to import the same data or other data with the same entry structures and data categories later on you can use the template for this purpose see step 3 In this way the respective settings will be pre configured in the Import Wizard reducing or eliminating the need for manual adjustments Click Import to start the import If you activated the option Check for existing terms and show manual correction dialog in the previous step of the crossTerm Import Wizard and a term to be imported already exists in crossTerm a dialog window will appear 3 Already existing entries EA ne terms you want to insert Newterm s EF abbrechen cancel Add as new entry C Merge with existing entry Existing entnes E Abbrechen ES Cancel ok seo cons In the dialog window you can determine how the term to be imported is to be processed In principle you can first choose whether a new entry with the term to be imported should be created or whether the term should be added to an existing entry To create a new entry select a respective option and click OK To add the term to an existing entry select the respective option A list will display any existing entries terms Any additional data categories and information for an existing entry term e g definitions can be displayed by clicking Show i
325. porting Terminology 12 al crossTerm Import Wizard Map languages g Please specify the mapping of the import languages to Across languages Note Al entnes that are not allocated wil not be imported Import language Across language Sublanguage English EN GB English United Kingdom French FR French France German DE German Germany Spanish ES Spanish Spain International Sort lt tack cance He If no sublanguage is defined for the terms to be imported Across will automatically propose the default sublanguage for the import as set under gt gt Tools gt gt Profile Settings gt gt General gt gt Languages To import the terms in a different sublanguage simply select the desired sublanguage You do not need to import all the languages contained in the file to be imported to crossTerm Just carry out the mapping for the languages that you would actually like to import Only these languages will then be transferred to crossTerm Click Next gt to continue with the import In the next step all other fields will be mapped to the Across data categories Click crossTerm Settings to open the crossTerm settings and if necessary manually create a new data category You can also create missing attributes and or values automatically For this purpose you can select the item lt Create automatically gt from the drop down list of the respective attribute in order to have the attribute along with its values created autom
326. process thoroughly tak allocation of consistent ke adaptation of user interfac special quality assurance In addition the high admini integrated update function integration and automatio the ability to expand supp Thus the integrated concer k Eo oe tm ee BA gt 4 amp complete overview E Q amp Q RAD mmga Fee eG ass English Vereinigte Staaten Project Fact sheet_Localization Relation Marketing Document Software localization with Across_EN docx German Germany Project Manager Sonja Wagner Date 4 22 2014 Localizing Software with Across Lokalisierung von Software Oberflachen mit Across Seamlessly integrated localization of software and Nahtlos integrierte Lokalisierung von Software und corresponding documentation korrespondierenden Dokumenten Software needs to be localized not only for the application as such Software Oberflachen m ssen nicht nur f r Anwendungs Software but also for machine controls diagnostic devices etc In all cases the contents of the user interface are found in various informational literature regarding the product als solches lokalisiert werden sondern auch fiir Maschinensteuerungen Diagnose Gerate etc In allen Fallen finden sich die Inhalte der Software Oberflache in unterschiedlichen produktbezogenen Informationen wieder For example the user interface s error messages correspond with the respective passages in
327. r Wizard License infomation Saison First name Claire Last name Dutred E mail Claire dutred example com Street City Zip Phone Mobile Fax Web Save Softkey E mail Softkey lt Back Cancel Heip 11 The new user profile has been created and is displayed in the list of users y Across Language Server v6 0 59795_en Sonja Wagner Users File View Tools Help O SaFERADORAS os crossBoard sbi amp w v Name PM Lastlogin Login state E ma Projects amp Christian Ziegler S Sonja Wagner fi 4 25 1201 Online sonja wagner example com Administration i Claire Dutreil o Matt Jefferson lt na gt Offline matt jefferson example com ow Default Supervisor amp Helen Parker lt nla gt Offiine helen parker example com amp Denis Girardin amp Denis Girardin lt nla gt Offine denis girardin example com amp Helen Parker SW Default Supervisor fd 4 23 20143 _ Offine OQ zis P care purea ene oftne caire auirea exancie com amp Sonja Wagner amp Christian Ziegler lt nla gt Offiine christian ziegler example com Users Apa New Properties Delete Calendar Message Send E mail Edit Profile rv Source Lan Target Language Subject Rating French General 8 Soe GlFrench Web site 8 DF rench Flyer 8 OF rench Quickstart guide 8 OF rench Manual 8 DF rench GUI 8 OF rench General 8 Relations French Web site 8 OF rench Flyer 8 f lo
328. r and save them as a single translation unit 19 y Sentence Alignment Available sentences Source sentence Target sentence Software needs to be localized not E sien fttdicses missen nicht only for the application as such but nur fir Anwendungs Software als also for machine controls diagnostic solches lokalisiert werden sondern devices etc auch f r Maschinensteuerungen In all cases the contents of the user Diagnose Ger te etc In allen interface are found in various Fallen finden sich die Inhalte der informational literature regarding the Software Oberfl che in duct pro unterschiedlichen Vv Add match Complete matches Edit match Remove match Remove all Join all Save matches Cancel Help Continue until all sentences have been aligned and are contained in the lower pane Then click Save matches fy Sentence Alignment Available sentences Source sentence Target sentence aee Add match Complete matches Software Oberflachen m ssen nicht N Software needs to be localized not only UF fur Anwendungs Software als for the application as such but also for 5Olches lokalisiert werden sondern machine controls diagnostic devices etc auch f r Maschinensteuerungen In all cases the contents of the user Diagnose Ger te etc In allen Fallen i
329. r information on exclusion files is available in chapter 7 13 3 of the user manual gt Across at a Glance Then click Next gt User Manual Across Step by Step 202 6 crossTerm Importing Terminology crossTerm Import Wizard Specify additional import parameters q Select exclusion file MultiTerm_Sample_Exciusion xmi lt Back Next gt Cancel Help 15 Now add other attributes to the termbase you would like to import crossTerm Import Wizard Ea Specify general import parameters q Default values for data categories will be overridden by mapped values Type Data category Value Tem Projects None y Term Relations None v Entry Subjects Catalog v Entry Projects None v Tem Subjects None Entry Term Created by Sonja Wagner y Entry Term Creation date 4 24 2014 Y Check for already existing terms and show manual correction dialog Only for the same relation Only for the same subject Set released state for terms Save import template lt back Cance Hep Please note that the attributes selected in the dialog window will only be added to an entry or term if they were not already assigned in the course of the preceding mapping Example In the dialog window select the Finance subject and start the terminology import Among other things term A and term B will be imported During the preceding attribute mapping the Banking subject was assigned to term A Thus in the
330. r split in sentences as multiple segments with sentence segmentation The selection depends on the segmentation method selected under gt gt Tools gt gt System Settings gt gt General gt gt Segmentation Further information on this subject is available in the part on segmentation in chapter 3 11 2 of the user manual Across at a Glance If you select the option Import crossTank entries with sentence segmentation the following additional options are available Translation units containing the same number of source and target sentences For translation units containing the same number of sentences in the source and target segments e g 2 sentences each in the source and target segments you can determine that e The sentences should be treated as a perfect match meaning that the individual sentences from the source and target segment are put together as sentence pairs e g sentence 1 of the source segment with sentence 1 of the target segment sentence 2 of the source segment with sentence 2 of the target segment etc and saved as separate translation units e during the import process a dialog box will appear in which manual corrections can be made to the respective translation unit e the sentences are merged to one segment e the translation unit is discarded and is not transferred to cross Tank Translation units with a different number of source and target sentences For translation units containing a different
331. ranslation memory In this process the respective segments in the source document and target document are aligned with each other and then transferred to crossTank as translation units The Alignment Wizard will assist you in storing existing translations to crossTank Information on the icons and key sequences available in the Alignment Wizard can be found in the respective chapters in the appendix of the user manual Across at a Glance The following example describes how an existing translation of a document is stored to crossTank To align a source document that has already been checked in with a target document select the project in the project tree of the Projects module the document and the target language for which you want to perform the alignment Then select the Alignment command in the context menu and follow the step by step instructions starting with step 2 After Across has analyzed the source and target documents and aligned the individual segments we recommend checking whether the alignment is correct Especially the alignment of long texts can take some time Thus you can save any intermediate alignment state and open it any time later on An intermediate state can be stored in the manual correction window of the Alignment Wizard Click Save to save the current editing state or Save and close to save the current editing state and close the Alignment Wizard To open a saved intermediate alignment state restart the Ali
332. rder to be able to export crossWAN classic tasks By default the project manager is responsible for this task Information on project management of cross WAN tasks is available in chapter 4 12 of the user manual Across at a Glance 1 Start the Import Export WAN classic Tasks Wizard in the menu bar via gt gt Tools gt gt Import Export Offline Tasks Wizard User Manual Across Step by Step 107 3 Project Management with Across Exporting and Importing crossWAN Tasks gy Import Export WAN classic Tasks Wizard Import Export WAN classic Tasks Wizard iii iim Import Export WAN classic Tasks Wizard Do not show this info again Cancel Help 2 Once the wizard has started click Next gt 3 Select the Export option and in the drop down menu under Offline users select the user who is to be assigned a task as a CWU file In order to be able to select a user he should first be assigned a corresponding task In addition select a location and a name for the CWU file If you prefer you can select a location via Browse and assign a name for the file to be exported Click Save to confirm Then click Next gt iy Import Export WAN tasks wizard EA Select transfer direction 6 5 Please select an action to perform import offline packages from a file or export offline packages to a file C Import CRU file path Offfine user Helen Parker v CWU file path C Projects Offine Tasks HelenP
333. reports page 56 Creating and customizing document settings templates page 60 Creating and editing styles page 75 Finishing projects page 81 Exporting and importing projects page 87 crossGrid page 93 Exporting and importing crossWAN tasks page 107 crossGrid crossWAN page 112 Restoring projects from the archive page 114 General information on project management in Across is available in chapter 4 of the user manual Across at a Glance 3 1 Creating Projects The following step by step instructions will help you to follow a typical project management workflow A project is set up and the project related tasks such as translation and correction are assigned to the corresponding users To create projects with Across refer to the interactive tutorial Creating a Project in Across in the video library on the Across website at www across net en knowledge base video library Please note that you need to have the appropriate rights in order to set up a new project The default setting assumes that the project manager is responsible for setting up projects While you are setting up a project you can check in documents to be translated in Across Use the Alignment Wizard to incorporate existing translation units in crossTank the Across translation memory Information on this topic is available on page 136 The following example assumes that all options are enabled in the Project Wizard settings of the profile
334. res te 4 Fact sheet_Acros Marketing 0 Oof Oofidocum 5 1 2014 Description of Acro gm Fact sheet_Localization Software localization with Across_ Cockpit English Vereinigte Staaten German Germany Projects New Properties Delete Move to Archive Reports Update o o Name Language Progress Status Deadline Description Tasks i Software localizatio 100 394 of 394 wor Finished 5 1 2014 Asp Quality Management Hp Styles Administration lt gt 2 Click Move to Archive under the project pane 3 Click Yes to confirm 3 Across EJ AI current assignments wil be removed when moving the project to the archive Do you want to move the project Fact sheet_Localization to the archive No 4 The project has now been archived If needed archived projects can be easily restored at any time and moved to the Projects module Information on this topic is available on page 114 Please note that the assignment of tasks to Across users is lost when projects are moved to the archive The former assignments can be viewed in the Comments tab of the properties of the archived project User Manual Across Step by Step 86 Export Projects Wizard 3 Project Management with Across Exporting and Importing Projects 3 Project Properties Eg Project Status Comments Reports Settings Attachments Date and time Author Title 4 17 2014 So
335. rflachen m ssen nicht nur fir Anwendungs Software als solches lokalisiert the ability to expand supp werden sondern auch f r Maschinensteuerungen Diagnose Gerate etc In allen Fallen Term search Thus the integrated concep finden sich die Inhalte der Software Oberflache in unterschiedlichen produktbezogenen x on the basis of uniform ce Informationen wieder 4 JE w X B within a consistent workflo Rou t B with maximum consistenc E eS ia lt gt p ees Search Center q x e Search for similar sentences in crossTank La gt g gt 5 gt S252 x T Ag gt 5 Software needs to be localized not only for the application as such but also for machine controls diagnostic devices etc eh B 8 100 Software Oberfl chen m ssen nicht nur f r Anwendungs Software als solches lokalisiert werden sondern auch f r Maschinensteuerungen Diagnose Ger te etc In allen F llen 2 5 finden sich die Inhalte der Software Oberflache in unterschiedlichen produktbezogenen Informationen wieder O o e f 8 Relations Marketing oO Ready Translated CAP NUM SCRL 10 As soon as all paragraphs in the document have been assigned the translated state the translation task is completed The dialog box for finishing the task automatically appears A list of the checked QM criteria shows which criteria have not been met As a rule you can finish a task even if not all the QM criteria have not been met S
336. rious foreign B languages the corporate terminology offers a B significant savings potential Different variants of B specialized terms can easily multiply to hundreds y gt crossTerm Terminology Systa of additional translated words In contrast if a a m O A 32 F7 FFER DCI B 7 U Y x x ace 5 heading 1 Segoe Ul 2 z D Term search sm BEI 0 4 x L 3X Quick fiter v gt a v ry k lt gt Search Center ax z Search for similar sentences in crossTank A gt 7 e8 xo No results found Click here to start Concordance Search crossSearch Concordance Fu Ready CAP NUM SCRL Untouched In this example the first paragraph consists of only one sentence The word Terminology System has a red overscore minology System This indicates that cross Term contains an entry related to this term In order to insert this entry in your translation simply mark the entry in the crossTerm window and click the User Manual Across Step by Step icon The 119 4 Translating and Correcting Documents in Across Translating Documents entry will then be inserted at the current cursor position in the Target Editor This can also be done by double clicking the corresponding entry in the Target Editor Te You can customize the colors that are used to display the crossTerm entries in the Source View by going to gt gt Tools gt gt Profile Settings gt gt crossDesk gt gt Source Context View 7
337. rm rights and profiles to users who are to handle the same type of tasks in Across Apart from the predefined default user groups such as Supervisor Project Manager Translator Correctors etc it is also possible to create user defined groups User crowds are special groups that are composed of Across users Tasks can be assigned to each crowd as a whole The first user to accept a task can process it The other members of the crowd cannot access it The Group Wizard will help you to create new groups as well as new user crowds Please note that you need to have the appropriate rights in order to create new groups and user crowds By default the supervisor is responsible for this task General information on groups and user crowds in Across is available in chapter 3 3 of the user manual Across at a Glance User Manual Across Step by Step 20 aoa Pw Groups module Group Wizard 2 Administering Across Creating Groups and User Crowds 2 3 1 Creating Groups The following step by step instructions explain how to create a new group in Across 1 Use the module bar on the left to switch to the Groups module via gt gt Administration gt gt Gr oups fy Across Language Server v6 0 59795_en Sonja Wagner Groups File View Tools Help O EGEF a ae A gt o EE crossBoard ikii aitas s Across Language Portal Solutions Acr amp Name Description G Projects S Corr
338. roject Click Next gt to start the export to the file User Manual Across Step by Step 88 3 Project Management with Across Exporting and Importing Projects 3 Export Projects Wizard Ea Choose the path where the archive file should be stored 4 5 Export Date 4 22 2014 11 02 Export by Sonja Wagner Archive version 17 Current v Archive path C Projects Export Fact sheet_Localization ara Browse Additional comments for projects Project Fact sheet_Localization Y Comment a e Ca 5 The data are now collected and saved in the project file Once the export has been completed click Finish E Export Projects Wizard Export Projects Wizard G 5 Action Remaining time Total time Make archive Cancel RY Not avaiable Not available a 6 The project file has been generated and saved to the specified location e The exported project file can be imported to Across whenever necessary by means of Mi the Import Projects Wizard You can start the wizard via the menu item gt gt File gt gt Import Project Further information on this topic is available in the following step by step instructions 3 8 2 Importing Projects from Project Files The following step by step instructions show how to import projects to Across that were previously exported from Across in the form of project files The Import Projects Wizard assists you in importing projects to Across in the form of project files The project files are st
339. roject and then the document for which you Styles profile would like to create a new style User Manual Across Step by Step 3 Project Management with Across Creating and Editing Styles y Across Language Server v6 0 59795_en Sonja Wagner Styles File View Tools Help BEG HRaeaefFeathekat crossBoard Styles ai fea E m FY Name Language Progress Deadline Description Projects All A E Across features_e EElengish ve 0 0 of 1656 words 5 1 2014 Q TE fm Display texts I crossWash_v4 dtxml ie Factsheet_Across features Across features_EN docx Cockpit 45 Style Templates Languages PAA fim Fact sheet_Localization S m Software localization with Across_ m e LatinTempiate 7 Quality Styles New Properties Delete ea lt gt Ltn 2 Click Styles below the pane on the upper right to run the Style Wizard to create or Style Wizard edit styles You can also run the Style Wizard outside the Styles module To do this click the na icon in the wizard toolbar Please note that in this case in the first step of the wizard you need to determine a project for which the style should be edited 3 Once the wizard has started click Next gt y Style Wizard Administer templates Te The Style Wizard lets you create or change the templates used to format target documents e g if different standards in the target language require a formatti
340. rrect the translation see step 8 Then click Next gt y Alignment Wizard oR Text pair alignment fm Choose project Project ID Project iu 2 Display texts as Fact sheet_Localization lt back cance He 6 Select the language of the respective document For certain formats e g Word documents in DOC format Across tries to detect the source language automatically Determine the source and target languages of the documents y Alignment Wizard oe Text pair alignment fies Please select a language for Software localization Please select a language for Software localization with Across_EN docx with Across _DE docx Language Language English EE Eng sh E German E German Li French 1 Li French E Dutch Ee Dutch EB taian LB taian em Spanish i m Spanish Vereinigte Staaten v Germany v Set as Source Language _ Set as Source Language gocececccceccecccsececsessooecceseccecccosccccesosceccssoscecescoscoccecsscccessssseoe V Select workfiow templates manually lt Back cance He If you want to select document settings templates activate the corresponding checkbox Document settings templates define how the respective documents will be processed in Across If the checkbox is deactivated the document settings template that is defined under gt gt Tools gt gt Profile Settings gt gt General gt gt Project Wizard Settings gt gt Define document setting
341. rt If you activated the option Check for existing terms and show manual correction dialog in the previous step of the crossTerm Import Wizard and a term to be imported already exists in crossTerm a dialog window will appear 3 Already existing entries Ea terms you want to insert New term s ES abbrechen cancel Add as new entry C Merge with existing entry ng entries E Abbrechen ES Cancel nitinne and nroanerhec In the dialog window you can determine how the term to be imported is to be processed In principle you can first choose whether a new entry with the term to be imported should be created or whether the term should be added to an existing entry To create a new entry select a respective option and click OK To add the term to an existing entry select the respective option A list will display any existing entries terms Any additional data categories and information for an existing entry term e g definitions can be displayed by clicking Show info Select the entry to which you would like to add the term to be imported Determine what is to be done with the information available for the term Select one of the following four options Use new definitions and properties The definitions and properties of the term to be imported will be adopted and those of the existing term will be dropped Use existing definitions and properties The definitions and properties of the existing term wi
342. s None Y Entry Term Created by Sonja Wagner v Entry Term Creation date 4 15 2014 y Check for already existing terms and show manual correction dialog Only for the same relation Only for the same subject Set released state for terms Save import template lt back cance Hee Please note that the attributes selected in the dialog window will only be added to an entry or term if they were not already assigned in the course of the preceding mapping Example In the dialog window select the Finance subject and start the terminology import Among other things term A and term B will be imported During the preceding attribute mapping the Banking subject was assigned to term A Thus in the course of the import term A will be associated with the mapped Banking subject not with the Finance subject selected in this dialog window During the preceding attribute mapping no subject was assigned to term B Thus in the course of the import term B will be associated with the Finance subject selected in this dialog window If you activate the option Check for existing terms and show manual correction dialog in the case of duplicate entries you will be asked whether you would like to combine the information from the two entries After activating this option you can also determine that the manual correction is only to take place if both entries are associated with the same relation or the same su
343. s index values and not as terms Language Index French O German O Select All Deselect All Loading lt Back Cancel Help 9 First select the crossTerm instance to which you want to import the MultiTerm data Information on crossTerm instances is available in chapter 7 3 1 of the user manual Across at a Glance Click Next gt User Manual Across Step by Step 199 6 crossTerm Importing Terminology E crossTerm Import Wizard Ea Instance A g Select instance for import Default Across Server hd Beck ama He 10 Ifthe entries to be imported contain images they will be saved in a separate folder that has to be allocated in this step Click Browse select the corresponding folder and confirm by clicking OK Click Next gt a crossTerm Import Wizard Select image folder j Select attachment folder cremains Cancel Help 11 Now the mapping takes place The languages of the terms from the term file to be imported are mapped to the languages in Across Usually Across detects the correct mappings automatically Should a language not be recognized go to the column Across languages and click in the row with the language you wish to map Should a language not be recognized go to the column Across languages and click in the row with the language you wish to map Continue until all languages you want to import are mapped User Manual Across Step by Step 200 6 crosslerm Im
344. s template will automatically be used The option is grayed out if you selected the option Always ask the project manager in User Manual Across Step by Step 138 5 crossTank Aligning Translations the Project Wizard Settings of the profiles settings for the respective document format By enabling the corresponding check box you can also determine that you would like to select a workflow e g for performing a translation correction after the alignment has been finished If the check box is disabled the workflow set under gt gt Tools gt gt Profile Settings gt gt General gt gt Project Wizard Settings will be used The option is grayed out if you selected the option Always ask the project manager in the Project Wizard Settings Click Next gt If the option Select document settings templates manually is activated continue with step 7 If the option Select workflow templates manually is activated continue with step 8 If you enabled none of the options continue with step 9 7 Next select the document settings templates These define how the respective documents will be processed in Across Select the document s for which you want to determine a template and select the template from the drop down list under the list of documents Click Configure to view and if necessary to edit the selected template or to create a new template Then click Next gt If the option Select workflow templates manually is
345. s the TMX attributes should be mapped TMX text properties are shown for your information They cannot be imported into Across Note All information of TMX attributes that are not mapped to Across properties get lost TMX attribute Type Across attribute B lastuser Pick st property Across user last user v FE Relations Pickist property Relations v storing mode Pickiist property lt None gt changeid attr Pickist property Across note creationid attr Pickiist property Across status Across user created by Across user last user Across user modified by Projects Relations Structure attributes Subjects Users lt back cance Hep 12 Continue until all attributes of the import file are mapped to the respective Across attributes Then click Next gt Please note that information in attributes of the import file that are not mapped to any Across attribute will be lost during the import process 13 Next the mappings that you have made will be specified The attribute values of the translation memory file are mapped to the corresponding attribute values available in Across To do this proceed as you did in the previous step Select the column of an attribute value and then use the drop down list in the column on the right to map the appropriate Across attribute value User Manual Across Step by Step 151 5 cross Tank Importing Translation Memories fa crossTank Import Wizard
346. s with crossWeb 8 crossWeb for Browser Based Work with Across In this chapter Creating projects with crossWeb see below Checking out documents with crossWeb page 258 Reviewing translations with crossWeb page 260 8 1 Creating Projects with crossWeb The following step by step instructions will help you to create a new project in crossWeb To create projects with Across refer to the interactive tutorial Creating a Project in Across in the video library on the Across website at www across net videothek For project management with crossWeb the following browser versions are supported e MS Internet Explorer 8 0 9 0 or 10 0 or e Mozilla Firefox 4 0 or higher For using crossWeb at least 1 GB RAM 2 GB and more recommended is required In addition a screen resolution of at least 1024 x 768 pixels 4 3 format or 1366 x 768 16 9 format in full screen mode F11 key is needed Please note that you need to have the appropriate rights in order to set up a new project The default setting assumes that the project manager is responsible for setting up projects 1 Goto the Projects module using the Projects tab ky My Tasks Projects Tasks Sonja Wagner 371198725 Help Projects A A New Project ID Name Relation Progress Status Finish Description B 2 Display texts 0 0 of 1 document s finis 25 Apr 2014 amp 3 Fact sheet_Localization Marketing 100 in 4 1 of 1 document s finis 01 May 2014
347. ser Manual Across Step by Step creating and editing style templates 75 creating crossTerm filter sets 229 creating crossTerm layouts 231 creating groups 21 creating profiles 27 creating projects 40 253 creating QM lists 34 creating relations 30 creating reports 56 creating user crowds 23 creating user defined filters 225 creating users 8 crossGrid 93 delegating packages 93 delivering delegated packages 104 retrieving delegated packages 99 crossTank maintenance 161 crossWAN 243 crossWAN project management 107 crossWeb 260 delivering crossWAN tasks 246 document settings tempaltes configure conditional XML 69 document settings templates 60 create 60 customize 61 Word document 62 XML document 66 exporting crossWAN tasks 107 exporting projects to files 87 exporting terminology 213 finishing projects 81 importing crossTank Term packages 112 importing crossWAN tasks 110 importing existing translation memories 145 importing projects from files 89 importing terminology 172 multiple task assignment 51 partitioning documents 264 Quick Translate 131 restoring projects from archive 114 retrieving crossWAN tasks 243 review 260 reviewing translations 260 storing existing translations 136 TMX export 156 TMX import 145 translating documents 116 translating updated documents 273 updating documents 267 Style Wizard 75 tasks finish 116 TBX 286 11 Index export 214 import 172
348. slation duplicates crossTank Maintenance Wizard EJ Specify the action you want to perform Pp gt Action Remove translation duplicates v Deletes identical translation units Example source segment A gt target segment B source segment A gt target segment B Options Consider crossTank entnes with different status as multiple translations 5 Click Next gt 6 Now the language and filter settings for the mass operation to be carried out are selected The following actions are always executed for all entries in crossTank in the local server context therefore the selection of a language pair the definition of filters and the preview function are not available Delete sentence duplicates Removing translation duplicates Split multi value attributes in crossTank entries User Manual Across Step by Step 163 5 cross lank cross lank Maintenance crosslank Maintenance Wizard Specify a filter optional p gt Language pair bm uu oO Logical Field Condition Value Created by equal to Sonja Wagner A and Subjects equal to Web site m Se Verein as lt Back Next gt Cancel Help 7 First select the language pair for which you want to carry out the mass operation see 1 By selecting All languages as source and or target language you can determine that the mass operation is to be carried out simultaneously for all source and or target languages 8 Subsequently y
349. so use the shortcut key Alt Down Arrow To switch to the next paragraph that has been assigned the translated state use the icon in the navigation toolbar or the Ctrl Alt Right Arrow shortcut key lf you would like to set the state of all paragraphs to corrected go to gt gt Tools gt gt Mark all Paragraphs as gt gt Corrected You can use the context menu in the crossView to assign individual text sections or chapters to corrected User Manual Across Step by Step 128 4 Translating and Correcting Documents in Across Correcting Translations y Across Language Server v6 0 59795_en Sonja Wagner crossDesk Document correction Software localization with Across_EN docx Fact sheet_Localization M File View Tools Help OA 6 MSE crossView E V0 Ir IQ le i Content El Localizing Software with Across SAES 686808680800 4rF Ax W Software localization with Across_EN doc Seamlessly integrated localiza Software needs to be locali For example the user interi I To minimize expenses and B The Across Language Serv Standard Windows resour Standard Windows resour Microsoft NET resources i ae ey mat aom Ee lt Search Center Search for similar sentences in crossTank N gt Microsoft NET resources i and other formats that can This means that translators use the same multi forma and use a single translatic This
350. softkey will now open The necessary settings such as user assignment have already been completed If you now wish to save the softkey or send it by e mail to the new user click Save softkey or E mail softkey Click Next gt if you prefer to do this later Further information on softkeys is available in chapter 3 of the user manual Across at a Glance User Manual Across Step by Step 13 2 Administering Across Creating Users Fe User Wizard Ez License main properties G 5 License name Claire Dutreil Description Status logged out Last login never Mode Online License Offline License v Assign license to Claire Dutred m Default login claire dutrei Auto login Save Softkey E mail Softkey Bac EP a 14 You may now enter additional information regarding the user of the softkey All information entered with the User Wizard has already been entered Now click Finish to complete the creation of the new user profile User Wizard License information Salutation First name Last name E mail Claire Dutrea Claire dutred example com Street City Zip Mobile Fax Web Save Softkey E mail Softkey lt Back Cancel Heip 15 The new user profile has been created and is displayed in the list of users You can modify a user s information at any time by selecting the user in the Users module clicking on Properties and carrying out the desired changes
351. ss Edit Select none a en a Paste shortcut pe e sai igas Pinel oe oe Invert selection Clipboard Organize Nev Open Select a gt Libraries Documents My Documents gt Projects gt v Sear 4 E Desktop A Name g Date modified Type Size 4 3 Libraries dJ English Vereinigte Staaten 4 22 2014 10 47 AM _ File folder 4 B Documents di German Germany 4 22 2014 10 47 AM File folder s E My Documents di Benutzerdefinierte Office Meine Datenquellen di Outlook Dateien a English Vereinigte Staat a German Germany 85 Archiving projects 2 ag Projects module 3 Project Management with Across Finishing Projects 3 2 Archiving Projects Across offers you the possibility to transfer projects to an archive for external storage If needed archived projects can easily be moved to the Projects module at a later time and be restored 1 Inthe module bar on the left go to the Projects module click gt gt Projects gt gt Projects and select the project you would like to archive y Across Language Server v6 0 59795_en Sonja Wagner Projects E File View Tools Help 8 B amp G FF magae amp crossBoard Emeek ats cs GK Fy ProjectID Name Relation Progress Status Finish Description Projects All A 2 Display texts 0 Oof Oof1 docum 4 25 2014 7 E E Display texts i 3 Fact sheet_Locali Marketing 100 39 Finished 5 1 2014 fly Fact sheet_Across featu
352. ss Step by Step 68 3 Project Management with Across Creating and Customizing Document Settings Templates y Project Wizard EF Select document settings templates es Assigned Document Settings Templates Document Type Template diner_menu_EN xmi Tagged XML default Documents diner_menu_EN xmi Document settings template BlackBerry resources Conditional Fete ltt Diner menu 1 INX iPhone strings No document settings template Next gt s a Next gt Cancel Help 7 IncrossDesk the checked in document appears as follows to the translator crossview MBs Dems s Q Q e m I IPS E a diner_menu_EN xml El Document a aaa Italian pasta dish based on eggs pecorino ig romano guanciale and black pepper _ q price Lg a Penne all arrabbiata if price ltalian pasta dish based on garlic tomatoes 3 basil and red chilli kaa w o In line with the settings in the document settings template the contents of the calories element are locked for the translator This is evident from the gray background of the respective paragraphs and from the icon in crossView 3 5 2 3 Conditional XML Example The following step by step instructions demonstrate the use of Conditional XML on the basis of a simple XML document E CondtionalXii an lt doc gt Gali lt p gt No condition at all lt p gt aims 1 lt p translate yes gt To be translated lt p gt ailmg 2 lt p translat
353. ss Term Importing Terminology al crossTerm Import Wizard Select code page q Please choose a code page of the import file Western European v Look for correct character set Edit box es and list box es are sometimes combined in a combo box also called combination box acc s boite de dialogue case cocher Check boxes can exist alone or in a group box Each check box can be set on and off An X ap Command buttons also called push button are button shaped commands of which the OK and the fen tres en cascade ic ne d application Kontrollk stchen Menus and commands in GUI applications can be activated either by clicking with a mouse or by us message d alerte Most dialog boxes have a title that refers to the command that evoked the dialog The dialog box title Represents an application that has already started was minimized and is stil running Compare pr Schaitfiache y ce Loe SK cece meas conei Hep 8 Ifthe file to be imported contains indices i e usually language independent information at index level you can now select them in case you want to import them In MultiTerm indexes are usually assigned to a special sublanguage e g German Austria Then click Next gt crossTerm Import Wizard Define indexes q Please specify the MultiTerm languages that wil be processed as indexes Terms in all import languages that are mapped to an index wil be imported a
354. ssolo 2 Open the project for which you would like to carry out the export 3 Goto gt gt File gt gt Export to switch to the export dialog File Edit Project wiew Stringlist Tools Window Help New Ctrl N Open Ctrl O Close Save all Print Ctrl P Print Setup Page Setup Import Properties 1 Test 2 Test2 3 Test Exit User Manual Across Step by Step 277 10 Incorporating Data from Third Party Systems Terminology from Trados MultiTerm 4 Select the export format PASSOLO Glossary Maker Exporting Translation Lists Formats and Settings fit Ea Export Format Format Help Settings 7 PASSOLO translation file PASSOLO text format hs PASSOLO Glossary Maker Customizable Text Export Bl STAR XML Export Import 2 STAR TermStar Export S STAR TRANSIT TMX Export Z TRADOS MultiT erm X Export TRADOS MultiT erm Export El TRADOS TMX Export E TRADOS XML Export Import Creates Glossaries for PASSOLO 7 Write only strings that have a bookmark Write all strings Write strings from current view Write all existing and deleted strings Cancel i 5 Click Settings and select Unicode as the coding Confirm the selection with OK and click Next gt Glossary Maker Settings E4 Encoding Unicode Cancel 6 Specify the location of the translation memory you would like to export either manually or via Search and select the entries to be
355. t E 394 words 394 words 100 Select All Deselect Al Invert Selection _ Display finished tasks as well lt Back Cancel Help 5 If you would like to transfer a finished task to the Across Server you can select it by enabling the appropriate checkbox in the Finish column To transfer an intermediate state to the Across Server clear the corresponding checkbox Please note that by uploading the task to the Across Server all paragraphs whose editing state is translated will be set to locked Henceforth these paragraphs will be displayed as read only and can no longer be processed Therefore you should upload the task only if you are sure that you no longer need to edit the paragraphs with the editing state translated Please note that once you have activated the corresponding checkbox the selected task will no longer be available to you editing but for viewing only once it is transferred to the Across Server User Manual Across Step by Step 248 7 crossWAN Working Offline via the Internet Delivering crossWAN Tasks y Deliver Task Wizard Close tasks Select the tasks which you have completed or do not work with any longer These tasks can be viewed in the read only mode To resume working with the tasks please request them from the server again Finish T Project Document Available Progress J Fact sheet_Localization Software localization with Across_EN docx gt E 394 words 394 words 100
356. t gt Project gt gt TMX Export to switch to the export dialog in the shortcut translation menu memories User Manual Across Step by Step 276 10 Incorporating Data from Third Party Systems Translation Memories from Passolo Trane AY gernan source tytorial Global File Edt Cursor Wew Project Options Window Help ACSRSE m i 2799 4 5 E a German tutorial Projekivernsaltung ererbung von Proje lasnarmnen etailliene Statuzin infachera und troti Ba English UE tutorial s Project Manageme pesi Fein nheriting project se ias names 3 Select the source language s that the TM you would like to export should contain and use the icon to select the location of the translation memory you would like to export Click Start Export to export the desired TM in a TMX file x Export languages TMX Export file CAD okumente und Einstellungenadministrator Desktop T est Project target languages Chin PR China Czech Dutch E French Start export More gt gt 4 You can now use the crossTank Import Wizard to import the TMX file you have exported to Across Select all Follow the step by step instructions starting on page 145 10 3 Translation Memories from Passolo To export translation memories from Passolo follow the instructions below For additional information on exporting translation memories from Passolo please consult the relevant Passolo documentation 1 Start Pa
357. t Settings Templates 5 The customization of the document settings template for this example is finished Use the buttons Splitting Settings and Advanced to customize Word templates Information on this topic is available in the part on Word document settings templates in chapter 3 11 2 of the manual Across at a Glance 6 Now the document to be translated can be checked in to Across on the basis of the customized document settings template For this purpose select the customized document settings template in the respective dialog of the Project Wizard ty Project Wizard ec Select document settings templates ES Assigned Document Settings Templates Document Type Template Across features_EN docx Word 2007 2 default Documents Across features_EN docx Document settings template Configure Across geta q No document settings template lt Back cancel Hev 7 IncrossDesk the checked in document appears as follows to the translator Translating with Across The crossDesk multiformat editor is designed to meet translators requirements in the best way possible The translator s main work environment is croassDesk the Across multiformat editor All information relevant for the translation is displayed in this editor outside the document format Thus translators can concentrate on their actual work and do not need to be concerned with the idiosyncrasies of the document format in ques
358. t Wizard Apart from the selected import settings the log file contains detailed information on the imported terminology data and on their processing e g information on the successful import of entries and terms and if not imported information on why the import did not take place Further information on log files is available in chapter 7 12 4 of the user manual Across at a Glance Then click Next gt 7 First select the crossTerm instance to which you want to import the MultiTerm file Information on crossTerm instances is available in chapter 7 3 1 of the user manual Across at a Glance Click Next gt User Manual Across Step by Step 208 6 crossTerm Importing Terminology crossTerm Import Wizard Instance q y Select instance for import ee Default Across Server lt Back Next gt Cancel Help 8 Ifthe entries to be imported contain images they will be saved in a separate folder that has to be allocated in this step Click Browse select the corresponding folder and confirm by clicking OK Click Next gt o crossTerm Import Wizard Select image folder F 4 Select attachment folder Browse lt Back Next gt Cancel Heip 9 Now the language mapping takes place The languages and sublanguages of the terms from the import file are assigned to the languages and sublanguages in Across Click the corresponding row in the Languages column to map the desired language Should a language n
359. t hand area of the dialog lists all columns of the CSV file that do not contain any terms but other terminology information and which you have mapped to an Across data category Moreover all values of the default picklist Term type are listed From the list on the left hand side select the columns with other terminology information that are to be mapped to the selected column containing terms Then click gt in order to transfer the columns to the right hand area of the dialog thereby mapping the columns to the selected column containing terms Proceed in the same way to map the required term type to the column containing terms J Assignment of Term Data Categories Es Selected term column Deutsch Possible data categones Assigned data categones Genus A type abbreviated form of term type common name type equation gt type formula type full form type international scientific term type internationalism type logical expression type main entry term sa ox ceee 22 Then click OK User Manual Across Step by Step 189 6 crossTerm Importing Terminology J Assignment of Term Data Categories Selected term column Deutsch Possible data categories Assigned data categories Genus type main entry term OK Cancel Help 23 Continue until you have mapped the columns containing other terminology information and if applicable the term type for all columns containing terms Then clic
360. t insert these white spaces in the target text Across will interpret the sentence pair as having different numbers of sentences in the source text and target text when storing the translation unit to crossTank Therefore the sentence alignment dialog for aligning corresponding sentences will be displayed By disabling the option you can prevent the sentence alignment dialog from being displayed in such cases e Whether paragraphs containing fields e g placeables or tags are to be set to the editing state touched rather than translated if you want to further process the target document in Across after the alignment see step 8 e Whether paragraphs containing more than one format are to be set to the editing state touched rather than translated if you want to further process the target document in Across after the alignment see step 8 User Manual Across Step by Step 141 5 crossTank Aligning Translations Click Manual corrections if you would like to review and possibly correct the matching of the segments in the source and target documents Otherwise click Start Import and continue with step 16 After Across has analyzed the source and target documents and aligned the individual segments we recommend checking whether the alignment is correct Manual corrections 12 The source and target documents appear side by side in a tree structure divided into paragraphs In the upper part of the window the documents are displa
361. t sheet_Acro Across features Fact shest_Acro Across features Fact sheet_Acro Across features Fact sheet_Acro Across features Assigned to i Sonja Wagner E gt ES gt ii E gt ES gt i User Manual Across Step by Step Status Assigned Unassigned 0 Unassigned O05 Unassigned 0 Unassigned 0 Progress Words B04 B04 B04 Sd B04 48 3 Project Management with Across Creating Projects The icons below are used for the various tasks Icon Description Tasks carried out on the project level Tasks that are carried out at source document level Tasks to be performed at target language or target document level Project management Document preparation Term extraction Term translation Document translation Document review Document proofreading Document release External document editing m RY fo oe o eS m p 16 Now select a task that you would like to assign to a user In the user pane on the lower right inthe Task Assignment tab a list of users appears who are available to do the tasks as a result of the rights they have been assigned Enable the checkbox in front of the name of the desired user to assign the task Mame Rating Source Target language Relay kang C Sonja Wagner i 8 Unknown ESeEnglish Vereinigte HiGerman Germany Matt Jefferson F 8 Unknown ESjeEnalish Vereinigte HiGerman Germany C Christian Ziegler i 8 Unknown B Eng sh Vereinig
362. t_Acro Across features ES gt Dl Unassigned 0 828 5 1 2014 4 E crossWash_v4 dixmi JA Factsheet_Acro Across features gt Unassigned 0 828 5 1 2014 4 i amp Fact sheet Across features JA Factsheet_Acro Across features ES gt Il Unassigned 0 828 5 1 2014 4 Cockpit W Across features_EN docx 5a Fact sheet_Localization Q W Software localization with Acrc Projects Ls za Properties Open Multi Assignment Task Report Reset filter Assignment Workflow Available users for selected task Name Rating Source language Target language Relay lang Sonja Wagner D 8 Unknown EJEnglish Vereinigte BiGerman Germany J Matt Jefferson 8 Unknown E JEnglish Vereinigte BGerman Germany Christian Ziegler D 8 Unknown E JEnglish Vereinigte BiGerman Germany Quality Christian Ziegler D 8 Unknown lFrench France Mi German Germany gt O p Management Styles Assign Tas Unassign Task More gt gt Ka Administration lt gt Ready CAP NUM SCRL To concurrently assign several tasks to a user you must first select all tasks you want to assign to the user To do this keep the Ctrl key pressed and select the respective tasks with the mouse After that you can carry out the assignment as usual A notification appears to confirm that you have assigned the task to the selected user Click OK 3 Task Assignment G You hav
363. te HiGerman Germany C Christian Ziegler i 8 Unknown DllFrench France B Geman Geman ES p O p m To view the tasks that have already been assigned to a user select the user and click More gt gt on the right below the list of users The tasks that have been assigned to the user are then displayed in the pane at the bottom of the screen Click the buttons on the right next to the user window to view the profile of the selected user his or her personal calendar including holidays etc if necessary Er and to send him or her an e mail or an Across internal message Fa To send e mails to a user his or her e mail address must be available in the settings of that user Moreover the user s e mail settings must be entered under gt gt Tools gt gt Profile Settings gt gt General gt gt E Mail User Manual Across Step by Step 49 3 Project Management with Across Creating Projects 17 18 19 y Across Language Server v6 0 59795_en Sonja Wagner Tasks TA ES File View Tools Help O 86 eseOekar x crossBoard Taks iz z Ba he zA FY Project Document Assigned to Status Progress Words Deadline Project ID Projects All A i Factsheet Acro SW Sonja Wagner Assigned 5 1 2014 4 oe Al RS Factsheet_Acro Across features ES p BM S Matt Jefferson Unconfirm 0 828 5 1 2014 O O 3 Display texts ES Fact shee
364. ter be imported en bloc This mode is especially User Manual Across Step by Step 197 6 crossTerm Importing Terminology recommended for extensive terminology imports To run the import without user interaction select this mode and click Browse Enter a name and a location for the separate TBX file and click Save If you have an termbase definition file XDT file containing the structural information of dp your MultiTerm data you can add it under File with additional properties via XDT file Browse If you do not have the needed termbase definition file you should export it from MultiTerm and then select it in order to ensure a smooth import Step by step instructions for this are provided on page 282 The structural information in a MultiTerm import file may differ from the structural information defined in the associated termbase definition file XDT file For example the terminology data may contain a picklist value not defined in the associated XDT file A corresponding option enables you to decide how Across is to proceed in such cases By activating the option you can determine that only the structural information of the XDT file be used In this case structural information from the MultiTerm import file that does not match the XDT file will be deleted Log file A new option enables you to determine that a log file with detailed information on the import is to be created during the import The log will will be stored loc
365. ter version of TBX that comprises fewer data categories than the official TBX standard The following step by step instructions will help you learn how to import existing termbases in TBX format The crossTerm Import Wizard helps you to import your existing termbases in TBX format and to map the corresponding languages or subjects in crossTerm User Manual Across Step by Step 172 6 crossTerm Importing Terminology 1 Start the crossTerm Import Wizard In the crossTerm Manager you can start the wizard via the corresponding section on the crossTerm Manager start page via the G icon in the toolbar or via gt gt Tools gt gt Import in the menu bar a crossTerm Import Wizard Import terms q Use the crossTerm Import Wizard to import previously compiled terminology databases or lists and assign the corresponding languages and subjects in crossTerm goccccecccsecceccccescocccccceccesescecccsescocescesccccsscseeeeeg lt Back Cancel Help 2 Once the wizard has started click Next gt 3 First select TBX as import format Import template If you created an import template during a previous import See step 11 you can select it now To do this click Browse select the template with the file extension import and click Open Use an import template only for another import of the same data as during the creation of the import template or for an import of other data with the same entry structures and data cate
366. tering Across Creating QM Lists y Select Quality Criterion Mame Spel check Tagged SGML validity check Tagged XML validity check Tagged XML weill formedness check Visual XML structure check tim eal WRAL sealidith oho x cance 8 Click Finish to complete setting up the new QM list fy Criteria list Ea List contents 5 Criteria List Items Spell check Segments count match Empty content check lt Back Finish Cancel Help 9 The new list appears in the list of QM lists fy Criteria List Editor ES Criteria Lists ee Default criteria ist _ Advanced List 10 Click OK to return to the Quality Management area of the system settings You can edit user defined QM lists at any time by clicking Manage QM lists inthe quality management area of the system settings and then selecting the desired list Click Edit and carry out the desired changes User Manual Across Step by Step 36 i Softkeys module 2 Administering Across Creating Softkeys 2 7 Creating Softkeys A softkey must be created for every client workstation and made available to the user Softkeys provide an easy connection of Clients to the Server and serve to authenticate the users at the Server The selection of a softkey at login enables the client workstation to know how to exchange data with the Across Servers You can create two different types of licenses online and offline licenses For crossLA
367. text pairs that have already been translated gocsececeesssoeessoseceesosssesesssssesessesoosossssecsessssesess lt Back Cancel Help 4 Please enter a project name A project ID will be assigned automatically fy Project Wizard Ea Main project properties ES Project Name Fact sheet_Across features Project ID 4 Please select your source documents Filename Path Document type Add file s Add folder e lt Back Cancel Help 5 Now select the document or the documents to be edited within the project You would like to Add a document Click Add document s select the desired document and then click Open Add individual documents of a folder Click File s select the required documents e g by keeping the Ctrl key pressed and click Open Add all documents of a folder Click Folder and select the folder in which the documents are stored Determine whether any documents in subdirectories are also to be added and whether only documents in formats natively supported by Across see chapter 4 2 2 of the user manual Across at a Glance are to be taken into consideration Then click OK User Manual Across Step by Step 3 Project Management with Across Creating Projects iy Project Wizard Ea Main project properties ES Project Name Fact sheet_Across features Project ID 4 Please select your source documents Filename Path Document type Across features_E
368. text format RC RC2 DLG Windows Standardressourcen im Quelltextformat RC RC2 DLG B Microsoft NET resources in binary format EXE DLL OCX NLS SCR e 1t E Microsoft NET Ressourcen im Binarformat EXE DLL OCX NLS SCR B Microsoft NET resources in source text format RESX El Microsoft NET Ressourcen im Quelltextformat RESX and other formats that can be a component of software GUI Java Prope S Os sowie weitere Formate die Bestandteil von Software Oberflachen sein b oe Er r m eme eae oe n s n o lt gt lt gt BaepaQae Localizing Software with Across Ol L okalisierung von Software Oberflachen mit Seamlessly integrated localization of software and Across corresponding documentation Di E e Nahtlos integrierte Lokalisierung von Software und Software needs to be localized not only for the application as such but also for ol korrespondierenden Dokumenten machine controls diagnostic devices etc In all cases the contents of the user 7 interface are found in various informational literature regarding the product E Software Oberfl chen m ssen nicht nur f r Anwendungs Software als a eal solches lokalisiert werden sondern auch f r Maschinensteuerungen For example the user interface s error messages correspond with the respective Vv a Diagnose Ger te etc In allen F llen finden sich die Inhalte der
369. th Across Exporting and Importing Projects fy Export Projects Wizard z Use the Export Projects Wizard to save a project in a special archive file for further use in the future _ Do not show this info again 2 Once the wizard has started click Next gt 3 Select one or several projects that you want to export You can also activate or deactivate individual checkboxes to select documents and target languages if you merely want to export parts of projects Then click Next gt yg Export Projects Wizard Ea Choose the projects and their documents 5 Select Projects Projects Progress Display texts 0 mi Fact sheet_Localization ed Software localization with Across_EN docx 100 Fact sheet_Across features 0 cack neas conca 4 Select the package version in which the project s is are to be exported Among other things the package version depends on the version of the Across database The package version of your own Across installation is indicated in the information window that you can display with gt gt Help gt gt About Across Enter a file name and specify a storage location for the file in the respective field You can also select a location via Browse enter a file name and then click OK Additionally you can enter a comment If several projects are to be exported you can enter different comments for the individual projects by means of the drop down list P
370. that exist in crossTerm will always be used for the author and creation date Example In crossTerm there is an entry that contains a definition and that has been assigned the General subject The CSV file contains an entry with the same GUID that does not contain any definition and that has been assigned the Automotive technology subject After the import the crossTerm entry will be assigned the Automotive technology subject The definition will be removed as the entry in the CSV file does not contain any definition e gnore entry term properties of the CSV file The properties of the entries or terms that already exist in crossTerm will be retained The properties of the entries or terms from the CSV file will be discarded Example In crossTerm there is again an entry that contains a definition and that has been assigned the General subject The CSV file again contains an entry with the same GUID that does not contain any definition and that has been assigned the Automotive technology subject After the import the crossTerm entry will still contain the definition and will still be assigned to the General subject e Use most recent data categories according to the modification date The properties of the last modified entries and terms will be used Example In crossTerm there is an entry that was last modified on February 7 2013 The CSV file contains an entry with the same GUID that was last modified on February 15 2013
371. the filename by a corresponding language and sublanguage a user defined ending or no ending at all The latter option is only recommended when checking out only one language Check Out Wizard Select check out options x Keep structure of directories Create subfolders for each language oo Create subfolders for each document s Don t create subfolders Ending configuration Standard language names User defined ending No ending Id Previous pj Next 6 Click Next to start the check out procedure 7 After the documents have been checked out they are available for download in the form of a link It is also possible to download all documents in one zip archive To download a desired document click the link with the left mouse button or select Save target as using the right mouse button User Manual Across Step by Step 259 OA aA Across browser based 8 crossWeb for Browser Based Work with Across Reviewing Translations with crossWeb Check Out Wizard Check out progress x When the check out progress is finished you can download the file in the Link column Document Language Progress Link n Software localization Deutsch Deutschland 100 Deutsch Deutschland Software loc All documents 100 Check Out zip Id Previous Finish 8 Click Finish to exit the Check Out Wizard 8 3 Reviewing Translations with crossWeb The following step by step instructions show how you can review a translati
372. the form of a CRU file Client Response Unit that contains all data created while processing the task and that you must send to the project manager of your task on a Suitable data medium e g a CD or a USB stick by e mail or as an FTP download If you would like to export the task as a CRU file select the appropriate option and click Browse Select a location and enter a name for the CRU file Click Save to confirm Additionally select the package version of the Across Server You will get this information from the project manager on the Across Server side The package version of your Across installation is indicated in the information window that you can display with gt gt Help gt gt About Across Then click Next gt User Manual Across Step by Step 247 7 crossWAN Working Offline via the Internet Delivering crossWAN Tasks y Deliver Task Wizard Ey Please select the delivery mode Ea Please select the delivery mode Upload task s to the server directly crossWAN load C Create CRU cient response unit for manual import at server side crossWAN classic Please select package version of target server 17 Current lt Back Cancel Help 4 Select the task you would like to upload to the Server y Deliver Task Wizard Retrieve tasks sep Please choose the tasks you wouki like to deliver T Project Document Available Progress iv Es Fact sheet_Localization Software localization with Across_EN docx g
373. the task has been finished the project manager receives a notification about the completion of the task Now that the task has been finished it will no longer appear in list of pending tasks in the My Tasks module By default the My Tasks module shows only tasks that are not yet finished To display and open finished tasks click the icon in the header of the Status column to select Finished Thus all tasks that you have already finished will be displayed Select a task and click Open The task will be opened in read only mode 4 3 Quick Translate The following step by step instructions will help you to translate a document with Quick Translate Please note that only natively supported document formats can be translated with Quick Translate see chapter 4 2 2 of the user manual Across at a Glance Also only document translation tasks are possible correction tasks are not Please note that Across must be closed before starting a translation with Quick Translate 1 Select the document you wish to translate with Quick Translate via the Windows Explorer or from the desktop Right click to open the context and select Quick Translate with Across Across will then be started fy Quick Translate with Across 2 Log in with your user name and enter if necessary your password User Manual Across Step by Step 131 4 Translating and Correcting Documents in Across Quick Translate across Online Client
374. ther data with the same entry structures and data categories later on you can use the User Manual Across Step by Step 217 6 crossTerm Exporting Terminology template for this purpose see step 6 In this way the respective settings will be pre configured in the Export Wizard reducing or eliminating the need for manual adjustments Click Export to start the export of the crossTerm entries E crossTerm Export Wizard EF Specify additional export options r goccccccccccccssesececsesoceeesssog Secccacsovcccccecccccccccteocccee _ Export entnes completely overrides filter restrictions from previous dialog C Across TBX format warning no TBX standard Official TBX format cannot be imported by Across versions before v4 0 SP3 D Save export template cece Boot exon Hew 9 The export of the crossTerm entries begins lf there are no terms to be exported due to languages and or filters selected a corresponding message will be displayed In this case click OK and start the export with adjusted language and filter settings anew fy crossTerm Manager A No terms or entries can be exported with the selected filter options 10 Upon completion of the export click Finish al crossTerm Export Wizard Ez Specify additional export options r Select additional export options S p Export entnes completely overrides filter restrictions from previous dialog C Across TBX format
375. time Total time User Manual Across Step by Step 109 p0 Import Export WAN classic Tasks Wizard 3 Project Management with Across Exporting and Importing crossWAN Tasks 7 The CWU file has been saved at the desired location and can now be provided to the crossWAN classic user either on CD by e mail or on an FTP server 3 10 2 Importing crossWAN Tasks The following step by step instructions will help you understand how you can import tasks that have been translated and corrected in the crossWAN classic mode as Client Response Units CRU files The Import Export WAN classic Tasks Wizard supports you in importing the CRU files to Across Please note that you need to have the appropriate rights in order to be able to import crossWAN classic tasks By default the project manager is responsible for this task Information on project management of cross WAN tasks is available in chapter 4 12 of the user manual Across at a Glance 1 Start the Import Export WAN classic Tasks Wizard in the menu bar via gt gt Tools gt gt Import Export Offline Tasks Wizard fy Import Export WAN classic Tasks Wizard EN Import Export WAN classic Tasks Wizard Import Export WAN classic Tasks Wizard Do not show this info again Cancel Help 2 Once the wizard has started click Next gt 3 Select the Import option and enter the location and name of the CRU file If you prefer click Browse sele
376. ting Projects with crossWeb Project Wizard Document languages x Source language Englisch v Vereinigte Staaten v Available languages Target languages Englisch E Deutsch Deutschland i Franz sisch Niederl ndisch Italienisch HOOD Spanisch 2 A Bd Previous pj Next In addition to the source and target language you can also set corresponding sublanguages Select a sublanguage for the source language by selecting the desired sublanguage in the drop down list to the right of the source language To set the sublanguage of a target language select the corresponding target language and use the drop down list below the target language area to set the desired sublanguage Apart from the country specific sublanguages e g Germany Switzerland Austria etc for German you can also select the sublanguages uncorrected and simplified The first can be used specifically for document correction workflows e g uncorrected English of software developers into correct English The sublanguage simplified is employed for documents that are written in a language with simplified syntax and specialized trade terminology e g in the aerospace industry Then click Next 8 Now you can specify a document settings template Select the document for which you would like to assign the template and use the drop down list below the list of documents to select the desired template With the help of document settings templates
377. tinue with the integration of the new group until it is combined with all desired workflows and tasks To edit the settings of a group at any time select the desired group click Properties and then make the appropriate changes to the settings 2 3 2 Creating User Crowds The following step by step instructions explain how to create a new user crowd in Across 1 Use the module bar on the left to switch to the Groups module via gt gt Administration gt gt Groups User Manual Across Step by Step 23 Group Wizard T v Crowd properties 2 Administering Across Creating Groups and User Crowds fy Across Language Server v6 0 59795_en Sonja Wagner Groups O EA File View Tools Help El amp ol BE k E E 4 q crossBoard Groupe a amp Across Language Portal Solutions Acr Name Description A Projects S Correctors S crossAnalytics crossAnalytics T 3 crossAnalytics Administration ry crossAP S crossAPI crossAPI ry lt a SacrossConnect crossConnect 2 os W b mai onian S crossTerm Web read only anonymous crossTerm Web with read only anonymous access s Goasterin Web rai nrd gi S crossTerm Web read write crossTerm Web with read write access AA 2 Linguistic Supply Chain Managers amp Linguistic Supply Chain Managers ae Supply Chain Managers TER s Project Managers aaa Popei Managers Pen Managers S Reviewers Sa Reviewers Reviewers f A Supervisors S Super visors Supervisors s Terminologis
378. tion In line with the settings in the document settings template the paragraph lt acrossFeatures1 htm gt is not visible to the translator for comparison see the source document in Word below ae Translating with Across AES The crossDesk multiformat editor is designed to meet translators requirements in the best way possible z AcrossFeatures 1 htm gt The translator s main work environment is crossDesk the Across multiformat editor All information relevant for the translation is displayed in this editor outside the document format Thus translators can concentrate on their actual work and do not need to be concerned with the idiosyncrasies of the document format in question User Manual Across Step by Step 65 3 Project Management with Across Creating and Customizing Document Settings Templates Further information on document settings templates in general is available in chapter 4 2 5 of the manual Across at a Glance Further information on Word document settings templates is available in the corresponding section in chapter 3 11 2 of the manual Across at a Glance 3 5 2 2 Application Example XML Document The following step by step instructions assume that an XML document is to be translated with Tagged XML This XML document contains sections that are not to be translated In this example the contents of the external element calories are not to be translated as the calorie information is equally v
379. tion 1 General Description Across features_EN docx Subject Web site Format Word 2007 2013 P Creation Date 4 17 2014 n A A Commenting on When assigned packages are rejected the rejection can be commented in a dialog rejection window g Across Do you really want to reject processing the task Fact sheet_Across features Across features_EN docx German Germany 1 Document transtation Comment Sorry but I ve got a full schedule at the moment Best Regards Sonja User Manual Across Step by Step 117 4 Translating and Correcting Documents in Across Translating Documents ESF 4 Inthe lower pane of the My Tasks module click Open to open the translation task Transiahon task You can also confirm and open the task via gt gt File gt gt Open task To do this select the desired task from the list of tasks that have been assigned to you and click OK then click Confirm in the following dialog box y Across Language Server v6 0 59795_en Sonja Wagner My tasks E EA File View Tools Help 8 BG Fa ae 4 crossBoard a m a V Document translation Display texts crossWash_v4 dt 2 0 63 63 4 25 2014 CA LD E V Document translation Fact sheet_Across Across features_E 0 828 828 5 1 2014 Dashboard Oo oO My tasks Fact sheet_Across features E English Vereinigte Staaten 4 E German Germany Across features_EN docx 4 17 2014 3 34 01 PM Document translation 5 1 2014 3 20 00 PM Proje
380. tion Translation and correction Translation review correction 4 Previous Finish The project workflow should always be selected carefully and in coordination with the customer In this context the document type the utilization purpose and the requirements for the translation quality are some of the aspects that should be taken into consideration If the quality requirements are high greater emphasis may need to be put on the correction and review of the translation and the consideration and use of the QM criteria User Manual Across Step by Step 25 7 8 crossWeb for Browser Based Work with Across Checking out Documents with crossWeb Click Finish to finish the project creation 10 The check in process begins the source document s is are analyzed and prepared for processing Depending on the document this procedure may take a few minutes Check in progress Document Progress Remaining time Total time Status About Acro 87 2 sec 16 sec About Across_E Close 11 Upon completion of the check in process the tasks can be assigned to the respective users in the Tasks module 8 2 Checking out Documents with crossWeb The following step by step instructions will help you to learn how to check out documents in crossWeb i e to convert them to their original format After checking out a document and especially before publishing or forwarding the checked out document we recommend reviewing the document and c
381. tion file C Teminology AcrossTerms tbx Use export template Browse lt Back Next gt Cancel Heip Now select the cross Term instance which you want to export data from Information on crossTerm instances is available in chapter 7 3 1 of the user manual Across at a Glance In addition you can determine that only terminology available in the form of language pairs is to be exported If the option is disabled upon selection of English and German for example all entries containing terms in English and or German will be exported With the option enabled only entries containing at least one source language and one target language term are exported After activating the option you should select a language as source language of the language pair s to be exported Finally you can determine that standalone entries are to be exported as well Standalone entries are special terminology entries that do not contain any terms but only indexes with their index values If you activate the corresponding option standalone entries will be exported in addition to normal entries i e entries containing terms If you only want to export standalone entries it is sufficient not to select any language in the selection of the languages to be exported see step 7 You can set filters in the following step to export particular standalone entries Click Next gt 215 6 crossTerm Exporting Terminology crossTerm Export Wizard
382. to a user at a later point in time In this case continue with setting up the softkey You can select the respective softkey at any time and assign it to the desired user via Properties 5 You can enter additional information about this user in the Managed by tab User Manual Across Step by Step 38 2 Administering Across Creating Softkeys 3 User license ES General Managed by Salutation Ms v First name Claire Last name Dutred E mail Claire dutred example com Save Softkey E mail Softkey Cancel 6 Click Save Softkey to save the softkey to a folder on your local hard drive or ina network folder Click E mail Softkey to send the softkey directly by e mail via Across You can also exit the dialog box by clicking OK and save or send the softkey later by clicking Properties To send the softkey by e mail the e mail address of the softkey user must be entered in the Managed by tab The SMTP server must also be specified To do this enter the needed parameters under gt gt Tools gt gt Profile Settings gt gt General gt gt E mail 7 The new softkey appears in the list of created softkeys From now on the user for whom the license was created can use the softkey to log in to Across from his workstation fy Across Language Server v6 0 59795_en Sonja Wagner Softkeys B EN File View Tools Help ERA H J BH BG a ae A 2 crossBoard Sofikeys ae aa Christian Ziegler Mode Licence
383. tors m 2 requirements in the best waymmmasiizie B The translator s main work environrr E crossDesk the Across multiformat e Context View information relevant for the translati i displayed in this editor outside the document crossView format Thus translators can concentrate on their cross Term E actual work and do not need to be concerned PEP TTE TEET OTAI with the idiosyncrasies of the document format in 3 question V a B Resides the caurce and tarnet tevts_the translator E A OA 2 8 8 9 ER OCP BIUD ex ate B heading 1 Segoe Ul 2 Ubersetzen mit Across FEER B 2 d Zl X B Target Editor p E Quick fiter vis gt v lt gt Search Center ax Sg j WEER X T eg Pe Search for similar sentences in crossTank Translating with Across cross Tank concordance search amp crossSearch crossSearch 100 Ubersetzen mit Across Relations Marketing Concordance Fuz Ready 4 Translated CAP NUM SCRL Correction Mode As an alternative to the Edit Mode you can use the Correction Mode The paragraphs of the source and target texts are listed next to each other in table form the source text on the left the target text on the right and the current editing state in the center This allows you to work through the text systematically and modify the editing state of the paragraphs User Manual Across Step by Step 126 Correcting Translations 4 amp complete overview 4 Translating
384. tructure and the text content numbers abbreviation formatting etc into consideration in the comparison Therefore it is smarter than the comparison by structure only and usually delivers better results but is also somewhat slower e Comparison by identifiers takes IDs used in certain document formats only e g resource files into consideration This algorithm is best suited for text pairs with identical IDs After selecting the required algorithm click Next gt 11 A statistical overview comparing the two documents is displayed y Alignment Wizard 0 A Text pair alignment f Total comparison time 0 142 seconds Category Source document Target document Software localization with Across_ Software localization with Across_ Paragraphs 25 of 26 96 25 of 26 96 Sentences 26 of 28 92 26 of 28 92 Styles 12 of 15 80 12 of 18 66 Settings Manual corrections lt Back Start import Cancel Help Click Settings to determine the following e Whether in the case of aligned paragraphs with a sentence ratio of 2 1 or 1 2 in the source and target texts the matching is to be adopted without being checked and the paragraphs are to be treated as one translation unit e Whether white spaces at the end of a paragraph are to be taken into consideration by the sentence detection some source text editors insert white spaces at the end of a paragraph If this option is activated and the translator does no
385. try attachment None ongination Pickiist None modification Pickist None Subject Pickiist None Gender Pickiist Grammatical gender y lt gt Auto create new fields values crossTem settings ceace meas conei Hep 13 If you mapped picklists with predefined values in the course of the previous mapping you need to map the individual values of the MultiTerm picklists to the Across values Once the mapping has been completed click Next gt Importing MultiTerm data in the TXT file format Continue with step 15 al crossTerm Import Wizard Map picklist values q Please specify the mapping of MultiTerm pick st values to Across pick st values Note All information of MultiTerm data category values that are not mapped to Across data category values gets lost MuitiTerm pickist MultTerm value Across pickist Across value S Entry Subject Health and Safety Subjects None v Entry Subject General Windows Subjects None y Eon ne na Sn Term Gender mpl Grammatical gender None B Term Gender fpi Grammatical gender None v B Tem Gender m Grammatical gender masculine y B Tem Gender f Grammatical gender feminine B Termm Gender n Grammatical gender None y crossTem settings lt Back Cancel Help Exclusion 14 Now you can determine whether entries or terms that cannot be imported for various file reasons are to be written to an exclusion file Click Browse to define the storage location and file name Furthe
386. ts the corresponding source documents can also be checked out for example as a back up in case they are deleted by mistake To do this click the icon in the third column select the source language in addition to the target languages h as Language Progress J i PA t 4 sort Ascending and Finished al Sort Descending EF Columns gt v _Filters b Source language 3 4 J 4 V Assigned languages 4 Then click Next 5 If you are checking out several documents some of which have been translated into several languages it is easy to lose track of them To prevent this folders can be created for storing the documents during check out You have four different options here Keep structure of directories The sub folder structure that source documents had during project creation is preserved also during document check out Create subfolders for each language For each target and or source language a subfolder is created for all files of the respective language Create subfolders for each document For each document that was processed within the scope of the project and is to be checked out a separate subfolder is created for the files of the respective documents in all target languages checked out Don t create subfolders When this option is selected no subfolders will be created for storing documents Depending on the option you have chosen in the upper part of the dialog window you can expand
387. ts S Terminologists Terminologists i amp Translators S Transiators Translators y Groups New Properties Delete amp i BD Name PM Lastlogin Login state E mail a wo Sonja Wagner 4 17 2014 10 2 Online sonja wagner example com FEES amp Default Supervisor 4112014 1 45 10 Offiine Relations Languages Add R P Message iE Fonts mi lt gt Ready CAP NUM SCRL 2 In order to create new groups and user crowds click New below the pane on the upper right to start the Group Wizard 3 Once the wizard has started click Next gt y Group Wizard Administer user groups Ea S vy Use the Group Wizard to define the individual rights and profiles that have been established for a group of users The User Wizard allows you to assign each user to one or more groups _ Do not show this info again 4 Enter a name for the new user crowd and if desired add a description Enable the corresponding option to create a user crowd By means of the option May contain offline users you can determine whether offline users may be members of the crowd If yes a crossWAN packaging template can be selected from the drop down list If a template is selected the respective crossWAN package will automatically be created on the basis of this template when assigning a task to the crowd If no template is selected the dialog window for compiling the data for the offline users will be displayed when assigning a t
388. u can additionally determine that the crossTerm and crossTank entries are to be available permanently to the offline user for processing his tasks even after the task s are finished and transmitted We normally recommend leaving this option deactivated Te The settings specified in this dialog window can be changed or determined at all times in the properties of offline users in the crossWAN Settings tab Any changes do not affect tasks already assigned but only tasks assigned thereafter Click Next gt User Manual Across Step by Step 11 2 Administering Across Creating Users iy User Wizard ES crossWAN settings e Packaging template None crossTank _ Store as permanent entries crossTermm _ Store as permanent entries lt Back Cancel Help 9 Now enter additional data such as address and telephone number as required Then click Next gt fy User Wizard Ez Contact Information AA Address First name Lastname Dutred 2 Street Zip postal code City E mail Claire dutred example com cack ma Cr 10 If applicable enter the languages the new user will be working in Also select the corresponding degree of expertise from the drop down list in the Rating column and assign it to the user for the respective language Then click Next gt 3 User Wizard Languages Name Source Language Target Language E Eng sh m Geman French Em Dutch Eiita an E Spanish
389. ur text Edit Mode The source and target texts are shown underneath one another in separate windows the Source View at the top and the Target Editor at the bottom Correction Mode B The source text is shown side by side with the translation for the purpose of comparison In the Correction Mode you can only change the paragraph states In order to edit the paragraphs you need to use the Edit or Combi Mode Combi Mode E The default mode in crossDesk It presents a combination of the Correction and Edit modes In the upper pane the Context View the source and target texts are displayed side by side The current paragraph can be edited in the Target Editor in the usual manner In this example carrying out a correction task in crossDesk will be explained from the perspective of the Edit and Correction Modes Combi Mode J Across Language Server v6 0 59795_en Sonja Wagner crossDesk Document translation Across features_EN docx Fact sheet_Across features Marketing O Ea File View Tools Help x E E G SE mg S8 J e gt BSeSSeSSa 0 sinergi jm A QFyaRKEE ag crossView ax sl pate Q Q _crossTerm a x aa 0 IP Q e a_a translated m EMET Translating with Across a Translating with Across Ubersetzen mit Across A m 1 bersetzt E ez i Eg Translat gt The crossDesk multiformat editor is kejap A m x i rsetzer designed to meet transla
390. ut were checked in with the option Add folder the sub folder structures will be retained upon check out Create subfolders for each language For each target and or source language a folder is created for all files of the respective language Create subfolders for each document For each document that was processed within the scope of the project and is to be checked out a separate folder is created for the files of the respective documents in all target languages checked out To distinguish the files from each other the languages and sublanguages e g Manual_English USA doc or a user defined text can be appended or the file name can be retained as it is The latter option is only recommended when checking out only one language Don t create subfolders f this option is selected the files will be saved to the specified location without creating folders The file names can be expanded by the languages and sublanguages or a user defined text or retained as they are see above The latter option is only recommended when checking out only one language fy Check Out Wizard Select check out options ES Save to Folder C Users Sales User Documents Projects Keep structure of directores _ Create subfolders for each language _ Create subfolders for each document Don t create subfolders Standard language names User defined ending C No ending lt Back Check Out Cancel Help 7 Click Check out to start e
391. ute values to be exported or not to be exported In this way you can systematically exclude individual attribute values e g particular relations from the export The crossTank entries in which these attribute values occur are exported nevertheless but without these attribute values By default all attribute values are exported To exclude attribute values from the export deactivate them in the drop down lists If you use crossGrid you can use the icon in the Master Server column to select one or several Master Servers for which the attributes are to be displayed Then click Next gt E crossTank Export Wizard Choosing allowed values p List of property values alowed for export Master server Name Values Across Systems E Projects Display texts Fact sheet_Across feature v Across Systems Relations Marketing Sales Software Technical Do w Across Systems Structure attributes Button Header List item Paragraph y Across Systems Subjects Catalog Flyer General GUI Manual Ne w Select All Deselect all lt Back cancel He 6 Select the source language of the crossTank entries to be exported and click Next gt User Manual Across Step by Step 158 5 cross lank Exporting Translation Memories ff Select source language crossTank Export Wizard g Select source language for translations Source language All languages 7 Enable the correspo
392. w on on 3 Project Management with Across crossGrid 3 9 crossGrid 3 9 1 Creating and Delegating Packages The following step by step instructions will help you to understand how you can create packages in the crossGrid module and delegate them from your Across Server to a remote Across Server Your Across Server takes on the role of the Master Server The Across Server to which the packages are delegated by your Across Server is the so called Trusted Server The delegation of packages is done in three steps 1 First you have to create a package in the crossGrid module During the package creation select the Trusted Server the package is to be sent to 2 Next switch to the Tasks module and assign the corresponding tasks to this package in the same way as you assign tasks to Across users 3 Finally go to the crossGrid module and use the Build button to define which information e g crossTank and crossTerm entries should be transferred to the Trusted Server In the course of the compilation of this information you must select the package version of the Trusted Server Among other things the package version depends on the version of the Across database You must get this information from the project manager on the Trusted Server side The package version of your own Across installation is indicated in the information window that you can display with gt gt Help gt gt About Across After the information is c
393. w that you can display with gt gt Help gt gt About Across User Manual Across Step by Step 96 Expiration date T Project settings 3 Project Management with Across crossGrid 13 Furthermore you can set an expiration date for the transmitted crossTank and cross Term entries After this date the entries will no longer be available on the Trusted Server side After the expiration date the tasks can no longer be uploaded or opened Therefore you should take care of a substantial time buffer when defining the expiration date However the entries will not be deleted and can be re activated by updating the expiration date To do this the expiration date must first be changed on the Master Server side in the package properties using the button of the same name Subsequently the expiration date must be updated on the Trusted Server side by clicking Update list Finally you can permit the project settings to be modified on the Trusted Server side This option is relevant if you selected a project settings template when setting up the project With the help of these templates you can ensure that all involved in the project translators correctors etc work with the same settings e g those for the crossTank penalties If the option is deactivated the individuals involved in the project cannot modify the defined project settings Once you have made all the settings click Next gt Now you can select the dat
394. want to import the TBX file You can run the import with or without user interaction E crossTerm Import Wizard Select file to import Select file to import C Terminology Across TermCollection tbx Select import mode Import with user interaction C Import without user interaction all questionable entries wil be stored to a TMX TBX file L Create import log lt Back Next gt Cancel Help Import mode In the mode without user interaction all ambiguous terminology entries that would require interaction e g when importing homographs are saved to a separate I BX file These terminology entries can later be imported en bloc This mode is especially recommended for extensive TBX imports To run the import without user interaction User Manual Across Step by Step 174 6 crossTerm Importing Terminology select this mode and click Browse Enter a name and a location for the TBX file with the ambiguous translation units and click Save Log file A new option enables you to determine that a log file with detailed information on the import is to be created during the import The log will will be stored locally in the log directory of the respective Windows user You can access the log directory e g via the link in the log directory of the Across installation folder The log file can also be saved locally by means of a button in the final step of the crossTerm Import Wizard Apart from the selected import settings the l
395. ware with Across es Content gs S 5B Seamlessly integrated localization of software and corresponding E B Seamlessly integrated localiza documentation Software needs to be locali B For example the user inter To minimize expenses and El The Across Language Serv Standard Windows resour For example the user interface s error messages correspond with the respective passages in the user Standard Windows resour manuals and menu formulations and dialogs correspond with the related online help One text is Microsoft NET resources i translated internally during development while the other is translated in the documentation Microsoft NET saatas department or on the premises of outside language service provider Software needs to be localized not only for the application as such but also for machine controls diagnostic devices etc In all cases the contents of the user interface are found in various informational literature regarding the product and other formats that can To minimize expenses and maximize quality it is therefore important that the same language This means that translators resources be used for both the user interface and the descriptive documents v use the same multi forma a Pe ee een ta B and use a single translatic This process thoroughly tak O A 18 P FF 6 B oC TPT 1 B I U i X aA E Se allocation of c
396. warning no TBX standard Official TBX format cannot be imported by Across versions before v4 0 SP3 D Save export template Export successful Remaining time 0 00 00 elapsed time 0 00 05 11 The desired crossTerm entries have been successfully exported to the TBX file User Manual Across Step by Step 218 6 crossTerm Exporting Terminology 6 2 2 CSV Format The CSV format Comma Separated Values is a file format in which the data are separated by punctuation Such as a comma or semicolon This format is particularly well suited for the simple exchange of terminology tables If there are several values for the category to be exported e g several subjects these ME values will be separated from each other by means of the record separators s 0x241e and U 241E in the corresponding cell of the CSV file C ATT Fachgebiet FinancqEconomics When re importing the exported CSV file the record separators will be identified and the values will be imported correctly The crossTerm Export Wizard helps you to export your existing crossTerm data ind crossTerm 1 Start the crossTerm Export Wizard In the crossTerm Manager you can start the wizard Export Wizard via the corresponding section on the crossTerm Manager start page via the E icon in the toolbar or via gt gt Tools gt gt Export in the menu bar E cross Term Export Wizard Export teminology N Use the crossTerm Export Wizard to export termi
397. x you would like to reference in this example the Bibliography index and enter the value of the index in this example the bibliographic abbreviation Duden 1 The entered value must match the stored index value Click OK to confirm yg Edit index cross reference Index i Bib ography P Value Duden 1 o ces 4 The index cross reference will be inserted The cross reference will be checked automatically If the destination of the cross reference exists and the cross reference is thus valid the cross reference will be displayed in green If the cross reference is invalid it will be displayed in red In this case you can correct the invalid cross reference using the item Create index cross reference from the context menu Gesamtheit der in einem Fachgebiet bichen Fachw rter und ausdr cke Duden 1 gf SEE EE EES 5 Finish the editing of the entry by clicking Save and then Save entry User Manual Across Step by Step 241 6 crossTerm Administration of Bibliographic Sources with the Help of Indexes Result 1 Select the entry containing the index cross reference and click the index cross reference in the respective definition e Default Across Server Default Layout Entry F Showentry repot JZ Editenty Addterm 5 Merge entry Duplicate entry X Delete entry ID 30395 Definiti Text Gesamtheit der in einem Fachgebiet b chen Fachworter und ausdriicke Duden 1 i Seeeuaan
398. xport Wizard EA Select languages r Select languages to export 4 t Language Export German French Dutch Italian Spanish UOUUUES Select All Deselect All lt back cance He Selecting language If you activated the option for exporting language pairs in step 5 the application will not pairs display any languages but the language pairs with the source language selected in step 5 a crossTerm Export Wizard Ea Select languages a Select languages to export 4 t Language Export English French L Eng sh Dutch C English Italian E English Spanish C Select All Deselect All lt Back cance He Then click Next gt Selecting 8 Select the entry related details to be exported such as the subject and the definitions entry properties Use the and 4 icons to sort these details in the order in which they are to be exported e If you intend to re import the exported terminology data later on we recommend including the entry GUIDs in the export as these will greatly facilitate the subsequent re import to Across If you activate the export of the term GUIDs the export of the entry GUIDs will automatically be activated in the next wizard step as a unique mapping of the terminology data during re import is only possible with both GUIDs entry GUID and term v GUID The GUID is a globally unique identifier of a data object For example each entry and each term in crossTerm has a special GU
399. xporting the documeni s 8 Upon completion of the export process click Finish User Manual Across Step by Step 84 3 Project Management with Across Finishing Projects fy Check Out Wizard Select check out options Export Progress Document Language Progress fi Software localization with Acro Engish Vereinigte T Software localization with Acro German Germany M 9 Depending on the selected saving method the documents may be saved to a separate folder for each source document checked out or for each target language in which documents are checked out Sorting by documents bt Home Share View 4 Documents 4 E My Documents a Benutzerdefinierte Office Meine Datenquellen d Outlook Dateien Sorting by languages Projects 3 Biz RX Bore yaa Bevan B l E Copy path Easy access Edit Select none Copy Paste _ Move Copy Delete Rename New Properties o 2 Paste shortcut to tov X folder go Invert selection Clipboard Organize New Open Select gt di gt Libraries Documents My Documents gt Projects gt v Se A A i 3 4 BB Desktop Name Date modified Type Size 4 Libraries M Software localization with Across_EN 4 22 2014 10 49 AM File folder User Manual Across Step by Step de gt ib Projects Home Share View X Cut me Se Pas p nm RA New item opens HH Select all L M Copy path J Easy acce
400. y Step 53 DA AA Changing workflows in one go 3 Project Management with Across Changing the Workflow of Multiple Documents 3 3 Changing the Workflow of Multiple Documents The following step by step instructions show how you can easily and quickly change the workflow of multiple documents even of documents belonging to different projects The Multi Document Workflow Change Wizard assists you in concurrently changing the workflows of several documents Please note that you need to have the appropriate rights in order to be able to change the workflow of documents By default the project manager is responsible for this task 1 Go to the Projects module and select a project whose workflow you want to change Click the right mouse button and select the command Workflows from the context menu The Multi Document Workflow Change Wizard will be started Delete Properties Check Out Export to file Export to TMX Update Reports Duplicate Move to Archive Store Finished Translations to crossTank Pretranslation Add Target Language Add Document Search and Replace OM Check Deactivate Projects for My Session Expand Collapse 2 Once the wizard has started click Next gt y Multi Document Workflow Change Wizard Multi Document Workflow Change Wizard IOSA Multi Document Workflow Change Wizard Do not show this info again 3 Inthe left area of th
401. yed in their structure The middle part displayed a detailed view of the individual paragraphs The lower window shows the selected paragraph of the source and target documents fy Manual Corrections oa IS Fal Bowe Ee eo Oh eww ah S a my Software localization with Across_EN docx A i w Software localization with Across_DE docx A amp Content N A amp Content S Localizing Software with Across Le 1t Lokalisierung von Software Oberflachen mit Across B Seamlessly integrated localization of software and corresponding documen e kt B Nahtlos integrierte Lokalisierung von Software und korrespondierenden Dot B Software needs to be localized not only for the application as such but a D a B Software Oberfl chen m ssen nicht nur f r Anwendungs Software als sc B For example the user interface s error messages correspond with the re E B So korrespondieren beispielsweise die Fehlermeldungen der Software r B To minimize expenses and maximize quality it is therefore important the B Zur Minimierung der Aufw nde und Maximierung der Qualit t ist es dest B The Across Language Server therefore supports integrated localization c Ht Bl Der Across Language Server unterst tzt deshalb die integrierte Lokalisie B Standard Windows resources in binary format EXE DLL OCX NLS S e Hkt E Windows Standardressourcen im Binarformat EXE DLL OCX NLS S B Standard Windows resources in source
402. you would like to add new criteria to the list you need to create them first To do this go to gt gt Tools gt gt System Settings gt gt General gt gt Quality Management click Manage QM criteria and then New Create one or more criteria as needed You can then create a new QM list as described below in the step by step instructions General information on quality assurance in Across is available in chapter 4 5 of the user manual Across at a Glance 1 Go to the quality management settings via gt gt Tools gt gt System Settings gt gt General gt gt Quality Management y System Settings EJ Server can Manage QM criteria Manage QM ists Local v e Enabled quality checks General A Change History Criterion Enable seamen NET resource bounding spaces iv ar ala eae ea NET resources file extensions v Tank cue t i NET resources hotkeys check v cross ackag emplates da NET resources overlapping controls v Information 2 NET vis isdk J resources placeholders Language Settings Machine T tion NET resources text bounds v Paai P Bounding spaces check v Project Settings Templates Check of crossTank fuzzy matches matc v Public Holidays Check of date time and number format 2 Quality Management Consistent capitalization v Reporting crossTank 100 matc
403. yout is available globally i e to all users of the respective groups of an Across installation In contrast non public layouts will only be available in your personal Across environment and are invisible for other users The rights for a created public layout must be assigned to one or several Across user groups In this way the layout will be available to the users of the assigned groups for their work with crossTerm Manager or crossTerm Web The rights can be assigned in the Layouts subsection of the crossTerm section of the user group rights Further information on this is available at the end of these step by step instructions Click Next gt iy crossTerm Layout Wizard EJ Main layout properties i Name Alternative layout D am Public Recssessccascet canes He 5 Specify which data categories at entry level are to be displayed in the new layout Basically all data categories will be offered that are defined in the crossTerm settings at entry level Data categories at entry levels are data categories related to the entry or term e g definitions subjects images or index values Determine whether all data categories available in the respective crossTerm instance are to be displayed in the new layout or whether the new layout is to contain only certain data categories In the latter case activate the corresponding option and select the data categories to be displayed by check marking them Click Next gt Us
404. zation Fact sheet_Localization p Sonja Wagner Fact sheet_Localization_Import Project name Project Manager Sonja Wagner v _ Keep user s assignments Note If you choose this option the associated groups will be created if they do not exist cack _Net gt cance User Manual Across Step by Step 91 3 Project Management with Across Exporting and Importing Projects 7 Now you can determine the subjects and relations to be assigned to the projects to be imported The values that existed at the time of the export will be proposed lf the exported projects contained subjects or relations that no longer exist in Across you can have them created automatically by activating the corresponding option Click Import to import the project s iy Import Projects Wizard EJ Select target subjects and relations 5 Subject mapping Source Target E Flyer E Flyer v Import original subjects Relation mapping Source Target Marketing r Marketing v Import original relations cece a exes 8 The selected project s is are now imported y Import Projects Wizard Import Projects Wizard 5 Acton Remaining time Total time import archive Cancel EY Not avaiable Not available Cancel 9 Once the import has been completed click Finish The selected projects have thus been successfully imported User Manual Across Step by Step 92 A DA

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Scosche HDA4002 audio amplifier    viewLinc_userguide Ger.book  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file